Home

3Com VCX V7000 Owner's Manual

1. Log Out 4 Select one of the following options m To access the VCX Administrator provisioning application start page for either a regional or branch office click the office you want to manage in the Site Name column To access the IP Messaging provisioning application start page for an IP Messaging server from the P Messaging Server column click the server you want to manage See the P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide You are directed to the site or server provisioning page The VCX Administrator provisioning start page you see depends on the access account role you used to log in See VCX Administrator Access Roles When you access the VCX Administrator provisioning application the initial page you see depends on the role you used to access the application Figure 4 shows an example of the VCX Administrator provisioning application start page The menu options on the left side of each page are controlled by two of the main menu options found at the top of the page USERS and DIRECTORY 32 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY Figure 4 VCX Administrator Provisioning Start Page EAN 3Com VCX V7000 Networked Telephony Solution Data Server REG2 7 10 230 64 5 3COoM Copyright 2006 3Com Corporation All Rights Reserved USERS DIRECTORY SEARCH PREFERENCES MAIN LOG OUT Users phano Book Found 9 User s Phones Delete Selecte
2. m Phone Address Search using a phone extension assigned to a user a First Name Search using a user s first name a Last Name Search using a user s last name a Weblogin User Name Search using the username assigned to a user 250 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Group Name Search using the name of the group Group Address Search using the extension assigned to a group You can enter partial search words such as cal for CallingGroup or 64 for any extension containing 64 You can enter search criteria in one or more fields If you do not enter any search criteria the search tool returns all members in all groups To clear all fields click Reset 3 Click Search The Search Results page appears with results matching your search criteria For example Figure 90 shows search criteria se based on a group name Figure 90 Search for a Group Search Users Search Information Phone Address First Name Last Name Weblogin User Name Group Name se Group Address Figure 91 shows the search results for the criteria shown in Figure 90 Using the Group Search Tool 251 Figure 91 Group Name Search Results Search Results Found 6 Record s Phone Address First Name Last Name il Weblogin User Name GroupName GroupAddress GroupType 631001 Service 641010 Hunt Group 631004 Jose Service Hunt Group
3. Mapped by Number Index or Additional Feature User Arguments Feature Yes Forward Busy Yes Destination number Forward Ring No Answer Yes Destination number Forward Universal Yes Destination number Global Directory Yes Headset 3102 only Yes Hunt Group Log in Log out Yes Hunt Group number Local Directory Yes Malicious Call Trace Yes OK Yes Park Yes Park extension Personal Speed Dial Yes Index number Phone Login Logout Yes Release Yes Remote Fwd Universal Yes Source extension Destination extension Silent Monitor No Extension to be monitored System Appearance No For the Model 2102 you can configure a maximum of 3 System Appearance buttons The default is 3 Multiple buttons must be mapped consecutively For the Model 3102 you can configure a maximum of 9 System Appearance buttons The default is 3 Multiple buttons must be mapped consecutively System Speed Dial No Index number Transfer to Voicemail Yes Destination mailbox number View Hunt Group Yes View Personal Speed Dials Yes View System Speed Dials Yes Table 23 shows the features you can map to buttons on the VCX Manager s Telephone Model 3103 Note that you cannot map buttons to System Appearance lines By default the Manager s Telephone Mapping Features to Telephone Buttons 205 provides 10 soft button System Appearance lines which cannot be modified Table 23 Mappable Features for the Model 3103 Telephone Mapped by Number Index or Addit
4. AB1 Set NCP MAC This option is not used in VCX networks 3Com Telephone Local User Interface Menus 155 Table 20 Business and Basic Telephone LUI Menu Items continued Menu Option Description AB2 Show Lets you scroll through the locations in the memory of the EEProm telephone The information is presented in hexadecimal format and can be properly interpreted only by a 3Com service person AB3 Ping H3 IP This option is not used in VCX networks AB4 Reset Phone Reset the device You can perform the same task by removing power from the telephone However Option AB4 can be useful for cordless phones which cannot easily be disconnected from power Manager s Telephone Figure 50 shows the LUI controls on the Model 3103 Manager s Interface Telephone Figure 50 Local User Interface Controls on the 3103 Manager s Telephone 1 Display Panel When you press the button under the Features tab the fourth button in the series described in 6 the Configuration menu options appear in the Display Panel This Display Panel lists three configuration options at a time Use the scroll buttons see number 4 to navigate through the list of options 2 Right Buttons Invokes the action for the corresponding configuration option in the Display Panel That is the top button invokes the first 156 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS option the middle button invokes the second opti
5. Associated User Enter the extension of the phone associated with the Attendant Phone Address Console Associated User Enter the MAC address of the phone associated with the MAC Address Attendant Console Subscription Specifies the interval in seconds the Attendant Console waits Interval sec before implementing button configuration changes The default is 3600 seconds 6 minutes Click Save The Attendant Consoles page appears showing the added attendant console Map the telephone features to the desired feature buttons on the attendant console a From the Attendant Consoles page in the Actions column click Feature Mappings for the attendant console you want to edit The Attendant Console page appears See Figure 42 Figure 42 Attendant Console Feature Button Mapping Page Attendant Console Feature Mappings MAC Address O00 e0 bb aacbb cc Location main office Associated User Phone Address 641000 Associated User Phone MAC Address 00 e0 bb 0f ff0e Button Feature 1 Call Transfer x 2 Call Hold x 3 Call Conference v 4 Call Transfer Call Hold Se lee g Call Conference Call Park Attendant Serial Call b There are four feature buttons that can be mapped to one the five available telephone functions The available functions include a Call Hold a Call Park 126 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES c a Call Transfer a Conference a Attendant Serial Calling Fr
6. Name New User Status Enabled Phone Password eseesees Confirm Password eseeses Location Exclude from LCD Directory C Profile Information Phone Profile Default 4 Save f Cancel Jf Reset Fields marked with an asterisk are required 3 Edit field information as required using Table 12 as a guide Note that not Deleting a Phone Extension AN all the fields described in Table 12 appear on the Edit Phone page The following field does not appear on the Add Phone page or in Table 12 a Status Indicates the status of the phone either Enabled or Disabled A user can only make calls on a phone if it is enabled When you create a phone extension it is disabled by default The extension is enabled automatically when you assign it to a user You can use the Edit Phone page to enable or disable a phone extension once is assigned to a user Click Save This section describes how to delete one or more phone extensions You may want to delete the extension assigned to a user if the user leaves the company or moves to a different site WARNING If you delete a phone extension that is assigned to an attendant console the attendant console configuration is also deleted To prevent losing an attendant console configuration first edit the associated phone address for the attendant console so it does not use the same phone address as the phone you want to delete using
7. Override Total Timeout If enabled and no members are logged in to the circular hunt group or attendant sends a call to the call coverage point immediately This field is not available for linear hunt groups because if no linear hunt group members are logged in calls go to call coverage by default 1 The hunt group will try to provide an announcement to an unanswered call If an Announcement Number is not available the hunt group falls back to the provisioned Music on Hold Number If the MOH number is not available the call processor sends a ringback signal to the caller In the Queue Notification section choose one of the options described in Table 27 When an option is enabled all members of the hunt group or attendant regardless of group login status logged in or logged out receive a notification message on their telephone display panel when queued calls exceed the specified threshold Notification thresholds can be based on the number of calls waiting in the queue Number of Calls or how long a call has been waiting Time in 226 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Queue You can enable one or both options By default neither option is enabled For both options the initial notification is sent as soon as the threshold is exceeded and a 30 second timer starts If the call remains in the queue a notification is re sent when the 30 second timer elapses The second notification waits until the timer elapses even if ano
8. Silent Monitor Silent Monitor allows a supervisor to listen to calls that come into an agent s extension You the administrator configure a user such as a supervisor to have explicit permission to monitor one or more extensions The access code feature code for Silent Monitor is 425 Barge In Barge In allows a supervisor to speak to the agent and customer during a monitored call The access code feature code for Barge In is 428 See Configuring Silent Monitor and Barge In Camp On Camp On allows users who place a call to a busy or an unanswered internal telephone to be called back when the called telephone becomes available When a user activates Camp On the system monitors the called telephone When the called telephone becomes available the system automatically rings the calling party and redials the call See Configuring Camp On Parameters You can delete any Type of Service that is not currently assigned to a phone profile To delete a Type of Service In the USERS menu click Type of Service The Type Of Services page appears See Figure 21 Locate the Type of Service entry you want to delete In the Action column click Delete The Types of Service List page refreshes Editing Type of Services 1 Configuring Type of Service 79 To edit the features assigned to a Type of Service In the USERS menu click Type of Service The Type Of Services page appears See Figure 21 In th
9. Table 12 Add Phone Profile Field Descriptions continued Field Description Local Time Zone Specifies the time zone of where the server is located Field options preceded by x indicate time zones that support Daylight Savings Time adjustments Observe Daylight Savings Check this box if the time zone you selected observes Daylight Savings Time Music On Hold Number Enter the number the call processor dials to access Music on Hold MOH when a user puts a caller on hold The caller hears the audio file music or a recording associated with the MOH number MOH is set up through your messaging application for example 3Com IP Messaging If your system implements an IP Messaging client server configuration the server and each client must have distinct MOH access numbers For example an IP Messaging server could have 3 client systems In this case you could configure 1001 as the MOH number for the server 2001 as the MOH number for the first client 3001 as the MOH number for the second client and so on The number you enter depends on whether you want this phone to be associated with the server or one of the clients Voice Mail Number Enter the number the call processor dials to access voice mail messages This number is dialed automatically when a user presses the telephone s MSG button The voice mail access number sometimes referred to a the pilot number is configured through your messaging a
10. This configuration includes one pair of servers The primary server and the secondary server both run the IP Telephony and IP Messaging configuration The Call Records Service is enabled on the primary server only Two Pair of Servers This configuration includes two pairs of servers a Two servers run the IP Telephony software configuration The Call Records Service is enabled on the primary server only a Two servers run the IP Messaging configuration Multi site configurations can be configured several ways a Multiple regional offices all of which are self contained but interconnected Each office includes two servers each running the IP Telephony and IP Messaging configuration One of the offices also has a Call Records Server which runs on a separate server and provides billing information CDRs to all of the offices There are no branch offices a A single regional office that supports one or more branch offices a Multiple regional offices each of which supports one or more branch offices One of the regional offices contains Two servers running the Call Server configuration 20 CHAPTER 1 VCX SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW One or two servers running the IP Messaging services configuration The number of servers depends on whether the branch offices are configured with IP Messaging services or obtain that service from the regional office One server running the Authentication and Directory Server configuration
11. Managing Phone Profiles 93 a To remove member phones from a phone profile so you can delete the profile a In the USERS menu click Phones b Click the extension of a member phone c On the Edit Phone page use the Phone Profile drop down list to select a different profile d Click Save Repeat these steps for each phone profile member You cannot delete the default phone profile You can however remove the default phone profile designation and then delete the profile See Table 12 To delete one or more phone profiles In the USERS menu click Phone Profiles The Phone Profiles page appears listing all current profiles See Figure 25 You can delete one or more phone profiles a To delete one profile click Delete in the Actions column for the phone profile you want to remove To delete multiple profiles enter a check mark in the check box preceding each phone profile you want to delete and click Delete Selected The Phone Profiles page refreshes and the deleted phone profile or profiles is no longer listed You can clone an existing phone profile to save time when creating new profiles The cloning option generates an Add Profile page that duplicates the settings in an existing profile but allows you to modify any field value before saving This feature is particularly useful when you want to create a new phone profile that uses most of the settings already configured in an existing profile To clone a phone profile
12. One server running the Call Records Server configuration The other regional offices contain Two servers running the Call Server configuration One or two servers running the IP Messaging services configuration The number of servers depends on whether the branch offices are configured with IP Messaging services or obtain that service from the regional office One server running the Authentication and Directory Server configuration a Each branch office can operate with either a single IBM server or a 3Com V6000 Integrated Branch server The IBM server can run either the IP Telephony and IP Messaging configuration or the IP Telephony configuration The IP Telephony and IP Messaging configuration enables each branch office to have its own local IP Messaging service The IP Telephony configuration requires that each branch office obtain IP Messaging services from the regional office referred to as global messaging The 3Com V6000 Integrated Branch server runs the IP Telephony and IP Messaging configuration which enables local IP Messaging service With version 7 0 and higher you can set up IP Messaging in a client server configuration An IP Messaging server can support up to 20 IP Messaging clients One client can be dedicated to non voice applications such as Web provisioning e mail synchronization and logging The remaining clients can be dedicated to voice functions This type of setup diverts the stream of voice traffic and
13. Unassigned OutDial Patterns page appears See Figure 107 The page lists all the OutDial patterns configured on this server that have not been assigned to this end point Figure 107 End Point Unassigned OutDlal Patterns Page End Point Unassigned OutDial Patterns End Point CallP Primary R2a Found 1 OutDial Pattern s Assign Selected OutDial Pattern a Translation String fa Remoaveb4 Prev Page1lof1 Next 6 You can assign one OutDial pattern or multiple OutDial patterns m To assign one OutDial pattern click Assign in the Actions column for the OutDial pattern you want to assign a To assign multiple OutDial patterns enter a check mark in the check box preceding each OutDial pattern you want to assign then click Assign Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the assign action 7 Click OK The End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns page appears listing the assigned OutDial patterns See Figure 108 Figure 108 End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns Page Pattern Assigned End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns End Point CallP Primmary R2a Found 1 OutDial Pattern s Assign OutDial Patterns Unassign Selected OutDial Pattern Translation String Action x Prev Page1of1 Next Deleting OutDial Patterns from Existing End Points Managing Routes Adding Routes 1 1 Managing Routes 297 To delete OutDial patterns from existing end points Click End Points The
14. a Database replication has been enabled between the two regions See Global Directory Requirements for Replicated Regions with Branch Offices for more information a You run a script config sh on one region to identify the other region you want to include in the first region s global directory The topics in this section describe config sh script options The topics use the example of the Boston Chicago and Los Angeles regional offices Each regional office includes a pair of redundant VCX servers primary and secondary gt Directly Adding a User Directory to the Global Directory The Global Directory 39 For example it is possible to have three regional offices Boston Chicago and Los Angeles and not allow any of them to see the other s user directory It is also possible to set up a global directory at the Boston regional office that includes the users in Chicago but not allow the Chicago regional office see Boston s user directory You the administrator have complete control over how you want the user directories to be visible To run the config sh script you log on to one of the primary VCX regional servers Some script options prompt you to identify another region by entering an IP address or hostname The VCX server you log in to and the VCX servers you are asked to identify must be the servers running the Authentication and Directory service You can determine the IP address of a service by logging in to a prim
15. 3 Inside Ring Tone Ring Tone 1 Single Private Ring Tone Ring Tone 1 Single Outside Ring Tone Ring Tone 1 Single Call Waiting Ring Tone Ring Tone 1 Single Bridge Line Ring Tone Ring Tone 1 Single Hunt Group Ring Tone Ring Tone 1 Single Class of Service Default Class Of Service Y Type of Service Default Type Of Service Vv SSNS NSN SINS Dial Plan Internal A Call Center Names Call Fallback Create Mailbox Default Phone Profile 7 3 Enter the required field information using Table 12 as a guide Table 12 Add Phone Profile Field Descriptions Field Description Name Enter a unique name for the phone profile for example Sales Mgrs or NY branch8 Description Enter a description of the phone profile for example Regional Sales Managers 86 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Table 12 Add Phone Profile Field Descriptions continued Field Description Primary Call Processor Enter the IP address of the primary call processor This can be a regional primary call processor or a branch primary call processor If the server you are logged in to includes the Call Processor service for example an IP Telephony server this field displays the primary call processor IP address by default Secondary Call Processor Enter the IP address of the secondary c
16. 6410 Y Delete Active Action Prev Page of1 Next Editing a Number Translation Pattern Deleting a Number Translation Pattern 1 1 Configuring Number Translation USERS 267 To edit a number translation pattern From the Central Manager select the VCX server whose number translation configuration you want to modify see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Number Translation The Number Translations page appears listing all the currently configured translation patterns See Figure 100 Click the name of the translation pattern you want to edit in the Group Name column The Edit Number Translation page appears Enter the required field information using Table 29 as a guide Click Save The Number Translations page appears showing the changed values To delete a number translation pattern From the Central Manager select the VCX server whose number translation configuration you want to remove see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Number Translation The Numbe
17. For instructions on adding a pattern see Adding Patterns For information on dial rules and plans see Configuring Dial Rules and Configuring Dial Plans 6 Configure a route plan to associate a pattern and a route In this example you would create three route plans One plan associates Route1 with the pattern 61 The second plan associates Route1 with the pattern 62 The third plan associates Route2 with the pattern 81 For instructions see Adding a Route Plan 7 Configure an OutDial pattern and assign it to an end point associated with a route The OutDial pattern is used to strip off site specific access codes which facilitates call routing For instructions see Managing OutDial Patterns Next create a route on the host regional office to all branch offices located within its region as described in the next section Configuring a Route from a Regional Office to a Branch Office In a multi site system that includes branch offices a region must include a route to each of its branches This enables the regional office to route calls to branch users Do not configure routes directly to any branch offices in a different region Each region is responsible for routing calls to its branch offices This minimizes the number of routes that need to be configured and maintained This example describes how to create routes on a region that point to its branch offices The example uses the same simple multi site system describ
18. In the USERS menu click Phone Profiles The Phone Profiles page appears listing all current profiles See Figure 25 Click Clone in the Actions column for the phone profile you want to duplicate 94 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Upgrade Considerations The Add Profile page appears with all fields completed See Table 12 for a description of each field 3 Rename the profile and change other field values as required 4 Click Save The Phone Profiles page appears and the new phone profile is listed Phone profiles are a new feature in VCX v7 1 In previous versions of VCX software phone attributes such as dial plan ring tones voicemail number are configured for each phone extension If you have upgraded your VCX system to v7 1 from a previous version you should be aware of the upgrade implications described in this section Phone Settings The VCX v7 1 upgrade procedure creates one or more phone profiles based on data configured for phones in the VCX v7 0 system and assigns each phone to the appropriate phone profile Note the upgrade implications for the following phone configuration settings Registration Interval This setting specifies how often a registration message is sent to the VCX server to see if it is active and to check for updates to the phone configuration The VCX v7 1 upgrade procedure resets this parameter to the default value 3600 seconds one hour If you want a phone
19. In the USERS menu click Users The Users page appears In the Name column click the name of the user whose profile you want to edit The Edit User page appears Modify the fields as required See the tables in Adding a User Profile for field information Click Save The Users page reappears and the changes are saved You can clone an existing user to save time when creating new user profiles The cloning option only clones basic user information This feature is particularly useful when you are adding several users from the same geographical region To clone a user In the USERS menu click Users The Users page appears Click Clone in the Actions column The Edit User page appears with some fields completed Add new information for the cloned user Click Save The Users page appears with the cloned user listed You can delete a user profile when for example the user leaves the company When you delete a user profile any phone extension assigned to the user is unassigned and disabled 64 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES Deleting One User To delete one user In the USERS menu click Users The Users page appears Click Delete in the Actions column of the user you want to delete The Users page refreshes showing the new list of users Deleting Multiple Users To delete multiple users From the Users page enable the check box preceding each user you want to delete At the top of the U
20. VCX software will use the a phone s assigned IP address to determine if an ERL from the home location or the ERL from the backup location should be used This covers both of the following cases a A branch phone makes an emergency call when the phone has roamed to its regional call processor This enables the emergency call to go to regional emergency center a A branch phone makes an emergency call when the phone has failed over to its regional backup call processor This enables the emergency call to go to branch emergency center Adding ERLs_ When ERLs are configured you can configure Emergency Location Identification Numbers ELIN which are assigned through an emergency services administrator 132 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES To add an ERL 1 In the USERS menu click Emergency Services The Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services page appears See Figure 44 Figure 44 Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services Page Emergency Defaults WARNING If Emergency service settings are changed for example the gateway IP address or emergency digits they will not take effect until the telephones are power cycled Logging Gateway IP out of the telephone and logging back in is not adequate Address Emergency Emergency default information is used when there is no Callback Phone information in the emergency response database for a caller The defaults apply to the organization Individual locations
21. box preceding each calendar band you want to delete then click Delete Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the delete action Click OK The Calendar Bands page refreshes and the deleted calendar band or calendar bands is not listed 328 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Configuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY gt Understanding Translation Algorithms To successfully communicate with other voice networks the VCX system translates numbers based on source and destination calling patterns For example if an end user dials number 456789 and the number translation is configured so that the source pattern equals and the destination pattern equals 456 the result pattern is 3com com In this example the is 789 because the user dialed 456789 and the destination pattern is 456 789 is used in place of the in the result pattern and the translation is 789 3com com 456789 the original phone number gets translated as 789 3com com and is processed accordingly You can use the VCX Administrator application to manage number translation on either the USERS interface or the DIRECTORY interface This section describes how to configure number translation through the DIRECTORY interface Number translations configured in one interface do not appear in the other interface This section describes how pattern matching and translation strings are used The
22. coverage point See the description of call fallback in Table 12 In addition to the default call coverage point you can create a coverage plan for a phone extension A coverage plan consists of coverage rules A rule specifies the call coverage point voice mailbox or number to which unanswered calls should be redirected based on a specific date day of the week or time For example you can configure a coverage rule that specifies unanswered calls on weekends be redirected to another telephone number The following types of scheduled coverage rules are available listed in order of priority a One time events You can configure a rule for a one time event that lasts for a single day multiple days or part of a day a Repeating events Changing the Default Call Coverage Point for a Phone Configuring Call Coverage fora Telephone 171 You can configure a rule for events that repeat on a weekly basis These events span one day or less a Default coverage You can assign multiple coverage rules to a phone extension each rule covering a different time window event However one time and repeating events cannot overlap When you create a phone extension and associated voice mailbox VCX software automatically assigns the extension s voice mailbox as the default coverage point You can change the default call coverage point to a telephone number or extension to which unanswered calls to the extension should be redirected Al
23. if you select 631000 currently ranked 4 change the rank to 1 and click Submit entry 631201 switches rank from 1 to 4 Hunt group or attendant members must be logged in to the group to receive calls Group members can change their login status through the VCX User Interface or the Telephone User Interface TUI but you may want to override the current login status for example if a hunt group member forgets to log out and leaves the office for the day Note the following hunt group and attendant considerations m When a group member initiates a malicious call trace MCT on any call that member is automatically logged out of all groups to which the user belongs However the user can still accept direct dialed internal calls Configuring the Message Waiting Indicator for Hunt Group Members Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 247 a If a group member uses attendant serial calling to transfer a call and then logs out of the group the transferred call returns to another available group member To change the log in status of a hunt group or attendant member From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears Locate the gro
24. in the Display Name field for example New User the extension is appended to make the name unique for example New User_641100 The Add Phone Display Name field value is used regardless of name or extension values configured as noted below m EXTENSION The Display Panel shows the caller s phone extension as specified in the Add Phone page see Adding Phone Extensions ma FIRSTNAME LASTNAME The Display Panel shows the caller s first name and last name as specified in the Add User page see Adding a User Profile ma LASTNAME FIRSTNAME The Display Panel shows the caller s last name and first name as specified in the Add User page see Adding a User Profile m WEBLOGIN USERNAME The Display Panel shows the username configured for the caller s access to the VCX User web interface as specified in the Add User page see Adding a User Profile Ye Date Time Format Display Format Indicates the format used on the phone s LCD The following formats are available a MMM dd HH mm Nov 07 16 20 MMM dd hh mm a Nov 07 04 20 AM or Nov 07 04 20 PM a MM dd HH mm 11 07 16 20 a MM dd HH mm 11 07 04 20 AM or 11 07 04 20 PM a dd MMM HH mm 07 Nov 16 20 a dd MMM hh mm a 07 Nov 04 20 AM or 07 Nov 04 20 PM a dd MM HH mm 07 11 16 20 a dd MM hh mm a 07 11 04 20 AM or 07 11 04 20 PM 88 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES
25. lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window 240 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS 2 Click Phones The Phones page appears 3 Locate the phone extension you want to add to the group In the Actions column click Hunt Groups The Phone Assigned Hunt Groups page appears listing any groups of which the extension is a member See Figure 85 Figure 85 Phone Assigned Hunt Groups Page Phone Assigned Hunt Groups Found 1 Hunt Group s Assign External Hunt Groups Hunt int Groups ____Unassign Saale cancel Gm croup Name vA Group Name a Group Address Site Name Action O sales 631199 Regional Office 1 Unassign Prev Page of1 Next Note The Groups marked with are External Groups 5 Click Assign External Hunt Groups The Phone Unassigned External Hunt Groups page appears See Figure 86 Figure 86 Phone Unassigned External Hunt Groups Page Phone Unassigned External Hunt Groups Found 1 Hunt Group s __Assign Selected Fitter ee Group Name 4 Group Address Site Name Prev Page 1 of1 Next 6 Enable the check box preceding the group name and click Assign Selected A confirmation box appears verifying you really want to add this extension to the group Removing Local User Extensions from a Hunt Group or Attendant Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 241 7 Click OK The Phone Assigned Hun
26. opt 3com VCX vexdata db export prompt appears which lists the default path the regional user directory common file is located Press Enter 3Com does not recommend changing this default directory path Press Enter to return to the main menu The Boston global directory information will be updated with the Chicago user directory when the user directory databases resynchronize either 42 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY Removing a Directory Reference on a Regional Office Listing Regional Offices in a Global Directory automatically or manually see Manually Resynchronizing the Global Directory You can remove a regional directory from a regional office if the regional office moves is closed or if you no longer want users to see that directory When you remove a regional user directory database only the reference to that database is deleted from the specified server In the following example the Chicago user directory is configured on regional offices in Boston and Los Angeles The steps remove the Chicago user directory from the Boston regional office but maintain it on the Los Angeles regional office To remove a regional office from the global directory Log on to the primary VCX server in Boston using the cworks account and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata globaldir bin config sh The SELECT OPERATION prompt appears At the prompt enter 102 The Enter the Prima
27. user can answer their own telephone from another desk To answer the call a person uses an access code from any telephone within the network domain enters their security code user defines and then enters the extension number of the ringing phone This transfers the call to the telephone they are on The access code feature code is 455 The default security code is 52 See Configuring Directed Call Pickup Remote Forward Universal By enabling this feature you give a user the ability to forward someone else s calls to any other extension including their own within the network When enabled the remote destination phone s LED if available flashes for all forwarded calls and the LCD displays a call forward message This enables or disables the Call Forward Universal feature on the source phone The access code feature code is 468 See Configuring Remote Forward Universal 78 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES Deleting Type of Services Table 11 Calling Features for Phones continued Calling Feature Description Silent Monitor and Barge In The Silent Monitor and Barge In features are typically used in call centers to allow supervisors to listen to monitor and optionally join barge in a conversation between an agent and a customer to ensure proper customer support Unless the supervisor barges in neither the agent nor the customer are aware that the supervisor is monitoring the call
28. voice mail Note that using the User Phone Settings page to modify settings does not lock the settings the user can reconfigure them through the VCX User web interface Viewing Phone Registration Information You view the SIP registration information for a phone This information includes the phone extension and IP address assigned to the phone To view a phone s SIP registration information In the USERS menu click Users The Users page appears Figure 30 Click Phones in the Phones column for the end user whose phone registrations you want to view The User Assigned Phones page appears In the Actions column click Registrations The Phones Registrations page appears See Figure 35 Viewing Phone Registration Information 111 Figure 35 Phone Registrations Page Phone 641005 Phones Registrations Found 1 Registration s Logout All Priority End Time 600 DeletableUser Name Host 2006 05 15 08 50 37 0 Dynamic 641005 Port TypeLocked Contact URI Emergency Line Action 10 230 64 55 5060 SIP 0 Logout Note 1 You cannot logout a phone that is in the locked state Logout All also leaves the phones whose lock status is 1 2 Logout is not immediate It may take several seconds for this to occur Please refresh your page to see the changes The Phone Registrations page contains 9 columns of information available for each phone registration Note that if the user is not logged in to the phone extension
29. 1 a R2a identifies the primary call processor in region 2 a R2b identifies the secondary call processor in region 2 a R3a identifies the primary call processor in region 3 a R3b identifies the secondary call processor in region 3 The following steps configure the required routes on the primary VCX server hosting R1a 1 Access the server you want to manage in this case R1a see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears 2 Click DIRECTORY 3 Create six end points Add an end point of the type Call Processor that points to R1a Add an end point of the type Call Processor that points to R1b Add an end point of the type Call Processor that points to R2a Add an end point of the type Call Processor that points to R2b Add an end point of the type Call Processor that points to R3a 0 Qa 9090 Add an end point of the type Call Processor that points to R3b Route Plan Configuration Requirements 277 For instructions on adding an end point see Adding End Points Create three routes a Route includes the end points created for R1a and R1b b Route2 includes the end points created for R2a and R2b c Route3 includes the end points created for R3a and R3b For instructions on adding routes see Adding Routes Create a pattern for each region A pattern is a dial string prefix that indicates which regional call processor should receive a call You associat
30. 26 as a guide Table 26 Add Hunt Group Information Field Description Example Group Name A unique identifier for a hunt group or Support7toNoon attendant 224 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Table 26 Add Hunt Group Information continued Field Description Example Group Address The number dialed by callers to reach the 4000 hunt group or attendant This should be a new extension not a previously created extension VCX software automatically creates the extension and an associated voicemail box Type Identifies the type of group Hunt Group Linear m Hunt Group Linear a Hunt Group Circular a Calling Group If you are configuring an attendant select the most appropriate type For descriptions of the groups see Hunt Group Types Class of Service Default Class of Service Lists the existing Classes of Service you can assign to the hunt group or attendant Local Time Zone x GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US and Canada Displays a list of time zones You can select a time zone and then schedule time based coverage rules for the Hunt Group See Hunt Group and Attendant Call Coverage Options Observe Daylight Savings Enable the check box to automatically adjust the time for daylight savings Indicates whether or not the specified time zone observes the daylight savings time adjustment Announcement Number Identifies access to a voice file co
31. 311 a f this end point identifies an IP Messaging server use port number 5065 To verify what IP Port the IP Messaging software uses log in to the server hosting the IP Messaging service and enter the vex config services show command to list VCX configuration details Locate the entry TCP UDP Port on which the IPMS will receive SIP messages and note the port used d Select the type of end point from the Type drop down list which provides the following options a Gateway Identifies the end point as either a media gateway an IP Messaging server IP Messaging client or an IP Conferencing server a Terminal Identifies the end point as a device that will not register within the network a Call Processor Identifies the end point as a call processor Use this type of call processing end point when a call terminates at the end point for example in a single site system a Redirect Call Processor Identifies the end point as a redirect call processor Use this type of call processing end point when a call does not terminate at the end point and therefore requires further routing information For example in a multi site system a regional office can act as a redirect call processor for its branch offices Calls from a branch to destinations outside of the branch are sent to the regional office which redirects each call to its proper destination e Enter the IP address of the end point for example the VCX server hostin
32. 641001 marti Service G Hunt Group e410 003 Ricci ici Service i Hunt Group 641005 Mi Serice Hunt Group 641205 Ja ibau Service Hunt Group Prev Page of1 Next The hunt group named Service satisfied the search criteria Notice that the search results list all the members of the hunt group including members at remote sites indicated by an next to the phone address Figure 92 shows the search results if the Group Name criteria in Figure 90 is shortened to s In this example all groups with an s in their group name are displayed including a hunt group a page group and a call pickup group Figure 92 Group Name Search Results New Criteria Search Results GroupType Lopez ll i i Call Pickup Group Martin i Support Call Pickup Group Bauer Support Call Pickup Group Martin marti Serice Hunt Group Bauer jbauer Serice Hunt Group Ricci aricci Service Hunt Group Lima Service Hunt Group Ballen A Service Hunt Group Lee Service Hunt Group Lopez Sales Page Group Martin Sales Page Group Bauer Sales Page Group Prev Page Miiori Next 252 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS CONFIGURING DIAL PLANS PATTERNS AND DIAL RULES This chapter describes how to use the VCX Administrator provisioning application to manage dial plans patterns and dial rules This chapter includes the following topic
33. Band Band Band d Name Active Pattern Route O RouteReqta7 Y Regioni Regionta C RouteReg2a7Y Region2 Rea C RoutelPM voicemail Voicemail Prev Page A E 4 Click Add Route Plan The Add Route Plan page appears See Figure 117 Figure 117 Add Route Plan Page Add Route Plan Route Plan Information Name Pattern 508 area i Route Regionla Active V Source Based Requestor Profile Holiday Indirect Requestor v Phone Profile v Holiday v ay Time Band Week Day Band v Day Time Band v alendar Band Calendar Band v Save J Cancel f Reset 5 Enter the required information to add the route plan using the descriptions in Table 33 as a guide Managing Route Plans 307 There are 5 categories of source based routing input parameters The ordering of these categories determines the resultant output Database records are returned for the first categories that have a match The search uses the following order a Combination of or separate instances of Indirect Requestor Phone Profile or Holiday Holiday only Daytime Band and Weekday Band Calendar Band Date Band e No source based input parameters ao a0 o Table 33 Add Route Plan Fields Subheadings Field Description Route Plan Name Enter a unique name to identify this route plan for example IPM Route Pattern Choose the pattern f
34. Click Assign Phones The Call Pickup Group Unassigned Phones page appears and displays the phone number and name of all the users who are not members of the call pickup group Configuring Page Groups 213 3 Select the member or members you want to add to the group and click Add Selected alternatively you can click Assign in the Action column for a single member Each Call Pickup group can include a maximum of 75 members The updated Member Phones List page appears Figure 72 shows four phones added to the payroll call pickup group Figure 72 Call Pickup Group Phones Added Call Pickup Group Assigned Phones Call Pickup Group payroll Found 4 Phone s Assign Phones Unassign Selected EEE Phone Address v al Phone Address a First Name Last Name Action Fj 641000 Amadeo Ricci Unassign Fi 641001 Jean Martin Unassign Fj 641203 Harry Schultz Unassign Fi 641205 Jack Bauer Unassign Prev Page of 1 Next To remove a phone from a group click Unassign for the appropriate phone number To delete multiple phones select them by enabling the check box next to each entry and click Unassign Selected Configuring Page Groups You can configure Page Groups to allow a group member to send a voice audio message to other group members Member phones must be equipped with a speaker Paging is one way only page recipients cannot respond to the page Depending on how you configure paging on the system users may be able to sen
35. Click Phones in the Phones column The User Assigned Phones page appears Click Call Restrictions in the Actions column The Call Restrictions page appears You can delete one or more call restrictions a To delete one call restriction click Delete in the Actions column a To delete multiple call restrictions enter a check mark in the check box preceding each call restriction you want to delete then click Delete Selected A confirmation window appears Click OK The Call Restrictions page refreshes Viewing Call History The Call History page lists the most recent calls placed to and from a particular phone up to 100 calls To view the call history for a phone In the USERS menu click Users The Users page appears Figure 30 116 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES 2 Click Phones in the Phones column The User Assigned Phones page appears 3 Click Call History in the Actions column The Call History page appears See Figure 37 Figure 37 Call History Page Call History User Maria A Lopez Phone 641004 Incoming Outgoing Date Time Calling Party Date Time Called Party 2005 08 17 08 36 53 631000 2005 10 21 06 18 52 631001 2005 08 17 08 37 09 631002 2005 10 21 07 40 24 631002 2005 08 17 08 42 16 631001 2005 10 24 13 18 13 631002 2005 08 17 11 37 23 631002 2005 10 24 10 55 31 631001 2005 08 30 09 42 17 631001 2005 10 25 06 41 47 631001 2005 08 30 11 16 27 631000 2005 10 25 06 41 56 6
36. Click Save The Emergency Line ID Numbers page refreshes showing the ELIN To configure additional ELINs repeat c through g The ERL is now configured The emergency defaults are used when there is no information in the emergency response database for a emergency caller phone IP address Typically phone IP addresses are stored within ranges for a defined ERL WARNING If Emergency service settings or emergency lines are changed for example the gateway IP address or emergency numbers they will not take effect until the telephones are power cycled A simple logout login of the telephone is not sufficient 136 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Deleting ERLs Editing the IP Address Range of an ERL AN To add or edit the emergency defaults In the USERS menu click Emergency Services The Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services page appears See Figure 45 In the Gateway IP Address field enter the IP address of a system wide emergency gateway In the Emergency Callback Phone field enter the phone number of the contact person responsible for emergency situations within the organization for example a security guard Click Save The Emergency Default is applied to the entire organization To delete an ERL In the USERS menu click Emergency Services The Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services page appears Enter a check mark in the check box preceding the ERL you want to delete Clic
37. Day Bands page appears See Figure 127 You can delete one week day band or multiple week day bands a To delete one week day band click Delete in the Action column for the week day band entry you want to delete a To delete multiple week day bands enter a check mark in the check box preceding each week day band you want to delete then click Delete Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the delete action Click OK The Week Day Bands page refreshes and the deleted week day band or week day bands is not listed Managing Day Time Bands 323 Managing Day Time This section describes how to add edit and delete day time bands Day Bands time bands are based on the hour minute and second for a single day The configured data can be used for source based input parameters for destination number routing and number translation see Managing Route Plans and Configuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY The day time bands can also be used for scheduling group or phone call coverage see Hunt Group and Attendant Call Coverage Options and Configuring Call Coverage for a Telephone Adding Day Time To add day time bands Bands 1 From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add a time range based routing parameter see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears 2 Click DIRECTORY The DIRECTO
38. Directory Link Qo VCX V7000 3com Central Manager Display information and links to the Regional and Branch offices Click the Modify button below to edit the Site Names When you have finished b Central Manager click the Save button to store the names or click the Cancel button to cancel your Global Directory edits Regional and Branch Offices Site ID Site Type Site Name Site Access Pri IP Messaging Server Sec IP Messaging Server REG2V7 Regional Regional Office 2 Allowed 10 230 64 5 10 230 64 7 Modify Log Out The Global Directory Search Criteria page appears See Figure 9 The Global Directory 51 Figure 9 Global Directory Search Criteria Page Display information about users within the enterprise Global Directory Search Criteria Last Name Contains First Name Contains Site ld Contains Site Name Contains Extension Contains 3 You can search for end users using five criteria last name first name extension site ID or site name You can use one or more of these criteria to narrow your search results You can truncate search criteria and entries are not case sensitive For example you can enter it instead of Smith for the last name All last names containing the sequence it are returned Enter search criteria using the according to the following field descriptions a Last Name
39. Emergency Services 135 Configuring the Emergency Lines determines which ELINs should be assigned to each ERL You can configure multiple ELINs for each ERL a b h Click Emergency Services to return to the ERL configuration page From the Location Settings column click Emergency Lines for the ERL you want to configure The Emergency Line ID Numbers page appears Click Add ELIN The Add Emergency Line ID Number page appears In the ELIN field enter the Emergency Location Identification Number An ELIN is a fully qualified E 164 number In the Association Release Timer field enter the amount of time you want to leave the ELIN associated with the emergency caller The number is specified in hours and the range is 1 through 24 This association is used to callback the emergency caller After the configured time expires the association between the emergency caller and ELIN is dropped In case an ELIN is not in use it can be assigned to a new emergency caller and the association with an older emergency caller is overwritten with the association of the new emergency caller In the Usage Release Timer field enter in the maximum amount of time you want to allow the ELIN to remain in use The number is specified in hours and the range is 1 through 24 Normally an ELIN is freed when the emergency service provider goes on hook before the emergency caller goes on hook otherwise the ELIN is kept in use for the duration of this timer
40. End Points page appears See Figure 104 In the Actions column for an end point click the OutDial Patterns The End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns page appears See Figure 108 You can delete one OutDial pattern or multiple OutDial patterns a To delete one OutDial pattern click Unassign in the Actions column for the OutDial pattern you want to delete a To delete multiple OutDial patterns enter a check mark in the check box preceding each OutDial pattern you want to delete then click Unassign Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the delete action Click OK The End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns page refreshes This section provides the following information on route management How to add edit or delete a route a How to edit end points assigned to a route a How to edit route properties such as the route name and sort order To add a route From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add a route see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears Click DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY interface page appears See Figure 103 Click Routes The Routes page appears Figure 109 shows the Routes page with five routes configured 298 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Figure 109 Routes Page Routes Found 6 Route s Delete Selected Fitter as Name a Actions Region a End
41. Forward Universal See Configuring Remote Forward Universal a Silent Monitor and Barge In See Configuring Silent Monitor and Barge In Camp On Configured for all users See Configuring Camp On Parameters a Call Coverage See Configuring Call Coverage for a Telephone a Button Mappings See Mapping Features to Telephone Buttons a Call Restrictions See Configuring Phone Restrictions 164 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER a Registrations Displays the phones registration information See Viewing Phone Registration Information a Call History Displays the user s calling history See Viewing Call History a Selective Ringing See Configuring Selective Ringing a Bridge Permissions See Configuring Bridge Permissions a Bridged Phones See Mapping Bridged Extensions a Hunt Groups See Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants a Settings Overrides phone settings such as date and time format and ring tones configured by a user through the VCX User web interface See Modifying a User s Phone Settings a Unassign Unassigns this phone extension See Unassigning a Phone Extension For information on user interface components see Using the Graphical User Interface Configuring ToS Phone Features The phone features described in this section are provided by the ToS enabled for a phone See Configuring Type of Service for information
42. IP addresses 136 F feature mapping buttons 127 features and type of service 79 font size specifying for phone LCD 58 forward to trunk calls disabling for a class of service 68 enabling for a class of service 68 G gateway IP address 152 157 global directory 37 accessing 50 adding user directory 39 and call routing 37 editing user directory 41 log files 52 manually loading user directory 45 manually resynchronizing user directory 45 overview 37 searching for end users 50 group call pickup 210 group paging 213 groups searching for 249 H holidays adding 318 deleting 320 editing 319 managing 318 hunt groups adding phone extensions 236 call coverage points default 227 scheduled 227 calling 219 circular 219 configuring MWI 247 linear 219 queue notification thresholds 225 removing external user extensions 242 removing local user extensions 241 resetting ring sequence 245 setting a ring tone 117 timeout values 219 types 218 using the search tool 249 l IP address viewing 152 IP Messaging Module 17 IP Messaging provisioning application 28 L language specifying for phone LCD 58 LCD directory viewing 64 LEDs status lights telephone diagnostics 154 lights testing on the telephone 154 linear hunt group 219 listing regional offices from a branch office 43 Local User Interface and PoE 145 for telephones 145 log file for global directory 52 LUI See Local User Interface LUI
43. Name column click the name of the OutDial pattern you want to modify The Edit OutDial Pattern page appears Modify the fields as required See the field descriptions in Adding OutDial Patterns Click Save The OutDial Patterns page appears To delete one or more OutDial patterns Click OutDial Patterns The OutDial Patterns page appears See Figure 121 You can delete one pattern or multiple patterns a To delete one pattern click Delete in the Action column for the pattern entry you want to delete a To delete multiple patterns enter a check mark in the check box preceding each pattern you want to delete then click Delete Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the delete action An OutDial pattern cannot be deleted if it is associated with a route The VCX system generates an error if you try to delete an OutDial pattern that is associated with a route 316 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES 3 Click OK The OutDial Patterns page refreshes and the deleted OutDial pattern or patterns is not listed Managing Requestors Adding Requestors 1 This section describes how to add edit and delete requestors Requestors are usually Tier 1 for example a gateway or Tier 2 for example the call controller components used for source based input parameters for destination number routing and number translation see Managing Route Plans and Configuring Number Transl
44. Points Delete Region2a End Points Delete Region2b End Points Delete Region3a End Points Delete Voicemail End Points Delete Prev Page 1m of1 Next Table 31 describes the fields on the Routes page Table 31 List of Routes Field Descriptions Column Description Check Box Use the check box to select multiple routes when you want to delete more than one route at a time Name Specifies the name of the route Actions Provides the following options a End Points Click to assign end point to the route and edit route properties See Assigning End Points to Routes Assigning an OutDial Pattern to a Route and Editing Priorities of End Points Assigned to a Route a Delete Click to delete the route See Deleting Routes 4 To add a route click Add Route The Add Route page appears See Figure 110 Figure 110 Add Route Page Add Route Route Information Name Editing Routes Deleting Routes Assigning End Points to Routes 1 1 Managing Routes 299 5 In the Name field enter a unique name to identify the new route 6 Click Save The Routes page appears listing the new route Next assign an end point to the route see Assigning End Points to Routes To edit a route Click Routes The Routes page appears See Figure 109 In the Name column click the name of the route you want to modify The Edit Route page appears Modify the route name as req
45. Prev Page of1 Next 3 Click Assign End Points The Route Unassigned End Points page appears See Figure 112 Figure 112 Route Unassigned End Points Page Found 5 End Point s Assign Selected rater EE n ull Name a Description Active O Call Processor CallP Primary R2a Primary CallP Reg2a7 1 Assign o Call Processor CallP Primary R3a Primary CallP Reg3a7 1 Assign O CallProcessor CallP Secondary R2b Secondary CallP Reg2b7 4 Assign O Call Processor CallP Secondary R3a Secondary CallP Reg3a7 1 Assign O Gateway IPM2 Voice and MOH 2 1 Assign Prev Page of1 Next 4 You can assign one end point or multiple end points a To assign one end point click Assign in the Action column for the end point you want to add To assign multiple end points enter a check mark in the check box preceding each end point you want to add then click Assign Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the assignment action Editing Priorities of End Points Assigned to a Route Managing Routes 301 Click OK The Route Assigned End Points page refreshes End point priority determines the order of call processing within a route The end point with the highest priority one 1 is the highest processes all calls If the end point with the highest priority is unavailable the end point with the next highest priority begins processing calls To change the priority of an en
46. R1a to have all of the routing information for the other regional servers as configured in steps 2 through 6 In this case on 278 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES servers R2a and R3a you would set up a route that includes end point R1a defined as type Redirect Call Processor This option reduces the number of routes you have to configure If you have a large installation you could pick one region and have all other servers have one redirect route to that region Then you would add all of the direct routes to all of the other sites on just that region R1a in this example For very large installations multiple regions with many branches each region could handle the direct routes to branches in that region and have redirect routes for certain patterns to other regions Consequently one region would not have to resolve every route Note that if a call can terminate at a region because there are users configured to use that region s call processor you should always configure a route on the region to the region itself For example R2a could have a route to R1a set up as a Redirect Call Processor type to forward calls to R2a destined for another location R2a should also have a route to itself set up as a Call Processor type to accept calls to R2a Once complete these steps users can place calls between the regional offices If you have branch offices you must configure routes between the regional office
47. Retrieving VCX CDRs Manually Retrieving VCX CDRs Automatically CDRs can be downloaded from either the VCX or IP Messaging applications within the IP Telephony Suite and can be retrieved either manually or automatically See the VCX Maintenance Guide for a description of VCX CDR fields See the P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide for information on the IP Messaging CDRs To manually retrieve the latest VCX CDRs 1 Select VCX in the Data selection pane A W N ul From the Data menu select VCX then select Download VCX Records The Retrieving CDR records from server dialog box opens and the application begins retrieving CDRs When the status bar in the dialog box indicates the download is complete click Close To automatically retrieve the latest VCX CDRs at a specific time interval Select VCX in the Data selection pane From the View menu select Preferences In the Preferences dialog box select the Retrieval tab Enter a check mark in the check box labeled VCX Automatically retrieve every lt hour gt hours field In the lt hour gt field enter how often in hours you want the VCX Call Reports application to retrieve CDRs Click OK Managing the CDR Display and Generating Reports 339 Managing the CDR Display and Generating Reports This section provides a general description of the features available in the VCX Call Reports user interface For detailed information se
48. Ringing Bridge emissions Bridged Phones Hunt Groups Settings Delete Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Restrictions O 641007 New User Default Disabled Riealstatons Call History Selective Ringing Bridge Permissions Bridged Phones HuntGroups Settings Delete Eeatures Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Restrictions O 641009 New User Default Disabled Registrations CallHistory Selective Ringing Bridge Permissions Bridged Phones Hunt Groups Settings Delete Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Restrictions O 641011 Page Group Default Group Page Enabled Registrations CallHistory Selective Ringing Bridge Permissions Bridged Phones Hunt Groups Settings Delete Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Restrictions O 641200 Ed Kelly Default Ed Kelly Enabled Registrations Call History Selective Ringing Bridge Permissions Bridged Phones HuntGroups Settings Delete Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Restrictions O 641201 aa Defaul Claude Enabled Registrations CallHistory Selective Ringing Bridge aee Permissions Bridged Phones HuntGroups Settings Delete Prev Page Ia of2 Next gt gt You can use this page to perform the following tasks a Add one or more phone extensions Click Add Phone and see Adding Phone Extensions a Modify phone extension settings Click a phone extension in the Phone Address column and see Modifying a
49. Services for more information This section describes how to add edit and delete end points and manage the OutDial patterns associated with them An end point is usually a Tier 1 component that is a destination in a route End points are assigned to routes and are returned to the signaling application in the route response The end points you need to define depend on your system configuration See Route Plan Configuration Requirements for information To add an end point From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add an end point see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears Click DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY interface page appears See Figure 103 Click End Points The End Points page appears Figure 104 shows eight configured end points 292 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Figure 104 End Points Page End Points Found 8 End Point s Add End Point Delete Selected Fiter A Type Active Name a Description Site Id Network Address Actions F C asai Y CallP Primary Ria Primary CallP Reg1a7 63 10 230 63 6 5060 OutDial Patterns Delete o ca essor Y CalP Primar R2a Primary CallP Reg2a7 64 10 230 64 6 5060 OutDial Patterns Delete o Sr Y CallP Primary R3a_ Primary CallP Reg3a7 65 10 230 64 12 5080 OutDial Patterns Delete O eal ssor Y CalP Secondar R1b Secondary CallP Reg1b763
50. Table 36 Call Reports Application Preferences Fields Field Section Field Description Network Addresses VCX IP Address Enter the IP address of the server storing the CDRs you want to view This can be the server hosting m An Accounting service Enter the IP address associated with eth1 on the primary VCX call processor m The Call Records service If you have configured a Call Records service to collect CDRs from multiple Accounting services enter the IP address of the server hosting the Call Records service Typically in a multi site VCX system the Call Records service runs on separate Call Records server IPMSG IP Address Enter the IP address of the server hosting the primary IP Messaging module Use SFTP Specifies whether the Call Reports application should use the Secure File Transfer Protocol SFTP when retrieving CDRs Enter a check mark in the check box to enable SFTP Changing Configuration Preferences 341 Table 36 Call Reports Application Preferences Fields continued Field Section Field Description VCX CDR Login User Name Specifies the username of the account used to access the directory on the VCX server to which CDRs are written The default is cworks Password Specifies the password of the account Remote Directory used to access the directory on the VCX server to which CDRs are written The default is cworks Specifies the path on the VCX server where CDRs are loca
51. This option is not used in VCX networks Test LED amp LCD Turns on all LEDs for 5 seconds and tests every pixel on the Display Panel Test Buttons Puts the telephone in the button test state Press any telephone button to see a description of the button s function VCX Configuration Displays the following menu options Set VLAN Configuration Used to enable or disable VLAN configuration Enable You are prompted to enter the VLAN ID A valid VLAN ID is in the range of 0 through 4095 Press the pound key to store it in memory Disable VLANs are disabled This is the default Diagnostics Allows you to display network statistics for the phone This option requires a password The default password is the phone extension 160 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER This chapter describes how to configure telephone features that apply to individual phones in your VCX system This chapter includes the following topics Configuring Phone Features a Configuring ToS Phone Features Configuring Call Coverage for a Telephone Configuring Bridge Permissions a Mapping Bridged Extensions All of the phone features described in this chapter are configured through VCX Administrator provisioning application menu options available on the USERS interface See Accessing the User Configuration Interface Be sure to set your Web browser pref
52. Voice Mail Prev Page1of1 Next 5 Click the name of the coverage rule you want to edit in this example the rule Vacation is selected The Edit Coverage Rule page appears showing the settings for the selected coverage rule See Figure 56 Figure 58 Edit Call Coverage Rule Page Edit Coverage Rule Phone 641004 Coverage Rule Information Name Yacation Call Coverage Send to Voice Mail Send to Number 641000 Holiday Coverage Settings Date wij v January Event Coverage Settings StartTime 15 0 StartDate July 14 M2006 v EndTime 8 0 EndDate July 24 2006 v All Day O Weekly Coverage Settings StatTime 0 0 Sunday o EndTime 0 0 Monday o All Day Tuesday Oo Wednesday Thursday Friday oO Saturday o Save f Cancel Jf Reset 180 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER Deleting a Call Coverage Rule You can modify any rule attribute 6 Edit the rule identifier in the Name field 7 Change the Call Coverage option for this rule Send to Voice Mail Unanswered calls to the phone extension are redirected to the group voice mailbox If Call Fallback is enabled for the extension this is the only valid call coverage option see page 173 Sent to Number Unanswered calls to the phone extension are redirec
53. a user through the VCX User web interface or by the administrator through the VCX Administration web interface If bridge permissions are configured for an extension through the Administration interface the Bridge Permissions tab in the VCX User interface for that extension has preassigned values However the user assigned that extension can delete a administrator assigned bridge permission or assign others Bridging is not supported on Basic phones Models 2101 or 3101 For more information on how bridge permissions work and feature interaction see the VCX Telephone Guide To grant permission for a secondary phone to receive calls to a primary phone Access the office location of the user whose phone you want to bridge see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Locate the user assigned to the phone you want to designate as the primary the phone whose calls you want to allow other phones to receive Alternatively you can click Phones in the USERS interface menu and go to step 4 In the Phones column click the Phones link The User Assigned Phones page appears for the selected user See Figure 51 In the Actions column click Bridge Permissions The Bridge Permissions Assigned Phones page appears Choose one o
54. and IP Messaging configuration that includes a call processor server and an IP Messaging server Beginning with VCX version 7 0 you can set up IP Messaging in a client server configuration An IP Messaging server can support up to 20 IP Messaging clients You must define a route on the regional call processor that point to the IP Messaging servers primary and secondary and to each client 276 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES The remaining topics in this section describe the route plans you need to create for a multi site system Note that these topics reference other topics in this chapter that describe how to configure a route plan and its elements end points patterns and routes You can also use the Route Plan Wizard to create a route plan and its elements See Using the Route Plan Wizard Configuring Routes Between Regional Offices If users in one region need to make calls to and receive calls from users in another region you must create routes between all the call processors in both regional offices This example describes how to create routes on the primary call processor in one regional office to the other call processors in a multi site system The example uses the following simple multi site system in which the six servers are running IP Telephony and IP Messaging configurations a Ria identifies the primary call processor in region 1 a R1b identifies the secondary call processor in region
55. and click Assign Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to confirm the assignment Click OK The Dial Plan Assigned Dial Rules page appears listing the dial rules associated with the dial plan Editing Dial Plan Names 1 Changing the Dial Rules Associated with a Dial Plan 1 Deleting Dial Plans 2 Configuring Dial Plans 257 To edit a dial plan name Click Dial Plans The Dial Plans page appears See Figure 94 Click the name of the dial plan you want to edit in the Name column The Edit Dial Plan page appears Revise the name of the dial plan and click Save The Dial Plans page appears showing the changed name To assign additional dial rules to a dial plan or remove existing dial rules assigned to a dial plan Click Dial Plans The Dial Plans page appears See Figure 94 Click Dial Rules in the row for the dial plan The Dial Plan Assigned Dial Rules page appears See Figure 95 To assign additional dial rules click Assign Dial Rules select the dial rules then click Assign Selected Tounassign dial rules enter a check mark in the check box preceding one or more dial rules and click Unassign Selected The Dial Plan Assigned Dial Rules page refreshes showing the updated list of dial rules assigned to the dial plan You can delete a dial plan that is no longer in use You cannot delete a dial plan that is currently assigned to a phone Deleting a dial plan does not delete
56. assigned to this telephone Location Specify the physical location of the phone For example you could indicate what the building room or cube the telephone is in Click Save To edit a MAC address In the USERS menu click Media Access Control The Media Access Controls page appears Click the MAC address you want to edit The Edit Media Access Control page appears Edit the fields using Table 18 as a guide Click Save To delete a MAC address In the USERS menu click Media Access Control The Media Access Controls page appears Enter a check mark in the check box preceding the MAC address you want to delete Click Delete Selected Configuring an Attendant Console The Attendant Console allows an attendant or operator to manage call handling within the enterprise User extensions are mapped to buttons on the Attendant Console When an extension is on a call the light next Supported Attendant Console Feature Buttons Configuring an Attendant Console 123 to the Attendant Console button is lit indicating the telephone is busy The attendant can manage internal or external calls according to the functions mapped to four Attendant Console feature buttons Up to three attendant consoles can be associated with a telephone The Attendant Console feature buttons allow you to enable any four of the following functions Call Hold Allows the attendant to put a call on hold Call Park Allows the atten
57. click Unassign in the Actions column A confirmation box appears prompting you to confirm this action Click OK The Phone Assigned Hunt Groups page reappears and the removed group is no longer listed 244 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Editing a Hunt Group or Attendant Deleting a Hunt Group or Attendant You can modify hunt group or attendant attributes established during initial configuration for example the group name or class of service To edit a hunt group or attendant From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears Locate the row containing the group you want to modify and click the group name in the Group Name column The Edit Hunt Group page appears showing the currently configured group attributes The bottom of the page displays current group members in the order in which phones ring when a call arrives at the group extension You can modify this ringing sequence by changing the rank of group members See Reconfiguring the Ring Sequence of Group Members Edit the fields that you need to update See Table 26 and Table 27 for field descriptions Click Save The edits are applied to the hunt group or
58. digit dial strings that begin with 4 See Configuring Dial Plans By default a call remains parked for 5 minutes However you can adjust this value If the call is not answered 5 minutes after it is parked the user who parked the call is called back If the user is not available the parked call is forwarded to the user s call coverage point To configure the call park feature 1 From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window 2 Click Call Park The Call Park Configuration page appears See Figure 68 Figure 68 Call Park Configuration Page Call Park Configuration Call Park Parameters Start Number 800 End Number 699 Time Out seconds 300 Fields marked with an asterisk are required 3 The recommended and default Call Park configuration values are shown in Table 24 208 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES Table 24 Call Park Field Descriptions Field Description Start Number Specifies first number that the VCX system can use to park a call The default start number is 800 The length of a call park number can be from 2 digits to 10 digits inclusive The call park extension range allows a maximum of 2000 n
59. enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears Locate the group containing the member whose MWI status you want to modify and click Status in the Actions column The Hunt Group Status page appears See Figure 88 Locate the member whose MWI status you want to modify 5 In the MWI column check the MWI status that you want to assign to this hunt group member Using the Group Search Tool 249 a Check the box to enable MWI notification for this member a Clear the check box to disable MWI notification for this member 6 Click Submit The new configuration is applied to the hunt group or attendant member Using the Group Search Tool You can search for a any group hunt calling attendant page or call pickup configured on your VCX system The search results list group information such as group name and extension and also all the members of the group To search for a group Click the SEARCH main menu option on top of any page The Search Users page appears See Figure 89 Figure 89 Search Page Search Users Search Information Phone Address First Name Last Name Weblogin User Name Group Name Group Address You can search by entering the following criteria all searches are case insensitive
60. end point should receive a call You associate a pattern with a route when you create a route plan A prefix is created as a dial rule and added to the dial plan in effect for users at the site For example the prefix required for a user to call another user could be 4 and the prefix required for a user to access an IP Messaging voicemail box could be 5 In this case you would create two patterns 4 and 5 For instructions on adding a pattern see Adding Patterns For information on dial rules and plans see Configuring Dial Rules and Configuring Dial Plans 6 Configure a route plan to associate a pattern and a route In this example you would create a route plan that associates Route1 with the dialing pattern 4 You would also create a route plan that associates Route2 with the dialing pattern 5 For instructions see Adding a Route Plan You do not need to repeat steps 2 through 6 on server B the secondary server Data replication between the two servers ensures that the routing information gets propagated to both servers in the redundant pair Once you complete these steps the VCX system can process calls between users and users can access their IP Messaging voicemail boxes Route Plan Configuration for Multi site Systems Route Plan Configuration Requirements 275 In a multi site system VCX services run on servers at multiple locations A multi site system can include a A regional site with one or more
61. field 7 Select a Call Coverage option for this rule Send to Voice Mail Unanswered calls to the phone extension are redirected to the group voice mailbox If Call Fallback is enabled for the extension this is the only valid call coverage option see page 173 Sent to Number Unanswered calls to the phone extension are redirected to the specified telephone number or extension for example a receptionist an Auto Attendant or another phone extension If call coverage is internal another VCX extension enter the extension If call coverage is external outside the VCX system enter as an E 164 number 8475555555 8 Enable the scheduling setting you want this rule to apply 178 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER Editing a Call Coverage Rule for an Extension a Holiday Coverage Settings Configure the holiday date a Event Coverage Settings Configure a date range a Weekly Coverage Settings Configure a time and day or days that will be applied weekly Click Save The Coverage Rule s page reappears and the new rule is listed New rules are assigned to the phone extension and take effect immediately You can edit a call coverage rule created for an phone extension for example to adjust the time These rules are created and assigned for individual phone extensions through the USERS interface Predefined call coverage rules created through the DIRECTORY interface can be deassigne
62. group extension a A page cannot be bridged see Mapping Bridged Extensions for information about bridging A page sender or receiver can drop the page by either using the speaker button to disconnect the page by picking up and replacing the receiver or by pressing the Release button Page Group configuration is subject to the following limits m Each site can can support a maximum of 100 groups m Each group can support a maximum of 300 members a An extension can a member of a maximum of 100 groups Creating a Page Group 1 Configuring Page Groups 215 To configure a Page Group From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Page Groups The Page Groups page appears Click Add Page Group The Add Page Group page appears See Figure 73 Figure 73 Add Page Groups Page Add Page Group Page Group Information Group Name Group Address Multicast IP Address Port Number Fields marked with an asterisk are required In the Group Name field enter an aloha numeric identifier for the new page group In the Group Address field enter a phone extension When a group member dials this extension the speak
63. improves the IP Messaging server performance Clients should be located on the subnet with both management servers or have a minimum of 200 Mbps IP backbone on a dual subnet network configuration See the P Messaging Operations and System Administration Guide for details VCX Configuration Tasks 21 VCX Configuration Tasks This section describes the basic tasks you must perform to create users assign each user a phone and enable communication between the phones This section assumes that VCX software has been successfully installed your network is functioning normally and that you understand your VCX system configuration single site or multi site Communication in a VCX system is based on the Session Initiation Protocol SIP SIP is used to set up maintain and terminate connections calls between end points These end points are SIP enabled devices such as telephones call processors and gateways Basic VCX configuration consists of identifying and configuring the end points in your VCX network and setting up the rules that govern communication between the end points In general VCX configuration includes the sequence of steps shown in Table 4 In a multi site configuration these steps must be performed at each site regions and branches Table 4 VCX Basic Configuration Steps Step Purpose Reference 1 Access the VCX Administrator Provisioning application through a web Enables configuration of your VCX syste
64. map to telephone buttons The Number Index field is used by features that require additional information to execute For example if you map a button to the Forward Busy feature you can enter the forwarding destination number in the Number Index field A phone can have multiple system and personal speed dial numbers mapped to buttons VCX differentiates each type of speed dial entry according to an index number the first speed dial is associated with index number 1 and so on If you add or reduce gt Mapping Features to Telephone Buttons 199 the number of speed dial entries that can be mapped to buttons in a template adjust the designated index number a The Additional Argument field is used to supply additional information a few features need to execute For example the Directed Pickup feature allows a user to answer a call ringing on another user s telephone if both users are members of the same call pickup group This is useful if one user plans to be away for an extended period To use this feature a user must enter the security code for the group and the ringing telephone s extension To map a button to the Directed Pickup feature you would enter the group security code in the Number Index field and the destination extension in the Additional Arguments field If you do not supply the information a feature needs the telephone Display Panel will prompt the user to enter it 7 Click the drop down list for the button
65. must log off and then log on If you want to map a second bridged line to a button the second button must be immediately above or below the first bridged line button You can specify that calls to a bridged extension generate a distinctive ring tone on phones mapped to the bridged extension The bridged extension primary phone rings normally a The ring tone can be specified in the phone profile to which the secondary phone is assigned see Creating a Phone Profile a The ring tone can be specified for each extension mapped to the bridged extension see Configuring Selective Ringing A ring tone specified for a phone mapped to the bridged extension overrides the ring tone configured in phone profile CONFIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES This chapter describes how to configure telephone features that apply to all the phones in your VCX system a region or a region and its branches This chapter includes the following topics Configuring System Speed Dial Numbers a Configuring Camp On Parameters a Mapping Features to Telephone Buttons a Configuring Call Park All of the phone features described in this chapter are configured through the VCX Administrator provisioning application menu options available on the USERS interface See Accessing the User Configuration Interface Be sure to set your Web browser preferences so that the cache is updated whenever you modify or view a new web page 188 CHAPTER 7 CON
66. outbound destination number is translated using the match pattern ID and translation string The match string is a regular expression that matches the outbound destination number The translation string determines how the destination number is translated The translation string is specified with a semi regular expression format A translation string with an asterisk means perform no translation just use the full destination number string that matched in the match string A translation string with pre pended characters has those characters pre pended to the translated destination number See the examples in Table 34 Table 34 Destination Number Translation Algorithm Translated Destination Destination Number Match String Translation String Number Comments 18472222411 1847 2222411 Strips off the area code 4413012345 44 13012345 Strips off the country code 6302221234 630 1630 16302221234 Pre pends a 1 3125551212 gt 3125551212 No translation this is the default Configuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY 329 Table 34 Destination Number Translation Algorithm continued Translated Destination Destination Number Match String Translation String Number Comments 011449622112345 01144 622112345 Strips off the international prefix and country code Adding a Number You can configure a number translation to support VPN translations or to Translation Pattern implement source based routing To add a nu
67. page appears listing the new day time band Editing Day Time To edit a day time band Bands 1 Click Day Time Bands The Day Time Bands page appears See Figure 129 2 In the Name column click the name of the day time band you want to modify The Edit Day Time Band page appears 3 Modify the fields as required See the field descriptions in Adding Day Time Bands Deleting Day Time Bands Managing Calendar Bands Adding Calendar Bands Managing Calendar Bands 325 4 Click Save 1 1 The Day Time Bands page appears To delete day time bands Click Day Time Bands The Day Time Bands page appears See Figure 127 You can delete one day time band or multiple day time bands a To delete one day time band click Delete in the Action column for the day time band entry you want to delete a To delete multiple day time bands enter a check mark in the check box preceding each day time band you want to delete then click Delete Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the delete action Click OK The Day Time Bands page refreshes and the deleted day time band or day time bands is not listed This section describes how to add edit and delete calendar bands Calendar bands are based on a calendar time band table which includes the year month day hour minute and second The configured data can be used for source based input parameters for destination number routing and number transla
68. route In this example you would create one route plan that associates BrRoute1 with the pattern 8 For instructions see Adding a Route Plan Calls can be now be routed to the branch office from users located outside the branch You need to configure routes from a regional office to a gateway so that call destinations outside of the VCX network can be processed You may also have to configure routes from a branch office if the branch has its own gateway for example the branch office has a 3Com V6000 Integrated Branch Communications system For branches without a gateway out of network calls are processed by the branch s host regional office 282 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES This example describes how to create a gateway route on the primary call processor in one regional office The example uses the following simple multi site system in which the six servers are running IP Telephony and IP Messaging configurations a Ria identifies the primary call processor in region 1 a R1b identifies the secondary call processor in region 1 a R2a identifies the primary call processor in region 2 a R2b identifies the secondary call processor in region 2 a R3a identifies the primary call processor in region 3 a R3b identifies the secondary call processor in region 3 The following steps configure the required route on the primary VCX server hosting R1a 1 Access the server you want to manage in th
69. system the PSTN Call Waiting Ring Tone Specifies what a user hears when the user is busy with one call and new a call arrives You can select one of the following options a One of the 27 available ring tones one ring cycle only played through the phone s speaker a Ringer Disabled No ring tone played m Beep Speaker A double beep is played on the speaker only m Beep Active Device A double beep is played on the active listening device handset headset or speaker This setting can also be configured for individual phones by you see Modifying a User s Phone Settings or by a user through the VCX User interface Bridge Line Ring Tone Specifies the ring tone users hear on phones mapped to a bridged extension Hunt Group Ring Tone Specifies the ring tone hunt group members hear for phone calls to a hunt group extension Class of Service Determines what phone numbers a user is allowed to either place or receive The phone numbers are bundled into a Class of Service See Configuring Class of Service Type of Service Specifies what set of features are available to the phone Also determines the default button mapping templates used for the VCX Business Models 2102 and 3102 and Manager s Model 3103 Telephones See Configuring Type of Service Dial Plan Specifies the dial plan used by the phone Dial plans are a set of dialing rules that determine the numeric strin
70. telephone includes a telephone diagnostic and configuration utility called the Local User Interface LUI The administrator has access to telephone configurable parameters through the LUI which are needed for initial physical telephone configuration any required reconfiguration and to test the telephone The LUI access enables you to perform these tasks a View telephone settings both the active settings and the settings stored in the telephone s memory a Set telephone IP address subnet mask and default gateway a Specify IP address of the Network Call Processors NCPs a Test the telephone buttons display panel and LEDs Clear all device settings a View firmware information and diagnostics technician option m Test connectivity a Restart the telephone This section describes how to access the LUI menu on the following 3Com VCX telephones a Model 3102 Business Telephone a Model 3101 or 3101SP Basic Telephones a Model 2102 and 2102 IR Business Telephones a Model 2101 Basic Telephone To access the LUI configuration menu Disconnect power to the telephone by unplugging the power supply cord For telephones that use a powered Ethernet cable instead of a power adapter disconnect the Ethernet cable 2 Read step 4 to locate the button you will use to start the LUI utility 3 Reconnect the power supply cord Before the telephone finishes its download of code from the call processor start the LUI utility as de
71. that includes branch offices you can create a phone profile for each branch The branch phone profile specifies the branch s primary secondary call processor and an associated range of telephone extensions You can also create a phone profile with general settings and designate it as the default phone profile You can assign the default phone profile to 84 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES any phone extension that does not fit in a more specialized profile Designating a phone profile as the default is not required However because all phones must be associated with a phone profile you must create at least one profile To create a phone profile 1 In the USERS menu click Phone Profiles The Phone Profiles page appears listing all current profiles 2 Click Add Phone Profile The Add Phone Profile page appears See Figure 24 Managing Phone Profiles 85 Figure 24 Add Phone Profile Page Add Phone Profile Phone Profile Information Name Description Primary Call Processor 10 230 64 6 Secondary Call Processor 10 230 64 8 Registration Interval seconds 3600 Max Allowed Contacts 5 Display Name Format UNCHANGED Date Time Display Format MMM dd hhmm a Local Time Zone x GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US and Canada hat Observe Daylight Savings 7 Music On Hold Number Voice Mail Number Number Of Lines
72. the template to a Type of Service ToS and assign phones to that ToS See Configuring Type of Service Deleting a Button Mapping Template You can delete any existing button mapping template except the VCX supplied default templates However you cannot delete a template Mapping Features to Telephone Buttons 201 that is linked to a ToS See Editing Type of Services for information on removing a button mapping template from a ToS 1 From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window 2 Click Button Mappings The Button Mappings List page appears 3 In the Actions column of the template you want to remove click Delete A confirmation dialog pops up asking you to confirm you want to delete the selected button mapping template 4 Click OK The template is deleted from the Button Mappings List page You can delete multiple templates in one step by enabling the check box next to each template and clicking Delete Selected Modifying a Button Mapping Template You can modify any existing button mapping template including the VCX supplied default templates You can modify a template to a Change the feature mapped to a button a Lock the feature to button mapping to prevent u
73. time a call ended Called Party This field contains the extension of the phone who received a specific call To return to the User Assigned Phones page click Cancel Configuring Selective Ringing The default ring tone for an incoming call is specified in the phone profile assigned to a phone A ring tone can be set to identify inside calls outside calls private calls and call waiting See Creating a Phone Profile You can also configure ring tones to identify calls based on source number calls to your extension or destination number calls to a bridged line or hunt group extension This referred to as selective ringing For source based selective ringing you can configure distinct ring tones for up to 10 telephone numbers For destination based selective ringing you can configure distinct ring tones for up to 10 bridged line extensions and hunt group extensions combined Selective ringing for bridged extensions has priority over hunt group extensions For example if you do not configure selective ringing for a bridged extension you can configure selective ringing for 10 hunt group extensions If you configure selective ringing for 2 bridged extensions you can configure selective ringing for 8 hunt group extensions If you exceed the selective ringing limit for hunt group extensions VCX software sorts the extensions by ascending number and impliments selective ringing up to the allowed limit For example if you
74. to change a configuration value click Prev 6 Click Save Changes Editing a Route Plan To edit sourced based routing properties associated within a route plan 1 Click Route Plans The Route Plans page appears See Figure 116 2 Locate the route plan you want to modify Select one of the following options m To modify sourced based routing properties click a route plan name in the Name column The Edit Route Plan page appears See Figure 117 You can modify these properties described in Table 33 a To modify pattern properties click a pattern name in the Pattern column The Edit Pattern page appears displaying the current properties of the selected pattern See Figure 99 You can modify these properties described in Adding Patterns however any Deleting a Route Plan Managing OutDial Patterns 313 modifications are globally applied to any VCX system feature that uses the pattern a To modify route properties click a route name in the Route column The Edit Route page appears displaying the current properties of the selected route See Figure 110 You can modify the route name described in Table 31 however any modifications are globally applied to any VCX system feature that uses the route 3 Click Save 1 To delete one or more route plans Click Route Plans The Route Plans page appears See Figure 116 You can delete one route plan or multiple route plans a To delete one route plan click Delete in the Ac
75. to use a different registration interval follow these steps Clone the phone profile currently assigned to the phone see Cloning a Phone Profile Change the value for the Registration Interval parameter Assign the cloned profile to the phone see Modifying a Phone Extension Date Time Display Format Local Time Zone various Ring Tones Call Fallback The values for these settings are retained for individual phones after the upgrade on the User Phone Settings page see Figure 34 in Modifying a User s Phone Settings However these same settings are also configured in the phone profile to which a phone is assigned see Figure 24 in Creating a Phone Profile If the phone profile is modified and reapplied the profile values will override the settings configured on the User Phone Settings page Managing Phone Extensions 95 Source Based Routing with Direct Requestors VCX v7 0 allowed you to set up source based routing that included direct requestors see Managing Route Plans A direct requestor could be based on a dialing domain The VCX v7 1 upgrade procedure creates one or more phone profiles based on data configured for phones in the VCX v7 0 system One data element used by the upgrade procedure is the default dialing domain In VCX v7 1 a route map that includes source based routing uses a phone profile instead of a direct requestor a f av7 0 source based route used a direct requestor based on the default dial
76. updated whenever you modify or view a new web page 270 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Accessing the DIRECTORY Interface You can use the VCX Administrator provisioning application to manage routes end points patterns outdial patterns requestors time bands and number translation Configuration options for these items are available through menu options available on the DIRECTORY interface To access the DIRECTORY interface Access the server you want to manage see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears Click DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY interface page appears See Figure 103 Figure 103 DIRECTORY Interface Main Page ECAN 3Com VCX V7000 Networked Telephony Solution Data Server REG2 7 10 230 64 5 3com Copyright 2006 3Com Corporation All Rights Reserved USERS DIRECTORY SEARCH PREFERENCES MAIN LOG OUT Ranei Route Plans oute Plan wizari Found 3 Route Plan s Sete Add Route Plan Delete Selected Route Plans Fiter eee Al Indirect Phone i Week Day Day Time Calendar paina Name ActivePattern a Route Requestor Profile Holiday Band utDial Patterns Holidays RouteRegta7 Y Regioni Regionta Delete Week Day Bands RouteReg2a7Y Region2 Region2a Delete Day Time Bands n P Calendar Bands RoutelPM Y voicemail Voicemail Delete Number Translation Prev Page of1 Next By default the DIRE
77. users You can also allow your users to map buttons to features on their own phones through the VCX User Interface Or you can prevent users from mapping some or all buttons by locking a feature to a button The Button Mappings List page displays the configured button mapping templates You can use this page to create a new template edit an existing template including the default templates or delete a template To display the button mapping template list From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Button Mappings The Button Mappings List page appears See Figure 64 Figure 64 Button Mappings List Page Button Mappings Found 6 Button Mapping s al Name a Phone Type Action Fj 2102 Default Template 2102 Business Phone Delete O 2102 Default Template NO CFU 2102 Business Phone Delete Fj 3102 Default Template 3102 Business Phone Delete O 3102 Default Template NO CFU 3102 Business Phone Delete P 3103 Default Template 3103 Manager Phone Delete Fi 3103 Default Template NO CFU 3103 Manager Phone Delete Figure 64 shows the six default button mapping templates 3 To view the button mappings for a template click on the template name For example Fi
78. 0 Page Groups To add members to a Page Group On the Page Groups page Figure 74 click on the Phones link in the Actions column for the appropriate group The Member Phones List page appears and displays the phone number and name of each existing member if any See Figure 75 Configuring Page Groups 217 Figure 75 Page Group Add Members Page Group Assigned Phones _ Page Group Sales No Results Found __ Assign Phones _ Phone Address a First Name Last Name Click Assign Phones The Page Group Unassigned Phones list page appears and displays the phone number and name of all the users who are not members of the Page Group Specify the phones you want to add to the group Each Page Group can include a maximum of 300 members a Select an internal member or members from the list and click Assign Selected b If your site includes an external paging system connected to a gateway group members can send voice audio messages that are broadcast over the external paging speaker as well as the speakers on member phones Select the FXS extension associated with paging system from the list and click Assign Selected The updated Page Group Assigned Phones list page appears Figure 76 shows four phones added to the Sales page group All phones in a group can send and receive group pages Figure 76 Page Group Phones Added Page Group Assigned Phones Page Group Sales Found 3 Phone s Assign Ph
79. 001 you would create the pattern 5 Note that you must also configure a dial rule for these access numbers and add the rule to the dial plan in effect for branch users For instructions on adding a pattern see Adding Patterns For information on dial rules and plans see Configuring Dial Rules and Configuring Dial Plans 6 Configure a route plan to associate a pattern and a route 288 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES In this example you would create one route plan that associates IPMRoute1 with the pattern 5 For instructions see Adding a Route Plan Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the other branch offices that use local IP Messaging services Configuring Routes for IP Messaging Clients on a Regional Office This example describes how to create routes on a regional office that identify IP Messaging clients You must also create routes for the IP Messaging servers primary and secondary This example describes how to create IP Messaging client routes on the primary call processor in a region The example uses the following simple IP Messaging client server configuration a Ria identifies the primary call processor in region 1 a R1b identifies the secondary call processor in region 1 a IPM 1a identifies the primary IP Messaging server in region 1 a IPM1b identifies the secondary IP Messaging server in region 1 a C1 identifies the first IP Messaging client a C2 identifies the second IP Messa
80. 1 Click Route Plan Wizard The first page of the Route Plan Wizard appears See Figure 118 Managing Route Plans 309 Figure 118 Route Plan Wizard Page 1 Directory Route Plan Creation Wizard End Point Summary Select from following Route Plans oO RouteReg2a7 64 Delete O RoutelPM 50 Delete oO RouteReg a7 63 Delete Modify OR Route Plan Name Dialed Number To Be routed Add Route Plan As shown in Figure 118 the page lists previously configured route plans You have the following three options a You can create a route plan Go to step 2 a You can modify the dial string pattern associated with a route plan Select a plan enable the radio button preceding the route plan name and click Modify Go to step b in step 2 a You can add an end point to a listed route plan by selecting a plan enable the radio button preceding the route plan name and clicking Next Go to step 3 create an end point then add it or step 4 add an existing end point 2 To create a route plan a Enter a name for the plan in the Route Plan Name text box b Enter a dial string pattern in the Dialed Number To Be Routed text box c Click Add The new route plan appears in the list of route plans and VCX software creates a route by combining the route plan name with the dial pattern For example if you entered Test in the Route Plan Name text box and 77 in the Dialed Number To Be Routed text box VCX software creates a route n
81. 10 230 63 8 5060 OutDial Patterns Delete o i essor Y CalP Secondarv R2b Secondary CallP Reg2b7 64 10 230 64 8 5060 OutDial Patterns Delete E el ssor Y CalP Secondar R3a Secondary CallP Reg3a7 65 10 230 64 14 5060 OutDial Patterns Delete O Gateway Y IPM Voice and MOH 1 63 10 230 63 5 5060 OutDial Patterns Delete C Gateway Y IPM2 Voice and MOH 2 63 10 230 63 7 5060 OutDial Patterns Delete Prev Page Wd or 1 Next 4 Click Add End Point The Add End Point page appears See Figure 105 Figure 105 Add End Point Page Add End Point End Point Information Type Gateway w Active Yes v Name Description Site Id P Address IP Port 5060 Save Cancel Jf Reset Fields marked with an asterisk are required 5 Enter the required information using Table 30 as a guide Managing End Points 293 Table 30 End Point Field Descriptions Name Description Type Identifies the type of end point The drop down list provides the following options a Gateway Identifies the end point as either a media gateway an IP Messaging server IP Messaging client or an IP Conferencing server a Terminal Identifies the end point as a device that will not register within the network a Call Processor Identifies the end point as a call processor Use this type of call processing end point when a call terminates at the end point for e
82. 18 login status of hunt group members 246 media access control 120 message waiting indicator for hunt group members 247 patterns 290 phone restrictions 113 phones 82 95 remote forward universal 168 requestors 316 route plan 304 routes 271 297 silent monitor 169 speed dial 167 type of service 73 users 56 week day bands 320 conventions notice icons 12 text 12 D 345 D data collection frequency branch office 44 regional office 44 day time bands adding 323 deleting 325 editing 324 managing 323 deleting attendant console 128 calendar bands 327 call restrictions 115 day time bands 325 dial rules 260 emergency digits from an ERL 138 emergency gateway IP addresses from an ERL 139 emergency lines from an ERL 141 end points 294 end points assigned to routes 301 ERLs 136 holidays 320 hunt groups 244 IP addresses from an ERL 137 MAC address 122 multiple users 64 outdial patterns 315 outdial patterns from end points 297 outdial patterns of routes 303 patterns 263 phones from a user 101 regional office from a region s global directory 42 requestors 317 route plans 313 routes 299 type of service 78 users 63 week day bands 322 diagnostics telephone buttons 154 telephone LEDs 154 dial plans adding 254 dial rules 257 editing 257 managing 254 dial rules adding 258 deleting 260 dial plans 257 managing 258 346 INDEX parameters 259 directed call pickup 77 210 disabling inbound or outbound c
83. 31000 2005 09 02 10 55 24 631002 2005 10 25 13 41 12 631001 2005 09 14 08 11 58 631000 2005 10 25 13 41 25 631001 2005 09 15 14 52 23 631000 2005 11 18 11 13 58 631000 2005 09 20 12 48 07 631002 2005 11 18 11 15 27 631210 2005 09 20 14 47 43 631000 2005 11 18 11 27 29 631000 2005 09 21 09 56 41 631000 2005 12 14 12 08 16 631001 Prev Page1o0of3 Next gt gt Prev Page1of3 Next gt gt The Call History page contains three columns of information for both Incoming and Outgoing calls You can sort the calls in each category Incoming and Outgoing by clicking the Date or Time column header If the log contains more calls than the interface can display on a page click Next or Previous to navigate between pages See Using the Graphical User Interface Table 17 lists each column and describes the type of information available in that column Table 17 Call History Information for Phones Main Column Sub Columns Description Incoming Date This field contains the date when a call was received using the YYYY MM DD format Time This field contains the time a call ended Calling Party This field contains the extension of the phone that initiated a specific call Configuring Selective Ringing 117 Table 17 Call History Information for Phones continued Main Column Sub Columns Description Outgoing Date This field contains the date when a call was initiated using the YYYY MM DD format Time This field contains the
84. 6 CHAPTER 1 VCX SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW b gt ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY The Central Manager is a web portal that provides access to the VCX Administrator provisioning application interface the IP Messaging provisioning application and the Global Directory This chapter includes the following topics a Central Manager Overview a Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager a The Global Directory Be sure to set your web browser preferences so that the cache is updated whenever you modify or view a new web page 28 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY Central Manager Overview The Central Manager enables VCX system administrators to manage VCX system components using a web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher You can use the Central Manager to access the following management options The VCX Administrator provisioning application interface allows you to manage regional and branch office VCX servers This enables management of VCX servers anywhere in your VCX network The VCX Administrator provisioning application is described in this guide The IP Messaging provisioning application allows you to manage IP Messaging servers anywhere in your VCX network Refer to the P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide for IP Messaging provisioning information The Global Directory allows you to find configured users and their telephone ext
85. Bauer Prev Page of1 Next Configuring Class of Service When you create a phone extension you assign the extension to a phone profile see Managing Phone Extensions A phone profile includes a set of common phone attributes including a Class of Service CoS A CoS determines the incoming and outgoing phone numbers a phone is allowed to dial or receive Each Class of Service includes one or more elements Each element includes one or more dialing patterns A pattern identifies a dial string prefix For example your VCX system could include the following A Class of Service named Sample Class of Service which includes A CoS element named Toll which includes Two patterns 91900 91976 A CoS element can be configured to allow whitelist or block blacklist an inbound or outbound call whose dial string matches the element s pattern or patterns So for example if you configured the Toll element to block outbound calls any phone assigned to the Sample Class of Service could not complete a call to a number whose dial string included the prefix 91900 or 91976 66 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES Adding a Class of Service Your VCX system includes several preconfigured Classes of Service You can modify an existing CoS or create a new one In addition you can create CoS elements and add them to an existing CoS or you can modify existing CoS elements Note the following additional CoS consideratio
86. CONFIGURING DIAL PLANS PATTERNS AND DIAL RULES Enabling a Number Translation Pattern also dial the full extension to reach a user at the local site unless you configure number translation to drop the site prefix With number translation configured on each site a user can dial a four digit number 10nn to reach other local users Note that the dial plan in effect for users must allow a four digit dial string You can use the VCX Administrator application to manage number translation on either the USERS interface or the DIRECTORY interface This section describes how to configure number translation through the USERS interface Number translation configured through the USERS interface does not appear on the DIRECTORY interface Number translation configured through the DIRECTORY interface allows you to associate number translation with source based routing See Configuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY This section describes how to set up number translation Using the site prefix drop example described in the previous section Configuring Number Translation USERS the resulting translation pattern allows users with six digit extensions starting with 64 to dial the last four digits for local calls calls to phones serviced by the same call processor To enable a number translation pattern From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add number translation see Accessing a VCX Site through the Centr
87. CTORY interface displays the Route Plans page which lists the currently configured route plans The menu options for the DIRECTORY interface appear on the left side of the page These options allow you to Run the Route Plan Wizard The wizard prompts you for the information required to create a route plan A route plan associates a dial pattern with a route a route identifies one or more end points A route plan determines how a call processor directs calls See Using the Route Plan Wizard Route Plan Configuration Requirements 271 a Manage Patterns Dial string patterns are used by the VCX call processor to route calls to the correct destination See Configuring Patterns DIRECTORY a Manage End Points An end point identified by IP address specifies a device for example call processor or gateway to which calls are routed See Managing End Points a Manage Routes A route includes one or more end points See Managing Routes a Manage Route Plans You can use the Route Plan Wizard to create a route plan or you can use Route Plans menu options to add modify or delete route plans See Managing Route Plans a Manage Source Based Routing Parameters You can control call routing based on the source of a call an indirect requestor IP address or the members of a phone profile Routing can be further controlled according to date or time of day See the following topics a Managing Requestors a M
88. Call Forward Universal CFU function 3103 Default Template NO CFU Omits the CFU mapping and maps that button to the Feature function Mapping Features to Telephone Buttons 197 Creating a Button Mapping Template If the button mapping in any of the default templates does not suit your needs you can either modify the default template see Modifying a Button Mapping Template or create your own template To create a button mapping template From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Button Mappings The Button Mappings List page appears Click Add Button Mapping The Add Button Mapping page appears See Figure 66 Figure 66 Add Button Mapping Page Add Button Mapping Button Mappings Information Enter the name of new button mappings Select the phone type 2102 Business Phone Y Fields marked with an asterisk are required In the Enter the name of new button mappings text box enter a name for the new template In the Select the phone type drop down list box select the phone model for which you want to create the template Click Add A graphic appears showing the default button mappings for the selected phone model
89. Chicago user directory once the user directory databases resynchronize either Updating a Directory Reference on a Regional Office 1 The Global Directory 41 automatically or manually see Manually Resynchronizing the Global Directory on page 45 Use this option to update the IP address or hostname entry for a regional office In the following example the IP address for the Chicago office has changed so the Boston office must be updated Log on to the primary VCX server in Boston using the cworks account and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata globaldir bin config sh The SELECT OPERATION prompt appears At the prompt enter 104 The Enter the Primary ROSCA IP Address or Hostname to Update prompt appears Enter the IP address of the primary server at the remote regional office in this example the Chicago office whose IP address has changed The Enter the Secondary ROSCA IP Address or Hostname to Update prompt appears Enter the IP address of the secondary server at the remote regional office in this example the Chicago office The Enter an Username for both Primary amp Secondary ROCSA s to Update prompt appears Enter the username for the cworks account The default is cworks but may be changed during installation The Do you want to Update Password n y prompt appears The password cannot be updated from here Enter n to continue The Enter the Global Directory Input Path at ROCSA
90. Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 218 Hunt Groups and Calling Groups 218 Attendants 221 Configuring a Hunt Group or Attendant 221 Hunt Group and Attendant Call Coverage Options 227 Adding Local User Extensions to a Hunt Group or Attendant 236 Adding Remote User Extensions to a Hunt Group or Attendant 238 Removing Local User Extensions from a Hunt Group or Attendant 241 Removing Remote User Extensions from a Hunt Group or Attendant 242 Editing a Hunt Group or Attendant 244 Deleting a Hunt Group or Attendant 244 Reconfiguring the Ring Sequence of Group Members 245 Changing the Login Status of Group Members 246 10 Configuring the Message Waiting Indicator for Hunt Group Members 247 Using the Group Search Tool 249 CONFIGURING DIAL PLANS PATTERNS AND DIAL RULES Configuring Dial Plans 254 Adding Dial Plans 254 Editing Dial Plan Names 257 Changing the Dial Rules Associated with a Dial Plan 257 Deleting Dial Plans 257 Configuring Dial Rules 258 Adding Dial Rules 258 Deleting Dialing Rules 260 Configuring Patterns USERS 260 Adding Patterns 261 Editing Patterns 263 Deleting Patterns 263 Configuring Number Translation USERS 263 Enabling a Number Translation Pattern 264 Editing a Number Translation Pattern 267 Deleting a Number Translation Pattern 267 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Accessing the DIRECTORY Interface 270 Route Plan Configuration Requirements 271 Route Plan Configuration for Single Site S
91. Contains Enter the entire or part of the user s last name For example if you entered smith Sm or it any last name containing these characters are returned a First Name Contains Enter the entire or part of the user s first name For example if you entered john or Jo any first name containing these characters are returned a Extension Contains Enter the entire or part of the user s phone extension such as 1101 a Site Id Contains Enter the unique ID assigned to a region a Site Name Contains Enter the unique name assigned to a specific site 4 Click Search The search results are listed beneath the Global Directory Search Results heading see Figure 10 52 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY Figure 10 Global Directory Search Criteria Results Display information about users within the enterprise Global Directory Search Criteria Last Name Contains First Name Contains Extension Contains Site Id Contains Site Name Contains Office 1 Global Directory Search Results Last Name a FirstName Extension Site Id Site Name Alvarez Orlando 631201 REG1 7 Regional Office 1 Ballen Anna 631001 REG1v7 Regional Ofice 1 Bauer Jack 631205 REG1 7 Regional Office 1 Callen Steven 631003 REG1 7 Regional Office 1 Conover Erica 631202 REG1 7 Regional Offic
92. D ATTENDANT CONSOLES Accessing the Phones You add edit or delete phone extensions on the Phones page Page To access the Phones page click Phones on the USERS menu The Phones page appears See Figure 27 Figure 27 Phones Page Phones Found 13 Phone s Add Phone Delete Selected EE Phone Address VM E Phone Address Display Name Phone Profile User Name Actions Maria A Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Restrictions lanor 00 e0 bb aa bb cc Enabled Registrations Call History Selective Ringing Bridge BES he _ ss Permissions Bridged Phones HuntGroups Settings Delete O 641000 Lopez Maria Default Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Restrictions Enabled Registrations CallHistory Selective Ringing Bridge Permissions Bridged Phones HuntGroups Settings Delete Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Restrictions O 641003 641003 Default Disabled Registrations Call History Selective Ringing Bridge Permissions Bridged Phones HuntGroups Settings Delete Maria A Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Restrictions O 641004 Lopez Maria Default eee Enabled Registrations CallHistory Selective Ringing Bridge D It fault O 641001 MartinJean Default Jean Martin Permissions Bridged Phones Hunt Groups Settings Delete Eeatures Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Restrictions oO 641005 New User Defau Ming Lee Enabled Registrations CallHistory Selective
93. Dial Rules Delete o Alternate Long Distance Dial Rules Delete Oo Diagnostic Dial Rules Delete o Internal Dial Rules Delete Fi International Dial Rules Delete P Local Dial Rules Delete Fi Long Distance Dial Rules Delete Prev Page My of2 Next gt gt 7 Click Dial Rules in the row for the new dial plan The Dial Plan Assigned Dial Rules page appears See Figure 95 256 CHAPTER 9 CONFIGURING DIAL PLANS PATTERNS AND DIAL RULES 10 Figure 95 Dial Plan Assigned Dial Rules Page _Dial Plan Assigned Dial Rules Dial Plan Internal Found 10 Dial Rule s Minimum Length Maximum Length Timeout Pattern Action oO 3 Five 3 3 5 5 Unassign O Four 3 3 5 4 Unassign O 30ne 3 3 5 1 Unassign O 3six 3 3 5 6 Unassian o 3 Three 3 3 5 3 Unassign O Tw 3 3 5 l2 Unassian O Five 4 4 5 5 Unassign O 636 6 6 5 63 Unassian oO 646 6 6 5 64 Unassian O zero h h 5 0 Unassign Prev Page 1 of1 Next Note that Figure 95 shows the dial rules assigned to an existing dial plan named Internal For a new dial plan the Dial Plan Assigned Dial Rules page will have no entries Click Assign Dial Rules The Dial Plan Unassigned Dial Rules page appears listing all the dial rules not currently assigned to the dial plan Select the dial rule or rules you want to assign a To assign one dial rule click Assign in the Action column a To assign multiple dial rules enter a check mark in the check box preceding each dial rule
94. ERLs can have callback numbers that differ from the defaults for the organization Edit Emergency Defaults Fields marked with an asterisk are required Emergency Services No Results Found Add ERL Delete Selected Emergency Callback Phone Location Settings Prev Page1of0 Next 2 Click Add ERL The Add Emergency Location page appears 3 In the Location field enter the ERL location based on geographic or physical location For example B1ag1 F1r1 There is a 10 character limit 4 In the Emergency Callback Phone field enter the phone number of the contact person responsible for emergency situations within an organization for example a security guard 5 Click Save The ERL is added to the Emergency Services heading See Figure 45 Configuring Emergency Services 133 Figure 45 Emergency Defaults and Emergency Response Locations Window Emergency Defaults WARNING If Emergency service settings are changed for example the gateway IP address or emergency digits they will not take effect until the telephones are Gateway IP power cycled Logging out of the telephone and Address logging back in is not adequate Emergency Callback Emergency default information is used when there is Phone no information in the emergency response database for a caller The defaults apply to the organization Individual locations ERLs can have callback Reset numbers that differ from th
95. FIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES Configuring System Speed Dial Numbers This section describes how to globally configure speed dial numbers System speed dial numbers are available to any user at any site in your VCX system You can also configure personal speed dial numbers for individual users see Configuring Personal Speed Dial Numbers Personal speed dial numbers can be managed by users through the VCX User interface However users cannot add delete or modify system speed dial numbers You create system speed dial numbers through the VCX Administrator provisioning application a f your VCX system is configured as a single site system access the Central Manager in your web browser by using the IP address of the VCX system a f your VCX system is configured as a multi site system with regional and branch sites access the Central Manager and select the regional site that was enabled as the system speed dial master site during installation of VCX software You cannot manage system speed dials through any other site A user can invoke a system speed dial telephone number using one of the following methods a Access the System Speed Dial Directory through the telephone LCD Display Panel then press a soft button to dial the selected entry m Enter the system speed dial feature code 700 followed by the index number associated speed dial 1 for the first speed dial number 2 for the second speed dial number and so o
96. Figure 67 shows the graphic for the Model 2102 Business Telephone 198 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES Figure 67 2102 Default Button Mapping Edit Button Mappings Button Mappings Information Name 2102 Custom1 Phone Type 2102 Business Phone ock Feature Type NumberAndex Additional Argument Do Not Disturb Forward Universal Personal Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial i Personal Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial Alee TYT tootel na ASER x System Appearance xI System Appearance AAAA lt System Appearance ED Cancel Jf Reset Note the following elements shown in Figure 67 The Lock check box for each button determines whether or not a user can modify the feature you assign to a button A user can modify button mapping through the VCX User Interface or the TUI but only for his or her phone When checked a user cannot change the feature assigned to the button When unchecked a user can change the feature assigned to the button on his or her phone The Feature Type drop down list for each button shows all the features you can map to a button See Table 22 and Table 23 in Mappable Features for a list of the features you can
97. Four 3 3 5 4 Delete O 20ne 3 3 5 1 Delete O 2PG Direct 5 5 5 89 Delete O 3Seven 3 3 5 7 elete o 3 Six 3 3 5 6 Delete O amp Three 3 3 5 3 Delete O 2w 3 3 5 2 Delete O Eight 4 4 5 8 Delete Prev Page of5 Next gt gt 3 Click Add Dial Rule Configuring Dial Rules 259 The Add Dial Rule page appears See Figure 97 Figure 97 Add Dial Rules Window Add Dial Rule Dial Rule Information Name Min Length Max Length Timeout Pattern Save f Cancel jf Reset a NOTE is not considered as a wild card character in Dial Rules is considered as a digit dialed from the phone Fields marked with an asterisk are required 4 Enter the required field information using Table 28 as a guide Table 28 Dial Rule Field Descriptions Field Description Name Enter a unique name to identify the dial rule Min Length Specify the minimum number of digits a user must dial to make a call If a use dials less than the minimum number of digits and the Timeout value elapses the phone generates an error Max Length Specify the maximum number of digits a user must dial to make a call If a use dials more than the maximum number of digits and the dialed number matches the specified Pattern the phone will start dialing as soon as the user enters the maximum number of required digits If a use dials more than the maximum number of digits the dialed number does not match
98. Manager s Telephone LUI Menu Items Menu Option Description View Settings Displays the currently configured values for these options My MAC Address MAC address of this telephone NCP MAC Address MAC address of the primary call processor SW Build OPs Id Software version running on this telephone that controls the user interface SW Build DSP Id Software version running on this telephone that controls telephone signaling functions Serial Number Telephone serial number and hardware version Phone Port Speed Speed and duplex setting of the LAN connection PC Port Speed The speed and duplex setting of the PC port to the device if any connected to the port My IP Address Active IP address of this telephone Subnet Mask Active IP mask Gatwy IP Address Active default gateway IP address NCP IP Address Active IP address of the call processor with which this telephone communicates Alt Server IP Active IP address of the secondary call processor VLAN Configuration Active VLAN for this telephone acquired from either DHCP option 184 or a setting in the telephone s memory EE My IP The IP address configured in the telephone s memory though the LUI utility EE Subnet Mask The IP mask configured in the telephone s memory though the LUI utility EE Gatwy IP The default gateway IP address configured in the telephone s memory though the LUI utilit
99. N delete action Click OK The Emergency Line ID Numbers page refreshes verifying the ELIN was deleted 142 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES CONFIGURING TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS This chapter describes configuration options available after a telephone has been initially set up These options are available through a utility on the phone called the Local User Interface LUI Refer to the VCX Installation Guide for information on how to install and initially configure all supported 3Com VCX devices This chapter includes the following topics a 3Com Telephone Configuration a 3Com Telephone Local User Interface Menus 144 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS 3Com Telephone Configuration There are multiple configuration steps required to enable a VCX telephone to work within a VCX system These steps are described in various chapters of this guide see Chapter 1 for an overview As described in the VCX Installation Guide each 3Com telephone in a VCX system must be configured with the IP address of the primary Call Processor also called a Network Call Processor or NCP and the IP address of the secondary NCP When connected to the network and powered on this enables the phone to contact the NCP and download the following information a Signaling software that enables the phone to make and receive calls Operational software that determines what features are available ba
100. NG THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY Uploading a User Directory to Multiple Regional Offices Global Directory Requirements for Replicated Regions with Branch Offices In the previous section Manually Resynchronizing the Global Directory the global directory at the Boston office was resynchronized To manually load this updated global directory database log on to the primary VCX server in Boston using the cworks account and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata globaldir bin forceGDBLoad pl You can push a user directory to all other configured regional offices so that data upload does not need to be performed individually at all the regional offices that have been added using option 101 For example Boston Chicago and Los Angeles have each been configured using option 101 so that users at each site have a global directory that includes users at the other two sites If the Boston office adds or deletes users the Chicago and Los Angeles offices would have to either automatically or manually resynchronize their user directory databases Alternatively the Boston office can upload its changes to both Chicago and Los Angeles To upload the user directory to all other deployed regional offices Log on to the primary VCX server in Boston using the cworks account and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata globaldir bin config sh At the prompt enter 107 Boston s global directory is uploaded to
101. NG VCX USERS AND SERVICES Accessing User Options 54 Viewing All Users 55 Configuring User Profiles 56 Adding a User Profile 56 Adding User Address Information 59 Using the Users Search Tool 60 Editing User Profiles 63 Cloning User Profile Information 63 Deleting User Profiles 63 Viewing the Phone Book 64 Configuring Class of Service 65 Adding a Class of Service 66 Modifying a Class of Service 68 Deleting a Class of Service 70 Configuring Class of Service Elements 70 Adding Class of Service Elements 70 Adding or Deleting a Class of Service Element Pattern 72 Configuring Type of Service 73 Adding a Type of Service 74 Deleting Type of Services 78 Editing Type of Services 79 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Accessing the User Configuration Interface 82 Managing Phone Profiles 83 Creating a Phone Profile 83 Editing a Phone Profile 91 Viewing Phone Profile Member Phones 92 Deleting a Phone Profile 92 Cloning a Phone Profile 93 Upgrade Considerations 94 Managing Phone Extensions 95 Accessing the Phones Page 96 Adding Phone Extensions 97 Modifying a Phone Extension 100 Deleting a Phone Extension 101 Managing User Phone Extensions 102 Assigning a Phone Extension toa User 102 Unassigning a Phone Extension 105 User Roaming Services 106 Modifying a User s Phone Settings 107 Viewing Phone Registration Information 110 Adding Anonymous Call Restrictions 112 Configuring Phone Restrictions 113 Adding Call Restrictions 113 Vie
102. ONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER Configuring Phone Features 162 Configuring ToS Phone Features 164 Configuring Call Forward Busy 165 Configuring Call Forward Ring No Answer 165 Configuring Call Forward Universal 166 Configuring Caller Identity 166 Configuring Personal Speed Dial Numbers 167 Configuring Directed Call Pickup 167 Configuring Remote Forward Universal 168 Configuring Silent Monitor and Barge In 169 Configuring Call Coverage for a Telephone 170 Changing the Default Call Coverage Point fora Phone 171 Adding a Call Coverage Rule for a Telephone Extension 173 Editing a Call Coverage Rule for an Extension 178 Deleting a Call Coverage Rule 180 Configuring Bridge Permissions 181 Adding Bridge Permission for an Extension 182 Mapping Bridged Extensions 184 Mapping a Bridged Extension on a Secondary Phone 185 CONFIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES Configuring System Speed Dial Numbers 188 Adding a System Speed Dial Entry 189 Modifying a System Speed Dial Entry 191 Deleting a System Speed Dial Entry 192 Configuring Camp On Parameters 192 Mapping Features to Telephone Buttons 194 Dynamic Button Mapping Overview 194 Managing Button Mapping Templates 195 Mappable Features 203 Configuring Call Park 206 CONFIGURING GROUPS Configuring Call Pickup Groups 210 Creating a Call Pickup Group 210 Adding Members to a Call Pickup Group 212 Configuring Page Groups 213 Creating a Page Group 215 Adding Members to a Page Group 216
103. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation Other brand and product names may be registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders CONTENTS ABOUT THIS GUIDE Conventions 12 Related Documentation 13 Comments 14 VCX SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW Network based Telephony 16 VCX Software Components 16 VCX Hardware Configurations 18 Single Site Configurations 19 Multi Site Configurations 19 VCX Configuration Tasks 21 About VCX Administrator Passwords 24 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY Central Manager Overview 28 Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager 29 VCX Administrator Access Roles 31 Using the Graphical User Interface 34 Modifying the Web Session Timeout Value 35 Modifying Site Names through the Central Manager 37 The Global Directory 37 Global Directory Overview 37 Directly Adding a User Directory to the Global Directory 39 Updating a Directory Reference on a Regional Office 41 Removing a Directory Reference on a Regional Office 42 Listing Regional Offices in a Global Directory 42 Configuring Data Collection Frequency 43 Manually Resynchronizing the Global Directory 45 Manually Loading a Global Directory Database 45 Uploading a User Directory to Multiple Regional Offices 46 Global Directory Requirements for Replicated Regions with Branch Offices 46 Searching for End Users through Global Directory 50 Locating Global Directory Log Files 52 CONFIGURI
104. PMplan1 Associates IPMRoute1 with the pattern 5 IPMplan2 Associates IPMRoute2 with the pattern 6 IPMplan3 Associates IPMRoute3 with the pattern 7 IPMplan4 Associates IPMRoute4 with the pattern 8 IPMplan5 Associates IPMRoute5 with the pattern 9 For instructions see Adding a Route Plan Note that a user typically accesses his or her voice mailbox by pressing the telephone MSG button A user can also access his or her voice mailbox by dialing the voicemail access number of a different client This is useful if an IP Messaging client is unavailable Using the example if the first IP Messaging client goes offline a user who normally presses the MSG button to access voicemail on this client can instead dial 7000 to access his or her voice mailbox However the dial plan assigned to the user s phone must include the dial rule that allows this dial string see Configuring Dial Rules Configuring Patterns DIRECTORY Patterns are used by the VCX call processor to route calls to the correct destination For example in a multi site VCX system you can create a dial rule for each region that includes a site prefix You then create a pattern based on the site prefix and create a route plan that associates the pattern with a route to a specific call processor end point See Route Plan Configuration Requirements for more information You can use the VCX Administrator provisioning application to manage pattern
105. PTER 7 CONFIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES 10 maximum index number plus 1 For example if the current maximum personal speed dial index number is 5 the index number for the new speed dial number should be 6 a If instep 7 you removed a personal speed dial entry delete the number in the Number Index field A user can configure a maximum of nine personal speed dial numbers If you create or modify a template the index numbers for the available personal speed dial entries should be contiguous and start at 1 a f instep 7 you added a system speed dial specify the index number associated with a previously configured speed dial number A button mapped to system speed dial is automatically locked Users cannot remap the button or change the index assignment through the VCX User interface a If instep 7 you selected a feature that requires additional information to execute for example a telephone extension enter the information in the Number Index field a If instep 7 you selected a feature that requires additional information to execute you can enter the information in the Additional Arguments field For both the Number Index field and Additional Arguments field the telephone Display Panel will prompt users for information you do not supply Click Save when you finish remapping buttons The Button Mappings List page appears and lists the new template To enable the new template for users who use that phone model add
106. Phone Extension a View and modify the phone profile settings Click a profile name in the Phone Profile column and see Editing a Phone Profile Adding Phone Extensions gt Managing Phone Extensions 97 View and modify user information Click a name in the User Name column and see Configuring User Profiles Modify the MAC address associated with the phone extension if configured Click an address in the MAC column and see Configuring Media Access Control Prevent anonymous calls from reaching users Click Call Restrictions in the Actions column and see Adding Anonymous Call Restrictions View phone registration information such as the IP address assigned to the phone Click Registrations in the Actions column and see Viewing Phone Registration Information Prevent specific incoming and outgoing calls for a phone Click Call Restrictions in the Actions column and see Configuring Phone Restrictions View the call history for a phone Click Call History and see Viewing Call History Change the default ring tone for the phone for a hunt group or for a bridged line Click Selective Ringing and see Configuring Selective Ringing View the hunt group or groups to which an extension is assigned Click Hunt Groups and see Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants Override phone settings such as date and time format and ring tones configured by a user through the VCX User web interface Click Settings and see Mod
107. Profile 1 Click Save The Phone Profiles page appears and the new profile is listed You can view all the phones assigned to a phone profile To view phone profile member phones In the USERS menu click Phone Profiles The Phone Profiles page appears listing all current profiles See Figure 25 Click Members in the Actions column for a phone profile The Phone Profile Member Phones page appears See Figure 26 Figure 26 Phone Profile Member Phones Page Phone Profile Member Phones Phone Profile Default Found 6 Phone s REA Prone Address v Phone Address a First Name Last Name Status 641000 Maria Lopez Enabled 641001 Jean Martin Enabled 641004 Maria Lopez Enabled 641011 Group Page Enabled 641203 Harry Schultz Enabled 641205 Jack Bauer Enabled Prev Page of1 Next You can use the column headings to sort the listed profile members For example you can sort the member phones according to the last name of the user assigned to a phone by clicking the Last Name column heading You can also search for a particular phone profile member by selecting a search option in the Filter drop down list Phone Address First Name Last Name or Status Then enter the appropriate search criteria in the Filter text box and click Go You can delete any phone profile that is no longer in use has no members To determine if a phone profile has members see Viewing Phone Profile Member Phones Cloning a Phone Profile
108. Q Scom VCX Administration Guide VCX V7000 IP Telephony Solution a VCX Telephones and Attendant Console CDR Reporting Application Convergence Applications Suite System Release 7 1 Part Number 900 0383 01 Rev AF Published January 2007 http www 3com com 3Com Corporation 350 Campus Drive Marlborough MA 01752 3064 Copyright 2002 2007 3Com Corporation All rights reserved No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work such as translation transformation or adaptation without written permission from 3Com Corporation 3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change 3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty term or condition of any kind either implied or expressed including but not limited to the implied warranties terms or conditions of merchantability satisfactory quality and fitness for a particular purpose 3Com may make improvements or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this documentation at any time If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation it is furnished under a license agreement included with the product as a separate document in the hardcopy documentation or on the rem
109. RY interface page appears See Figure 103 3 Click Day Time Bands The Day Time Bands page appears See Figure 129 Figure 129 Day Time Bands Page Day Time Bands Found 2 Day Time Band s Add Day Time Band Delete Selected ter EE A Name a Start Time End Time Action Oo Lunch 12 00 00 13 00 00 Delete Oo Weekend 00 00 00 23 59 59 Delete Prev Page of1 Next 4 Click Add Day Time Band The Add Day Time Band page appears See Figure 130 324 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Figure 130 Add Day Time Band Page Add Day Time Band Day Time Band Information Name Hours Minutes Seconds StatTime 0 vii vid v End Time 0 vii0 vii0 Fields marked with an asterisk are required Note Time Day Date configuration is applied according to GMT 5 Enter the following field information a Name Enter a unique name to identify this day time band a Start Time From the drop down lists select the correct Hour Minute and Second for the daytime band to start The drop down lists use military time for example O equals 12 00 00 AM midnight and 23 00 00 equals 11 00 00 PM a End Time From the drop down lists select the correct Hour Minute and Second for the daytime band to end The drop down lists use military time for example 0 equals 12 00 00 AM midnight and 23 00 00 equals 11 00 00 PM 6 Click Save The Day Time Bands
110. Save Cancel Reset Gmail Udit ee at Fields marked with an asterisk are required 5 Enter the required field information using Table 16 as a guide Table 16 Phone Restrictions Field Descriptions Field Description Direction Configure the phone restriction direction using one of the following a OUT_GOING a IN_COMING Type Configure the phone restriction type using one of the following a Blocked a Allowed Owner Configure the phone restriction owner using one of the following a End User a Administrator Note Phone restrictions owned by the administrator cannot be seen or modified by the end user Pattern 6 Click Save Select a predefined pattern from the drop down list or enter a new pattern The Call Restrictions page appears showing the new phone restriction 7 Click Cancel to return to The User Assigned Phones page Viewing Call Restrictions Deleting Call Restrictions 1 1 Viewing Call History 115 To view the currently configured restrictions for a phone In the USERS menu click Users The Users page appears Figure 30 Click Phones in the Phones column The User Assigned Phones page appears Click Call Restrictions in the Actions column The Call Restrictions page appears which lists of all the current call restrictions for that phone To delete call restrictions for a phone In the USERS menu click Users The Users page appears Figure 30
111. Speed Dial feature page appears In the Name column enter the name associated with the speed dial number In the Phone Address column enter the phone number of the phone you want to assign to this speed dial for example 631000 You can enter up to nine personal speed dial entries for a user The user can also configure personal speed dial numbers using the TUI or the VCX User web interface You can also configure System Speed Dial numbers that users cannot change See Configuring System Speed Dial Numbers Click Update The feature settings are applied to that user s phone To configure the Directed Call Pickup feature Follow the steps in Configuring ToS Phone Features to access the Assigned Phone Features page for a user In the Action column click Edit Feature in the Directed Call Pickup row The Directed Call Pickup feature page appears To enable the feature ensure a check mark appears in the Enabled box To disable the feature remove the check mark In the Security Code field enter a security code When a group of users share a security code any user in the group can answer a call ringing on another group member s phone 168 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER Configuring Remote Forward Universal To answer the call the user enters the Directed Call Pickup feature code 455 on any telephone within the group enters the security code and then enters the extension of the ringing phone
112. The Edit Requestor page appears 3 Modify the fields as required See the field descriptions in Adding Requestors 4 Click Save The Requestors page appears Deleting Requestors To delete requestors 1 Click Requestors The Requestors page appears See Figure 123 318 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES 2 You can delete one requestor or multiple requestors a To delete one requestor click Delete in the Action column for the requestor entry you want to delete a To delete multiple requestors enter a check mark in the check box preceding each requestor you want to delete then click Delete Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the delete action Click OK The Requestors page refreshes and the deleted requestor or requestors is not listed Managing Holidays Adding Holidays 1 This sections describes how to add edit and delete calendar holidays based on the month and day The configured data can be used for source based input parameters for destination number routing and number translation see Managing Route Plans and Configuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY The holiday data can also be used for scheduling group or phone call coverage see Hunt Group and Attendant Call Coverage Options and Configuring Call Coverage for a Telephone To add a holiday From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add a holiday based routin
113. This transfers the call to the user Click Update The feature settings are applied to that user s phone The Remote Forward Universal feature is useful if for example a person A is on vacation and all of person A s calls must be forwarded to person B This feature enables person B to configure Call Forward Universal on the source phone person A When enabled the remote destination phone s LED if available flashes for all forwarded calls and the LCD displays a call forward message To configure the Remote Forward Universal feature Follow the steps in Configuring ToS Phone Features to access the Assigned Phone Features page for a user In the Actions column click Edit Feature in the Remote Forward Universal row The Remote Forward Universal Assigned Phones page appears which lists any phones currently included in the remote forward universal list Click Assign Phones The Remote Forward Universal Unassigned Phones page appears You can also specify an external phone number by clicking the Assign External Phones button Note that external in this case means a phone extension configured on a different call processor within the VCX system not an extension external to the VCX network for example the PSTN Check the box preceding one or more phone extensions The user specified in the User field at the top of the Remote Forward Universal Unassigned Phones page will be able to remotely set call forwarding o
114. UTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Table 33 Add Route Plan Fields continued Subheadings Field Description Day Time Band Weekday Band Allows you to select a defined weekday band that represents particular days of the week such as Monday through Friday A Day Time Band and a Weekday Band must be used together but cannot be used in combination with other source based inputs See Managing Week Day Bands Day Time Band Allows you to select a defined day time band that represents a time band within one day for example 0800 1200 hours The granularity is in seconds A Day Time Band and a Weekday Band must be used together but cannot be used in combination with other source based inputs See Managing Day Time Bands Calendar Band Calendar Band Allows you to select a specific date range calendar band such as 1 1 05 to 6 1 06 The calendar band includes use of the time component This cannot be used in combination with other source based inputs See Managing Calendar Bands 6 Click Save The Route Plans page appears listing the new route plan Using the Route Plan You can use Route Plan Wizard to create route plans The wizard Wizard combines the steps required to create a route plan into a sequence of three screens The wizard allows you to specify existing dial string patterns routes and their end points or create new string patterns routes and end points To create a route plan using the Route Plan Wizard
115. Use the scroll buttons see number 6 to navigate through the list of options 2 Soft Buttons Moves the cursor left or right The middle button is not used 3 Key Pad Selects menu items or enter numeric characters in a configuration option Use the key to save changes after you edit an item 4 Access Buttons AB1 AB4 Selects LUI menu items AB4 is topmost AB1 is on the bottom 5 Program Button Functions as follows a Starts and exits from the LUI utility a Exits from a menu item and moves to the next higher menu If you press Program before you save a change to a setting you exit the menu item without saving the change 6 Scroll Buttons Function as follows a Up and Down Buttons Moves up or down through the LUI menu and select hex digits when editing a MAC address a Left and Right Buttons Positions the cursor in the Display Panel when editing a setting such as an IP address 3Com Telephone Local User Interface Menus 149 Model 3101 and 3101SP Basic Telephones LUI Controls Figure 47 shows the LUI controls on the Model 3101and 3101SP Basic Telephones Table 20 describes each LUI utility menu item Figure 47 Local User Interface Controls on 3Com 3101 and 3101SP Basic Telephones 1 3Com Test Menu oeroll Ocrions 9 we TE EE amp o o 00o 00H90 g Q 0 LO Display Panel Shows LUI utility menu options Use the scroll buttons se
116. a dial plan From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add a dial plan see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Verify that the dial rules you want to associate with the new dial plan have been created Click Dial Rules The Dial Rules page appears listing all the currently configured dial rules a f the dial rules you want to add to the new dial plan are listed go to step 3 a If the dial rules you want to add to the new dial plan are not listed see Adding Dial Rules before continuing with the next step Click Dial Plans The Dial Plans page appears Click Add Dial Plan The Add Dial Plan page appears See Figure 93 Configuring Dial Plans 255 Figure 93 Add Dial Plan Page Add Dial Plan Dial Plan Information Name Save ff Cancel Jf Rese Fields marked with an asterisk are required 5 In the Name field enter a unique name to identify the dial plan 6 Click Save The Dial Plans page appears See Figure 94 Figure 94 Dial Plans Page Dial Plans Found 13 Dial Plan s Add Dial Plan Delete Selected Fiter EE al Name Actions Oo 3 NANP Dial Rules Delete o 4 NANP Dial Rules Delete o S NANP
117. abled sends a notification to all members of the 30 1 900 seconds hunt group or attendant logged in or logged out when a call or calls has been waiting in the queue longer than the specified threshold time The default is 30 seconds The threshold range is 1 to 900 seconds This field is not available for linear hunt groups If no member of a linear hunt group is available the call goes to call coverage it is not queued Note that the value for this field must be less than the value configured for the Total Timeout field see Table 26 The displayed message for an exceeded Time in Queue call threshold is HG Queue exceeded time lt hunt group extension gt 6 Click Save The Hunt Groups page appears and lists the hunt group or attendant you just created See Figure 78 Figure 78 Hunt Groups Page Hunt Groups Found 1 Hunt Group s Add Hunt Group Delete Selected Goa Crou Name VM Group Name a Group Address Actions O Service 641010 Phones Call Coverage Status Delete Prev Page of1 Next Once you have created a hunt group or attendant you can set up call coverage rules see Hunt Group and Attendant Call Coverage Options and add users see Adding Local User Extensions to a Hunt Group or Attendant Every hunt group and attendant has a default coverage point to handle unanswered calls There are two default call coverage options Calls can be redirected to the hunt group or attendant
118. address of the primary server at the remote regional office in this example R2 The Enter an Username for both Primary amp Secondary ROCSA s prompt appears Enter the username for the cworks account The default is cworks but may be changed during installation The Enter Password prompt appears Enter the password for the cworks account after the asterisks The default is cworks but may be changed during installation Press Enter The Re type Password prompt appears Reenter the password for the cworks account after the asterisks The Enter the Global Directory Input Path at ROCSA lopt 3com VCX vcxdata db export prompt appears which lists the default path to the location of the regional user directory common file Press Enter 3Com does not recommend changing this default directory path Press Enter to return to the main menu At the prompt enter o to exit the script 50 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY 12 At the system prompt enter the following command to reload the Searching for End Users through Global Directory configuration reload pl This section describes how to use the Global Directory to search for users regardless of location To search for end users using the Global Directory Access the Central Manager page see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager On the left side of the page click Global Directory see Figure 8 Figure 8 Global
119. age appears See Figure 103 3 Click Week Day Bands The Week Day Bands page appears See Figure 127 Figure 127 Week Day Bands Page Week Day Bands Found 2 Week Day Band s Add Week Day Band j Delete Selected Fiter a E Name a Mon Fri eekend Prev Page My of1 Next 4 Click Add Week Day Band The Add Week Day Band page appears See Figure 128 Figure 128 Add Week Day Band Page Add Week Day Band Name Sunday Monday C Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Save Cancel Jf Reset Fields marked with an asterisk are required Note Time Day Date configuration is applied according to GMT 5 In the Name field enter a unique name to identify this week day band 322 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Editing Week Day Bands Deleting Week Day Bands 1 1 Enter a check mark in the check box following a day to include it in the week day band Click Save The Week Day Bands page appears listing the added week day band To edit a week day band Click Week Day Bands The Week Day Bands page appears See Figure 127 In the Name column click the name of the week day band you want to modify The Edit Week Day Band page appears Modify the fields as required See the field descriptions in Adding Week Day Bands Click Save The Week Day Bands page appears To delete week day bands Click Week Day Bands The Week
120. al Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Number Translation The Number Translations page appears listing all the currently configured translation patterns See Figure 100 Configuring Number Translation USERS 265 Figure 100 Number Translation Page USERS Number Translations No Results Found Add Number Translation EE cones A Mo Source Result Source Destination Result Destination Pattern Pattern Pattern Pattern ActiveAction 3 Click Add Number Translation The Add Number Translation page appears See Figure 101 Figure 101 Add Number Translation Page Add Number Translation Number Translation Information Group Name drop64 Source Pattern M Result Source Pattern v Destination Pattern 10 v Result Destination Pattern 6410 v Active 4 Enter the required field information using Table 29 as a guide Table 29 Number Translation Information Field Description Group Name Enter a unique name to identify this number translation In this example the name is drop64 Source Pattern Choose the pattern that identifies the source call strings you want to translate from the drop down list The list shows all currently configured dial patterns In this example the Source Pattern
121. al Directory page and shows the search results for all extensions containing 001 The results include one user in Regional Office 1 and one user in Regional Office 2 38 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY Figure 7 Global Directory Page ro Po VCX V7000 3com Global Directory pi E Display information about users within the enterprise Central Manager gt Global Directory Global Directory Search Criteria Logs Last Name Contains First Name Contains Extension Contains 001 Site Id Contains Log Out Site Name Contains a Global Directory Search Results Last Name First Namea Extension Site ld Site Name Ballen Anna 631001 REG1V7 Regional Office 1 Martin Jean 641001 REG2V7 Regional Office 2 Prev Page1of1 Next Each regional office has its own local user directory This local directory includes by default all the users provisioned on the region and also all the users provisioned on each branch office if any associated with the regional office In this case regional users and branch users are included in the local directory because the regional database and the branch databases are automatically replicated However a regional office and its branch offices cannot view the user directory on another regional office and its branch offices unless one of the following conditions is true
122. al Information Title First Name Middle Name Last Name Country United States of America be E mail Phone Features Phone Language English be Phone Font Size Standard Y Weblogin User Name Password eeeessee Confirm Password eesessee Save J Cancel ff Reset Fields marked with an asterisk are required Many configuration pages include the following three buttons Save Saves the configured information as long as you have completed all the required fields Cancel Does not save configured information and returns to the previous parent page Reset Restores a page to its last saved state The 3Com VCX V7000 main page Figure 1 provides access to interfaces for the IP Messaging provisioning application the Central Manager which provides access to the VCX Administrator provisioning application and the VCX User provisioning application All of these interfaces are controlled by a web session timer By default an inactive web session times out after 30 minutes When the timer expires the user 36 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY end user or administrator session terminates To start a new session the user must log in again You can modify the web session timeout value if you want to shorten or lengthen the time users are allowed to maintain an inactive session Note that changing th
123. all is routed to member B s extension and so on until the last member of the group is reached If no member is logged in the call is routed to the call coverage point immediately When the total timeout value configured for the group is reached or the last hunt group member fails to answer whichever happens first the call is routed to the call coverage point see the discussion of timeout values and call coverage points later in this section Circular Hunt Group An incoming call rings at the member phone following the member to whom the last call was routed If the call is not answered the call rings at the phone of the next member in the group list For example if A B C and D are all logged in and member B received that last call the next call will ring at member C s extension If C does not answer the call is routed to member D s extension and so on until the total timeout value for the group is reached see the discussion of timeout values later in this section Calling Group An incoming call rings simultaneously on all member phones that are logged in even if a member is on another call For example if A B C and D are all available an incoming call will ring simultaneously at all four extensions until the total timeout value for the group is reached see the discussion of timeout values later in this section For each hunt group type you configure two timeout values Device Timeout Specifies how long t
124. all other configured peer regional offices in this example Chicago and Los Angeles immediately Press Enter You are returned to the main menu This section describes global directory configuration requirements when database replication is enabled between two regions and each region includes branch offices If replication is enabled between two regions the entries in the global directory depend on your location The Global Directory 47 For example Boston R1 has two branch offices R1B1 and R1B2 Chicago R2 has two branch offices R2B1 and R2B2 Database replication is enabled between R1 and R2 a The global directory on R1 includes users provisioned on R1 R1B1 R1B2 and R2 a The global directory on R2 includes users provisioned on R2 R2B1 R2B2 and R1 Notice that the branch offices associated with the remote region are not included For example while the global directory for R1 does include users provisioned on R2 it does not include users provisioned on R2 s branches R2B1 and R2B2 Adding Remote Branches to a Regional Global Directory To add remote branch users in this example R2B1 and R2B2 to the global directory for a local region in this example R1 Log on to the primary VCX server in R1 using the cworks account and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata globaldir bin config sh At the prompt enter 101 The Enter the Primary ROSCA IP Address or Hostname prompt appears Enter
125. all processor ma If you are configuring the phone profile for a regional processor system enter the IP address of the secondary call a f you are configuring the phone profile on a branch primary call processor If the server you are logged in to includes the Call office enter the IP address of the branch s associated Processor service for example an IP Telephony server this field displays the secondary call processor IP ad by default dress Registration Interval Specifies how often a registration message is sent t o the seconds server to see if it is active and to check for updates to the phone configuration Max Allowed Contacts Specifies the maximum number of phone registrations allowed for each phone A user assigned to an extension can register log in at multiple phones to access all of the features customized for that extension at multi locations The default and maximum number of registration five 5 ple s is Managing Phone Profiles 87 Table 12 Add Phone Profile Field Descriptions continued Field Description Display Name Format Determines how a caller is identified on the Display Panel of the called phone The following format options are available a UNCHANGED The Display Panel shows the caller s name as specified in the Display Name field in the Add Phone page see Adding Phone Extensions If you add multiple extensions and use a generic name
126. alls from a class of service 67 trunk to trunk calls for a class of service 68 dynamic button mapping 194 E editing attendant console basic information 128 calendar bands 327 class of service 68 class of service elements 72 day time bands 324 dial plans 257 elements 72 emergency defaults 135 emergency digits 137 emergency gateway IP addresses from an ERL 138 emergency lines to an ERL 140 end points 294 extensions on an attendant console 127 feature mapping buttons on an attendant console 127 global directory regional office configuration 41 holidays 319 hunt groups 244 IP addresses of an ERL 136 MAC address 122 outdial patterns 315 patterns 263 phone features 162 priorities of end points assigned to a route 301 priorities of routes 301 requestors 317 routes 299 type of service 79 user profiles 63 users 63 week day bands 322 elements class of service 70 configuring 70 editing 72 emergency defaults 135 emergency digits 137 emergency services 129 enabling inbound or outbound calls in a class of service 67 trunk to trunk calls for a class of service 68 end points adding 291 adding outdial patterns 295 deleting 294 deleting outdial patterns 297 editing 294 managing 291 types 271 ERL adding 131 deleting 136 deleting emergency digits 138 deleting emergency gateway IP addresses 139 deleting emergency lines 141 deleting IP addresses 137 editing emergency gateway IP addresses 138 editing emergency lines 140 editing
127. ame of new Type Of Service a lt 2 2 In the Enter name of new Type of Service field enter a unique name to identify the new ToS 3 Click Add The Types of Services page refreshes and lists the new ToS 4 In the Name column click the name of the new Type of Service for example in step 3 the 3Com Custom Type of Service was added The Edit Type of Service page appears See Figure 22 Configuring Type of Service 75 Figure 22 Edit Type of Service Page Edit Type of Service Type Of Service 3Com Custom Assign Button Mappings v 2102 Business Phone 2102 Default Template 3102 Business Phone 3102 Default Template v 3103 Manager Phone 3103 Default Template Call Forward Universal 465 Unassign Speed Dial 601 Unassign Select feature to assign it to the Type Of Service Call Forward Busy Assign 5 Select the default button mapping template you want to assign to this Type of Service You can select one template for each 3Com Business telephone Models 3102 and 2102 and one for the Manager s telephone Model 3103 6 Add features to the Type of Service Call Forward Universal and Speed Dial are automatically included however you can remove either feature by clicking Unassign a Select a feature from the drop down list b Click Assign See Table 11 for descriptions of each feature c Repeat steps a and b until you have selected all the features you want available
128. amed Test77 and lists the route on the Routes page see Figure 109 310 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES d Select the new route plan by enabling the radio button preceding the route plan name e Click Next lower right corner of the Wizard page The second page of the Route Wizard appears See Figure 119 Figure 119 Route Plan Wizard Page 2 Directory Route Plan Creation Wizard Destination Detail e Summary Add End Points for Test route plan Available Selected TestEPbackup A CallP Primary Ria W CallP Primary R2a J riority Name Type Gateway v Sited O IR Address O O IP Pot 50600 As shown in Figure 119 the page lists previously configured end points You have the following two options a You can create an end point then add it to the route plan Go to step 3 You can add an existing end point to the route plan Got to step 4 3 To create an end point a Enter a name for the end point in the Name text box b Enter the site identifier for this end point in the Site Id text box The site ID is typically the pattern prefix dialed by a caller to reach a regional or branch office c The IP Port field specifies the port number used by the end point The default port number is 5060 a If this end point identifies an IP Telephony and IP Messaging server or an IP Telephony server accept the default port number 5060 Managing Route Plans
129. an ONLY consist of FAX machines Group hunt group and attendant configuration is subject to the following limits a Each site can can support a maximum of 100 groups a Each group can support a maximum of 75 members a An extension can a member of a maximum of 25 groups Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 223 To configure a hunt group or attendant 1 From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window 2 Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears 3 Click Add Hunt Group The Add Hunt Group page appears see Figure 77 Figure 77 Add Hunt Group Page Add Hunt Group Group Name Group Address Type Linear v Class of Service Default Class Of Service z Local Time Zone x GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US and Canada 4 Observe Daylight Savings Announcement Number Music on Hold Number Voice Mail Number Per Device Timeout 2 20 seconds 10 Total Timeout 2 900 seconds 120 Override Total Timeout Queue Notification Settings C Number of Calls 1 612 5 Time in Queue 1 900 seconds 30 Reset 4 Enter the required information in the Hunt Group section using Table
130. an incoming call follow these steps a On the Selective Ringing page click Add Selective Ring The Add Selective Ring page appears See Figure 39 Figure 39 Add Selective Ring Page Add Selective Ring User Ming Lee Phone 641005 Selective Ringing Information Phone Address Ring Tone Ring Tone 1 Single b Inthe Phone Address field enter the phone number that will generate a particular ring tone c Inthe Ring Tone drop down list select the ring tone you want to assign to the number entered in the Phone Address field d Click Save The Selective Ringing page appears listing the source number and its associated ring tone You can modify the ring tone assigned to a number by selecting a different ring tone in the Ring Tone drop down list 120 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES You can remove a phone number and ring tone association by entering a check mark in the check box preceding the phone number and clicking Delete Selected 5 To configure selective ringing for calls to a hunt group of which this extension is a member follow these steps a c In the Ring Tone drop down list for the hunt group extension select the ring tone you want to assign to this user s extension In the Delay text box enter the time in seconds that will elapse before the user s phone rings The Message Waiting Indicator MWI lamp on the phone will flash as soon as a call arrives but th
131. anaging Holidays a Managing Week Day Bands a Managing Day Time Bands a Managing Calendar Bands a Manage OutDial Patterns An OutDial pattern is an optional component of an end point and specifies how an outbound destination number is modified An OutDial pattern can be used to strip off site specific access codes See Managing OutDial Patterns a Manage Number Translation You can control call routing by using a translation string that matches a destination number and controls the call according to configured source based routing parameters such as date time or requestor IP address See Configuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY Route Plan Configuration Requirements This section describes route plan configuration requirements in a VCX system The route plans you need to define depend on your VCX system configuration As described in VCX Hardware Configurations a VCX system can be installed on single site or across multiple sites 272 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Route Plan Configuration for Single Site Systems A route plan associates a dial pattern with a route a route identifies one or more end points A route plan determines how a call processor directs calls End points can be one of the following types a Call Processor Use this type of call processing end point when a call terminates at the end point for example in a single site system a Re
132. and PoE 146 M MAC address adding 121 deleting 122 347 editing 122 viewing in telephone diagnostics 152 157 viewing NCP address from a telephone 152 manager s telephone 146 managing calendar bands 325 day time bands 323 dial plans 254 dial rules 258 holidays 318 patterns 290 requestors 316 route plan 304 routes 297 type of service 73 week day bands 320 manually loading a global directory database 45 resynchronizing the global directory 45 mapping buttons to functions 194 Message Waiting Indicator See MWI multi site configuration options 19 route plan configuration 275 MWI bridging 183 hunt groups 247 selective ringing 120 N NCP IP Address 152 157 NCP MAC Address 152 157 number translation algorithms 328 number translation DIRECTORY 328 adding 329 deleting 333 modifying 332 number translation USERS 263 adding 264 deleting 267 modifying 267 O outdial patterns adding 314 adding routes 302 adding to end points 295 deleting 315 deleting from end points 297 348 INDEX deleting routes 303 editing 315 P paging 213 passwords application access 24 changing 24 for a phone extension 99 patterns deleting 263 editing 263 managing 290 personal speed dials configuring 167 phone extensions adding 97 adding a range 99 assigning to users 102 deleting 101 managing 95 modifying 100 roaming 106 unassigning 105 phone password 99 phone profiles cloning 93 crea
133. are returned to the main prompt Showing the Regional Offices from a Branch Office You can display the regional office that hosts a branch office To list the host regional office of a branch office Log on to the primary VCX server of the branch office using the cworks account and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata globaldir bin config sh The SELECT OPERATION prompt appears At the prompt enter 103 The config sh script lists the details for a branch s regional office Press Enter You are returned to the main prompt You can specify how often you want a data collection to automatically occur at each regional office Any new users that have been added or edits that have been made on a remote regional office are not visible on a local regional office until data is collected for each remote regional office A regional office collects user directory data for a Each branch office that it hosts 44 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY m Every phone configured on that regional office a Every remote regional office for which it is configured to collect user directory data By default data collection happens every six hours 360 minutes 3Com Corporation recommends that if you have more than one regional office you configure your data collection frequency to occur at least three times a day to ensure the databases are synchronized Branch office global directory configuration is auto
134. ary VCX server as root and entering the following command vex config services show The command response shows the type of VCX system configuration and shows the IP addresses for all VCX services VCX version 7 1 multi site systems rely on configuration of the Global Directory to enable call routing between regions If you elect to hide the user directory in a region you must configure a route plan on the other regions in the system to identify the hidden region See Route Plan Contiguration Requirements for information To directly add a user directory to another regional office use the config sh Script option 101 on the regional office you are logged on to User directories can also be added indirectly by using the config sh script option 107 in which case user directories are pushed to other regional offices see Uploading a User Directory to Multiple Regional Offices By directly adding a user directory from a regional office you control which user directories you want to add to your server For example if at the Boston office you add Chicago s user directory Boston users can see Chicago s user directory but Chicago can not see Boston s user directory Chicago users can not see Boston s user directory until you add the Boston directory at the Chicago office 40 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY 10 The following example adds the Chicago user directory to the Boston regional o
135. assigned to a route An OutDial pattern is optional configuration element for an end point and determines how the outbound destination number is modified To associate an OutDial pattern with an end point assigned to a route Click Routes The Routes page appears See Figure 109 In the Actions column for the route click End Points The Route Assigned End Points page appears See Figure 111 In the Action column click OutDia Patterns for the appropriate end point The Route End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns page appears showing any OutDial patterns currently associated with the end point assigned to the route See Figure 113 Figure 113 Route End Points OutDial Patterns Page Route End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns Route Region2a End Point CallP Primary R2a No Results Found Assign OutDial Patterns OutDial Pattern a Click Assign OutDial Patterns The Route End Point Unassigned OutDial Patterns page appears showing the available OutDial patterns If no OutDial patterns are listed you must create one or more see Adding OutDial Patterns Managing Routes 303 Figure 114 Route End Points Unassigned OutDial Patterns Page Route End Point Unassigned OutDial Patterns Route Region2a End Point CallP Primary R2a Found 1 OutDial Pattern s Assign Selected Cancel OutDial Pattern a Translation String Removeb4 Prev Page1of1 Next 5 You can assign one OutDial
136. associated branch offices a Multiple regional sites with each region supporting one or more associated branch offices a Multiple regional sites with no associated branch offices You need to create end points to identify the call processors at all regional and branch offices define routes containing the appropriate end points for each region and branch and create route plans at each site that associate a route with a dial string pattern This enables the call processor at each site to route a dialed number to the correct destination end point For example in a VCX multi site system a regional office must have routes created to m Itself a The other call processor in the redundant pair of VCX servers a Gateways so that calls can be placed throughout the PSTN a Each regional office this call processor wants to communicate with a Each branch office hosted by the regional office a The IP Messaging server for Music On Hold and voicemail services it is associated with A regional office acts as a redirect call processor for any supported branch offices Therefore you need only create a route on each branch office that points to its host regional office not to other branches or other regions the branch s regional host will redirect all calls to other destinations Each branch also needs a route that points to the IP Messaging server if a local messaging configuration is used in other words the branch office is an IP Telephony
137. ation Patterns DIRECTORY To add requestors From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add a requestor see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears Click DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY interface page appears See Figure 103 Click Requestors The Requestors page appears See Figure 123 Figure 123 Requestors Page Requestors Found 1 Requestor s Add Requestor Delete Selected Fiter A IP Address Port Oo gateway 151 104 123 50 5060 Prev Page K of1 Next 4 Click Add Requestor The Add Requestor page appears See Figure 124 Managing Requestors 317 Figure 124 Add Requestor Page Add Requestor Requestor Information Name IP Address IP Port 5060 Save J Cancel Jf Reset Fields marked with an asterisk are required 5 Enter the following field information a Name Enter a unique name to identify the requestor a P Address Enter the IP address of the Tier 1 or Tier 2 component in dotted decimal format m IP Port Specifies the port number used to communicate with the Tier 1 or Tier 2 component The default is 5060 6 Click Save The Requestors page appears listing the added requestor Editing Requestors To edit a requestor 1 Click Requestors The Requestors page appears See Figure 123 2 In the Name column click the name of the requestor you want to modify
138. attendant After you delete a hunt group or attendant you must also delete the associated voice mailbox Directions for deleting the voice mailbox are located on the Hunt Groups page see Figure 83 To delete a hunt group or attendant From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears Reconfiguring the Ring Sequence of Group Members Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 245 3 Locate the row containing the group you want to remove and click Delete in the Actions column A confirmation box appears verifying you really want to remove the group Click OK The Hunt Groups page refreshes and the hunt group is deleted Follow the instructions on the Hunt Groups page to delete the voice mailbox for this group The order in which you add hunt group or attendant member phones determines the initial order in which those phones ring when a call arrives You can modify the ring sequence by changing a member s rank within the group To modify the ring sequence of a hunt group or attendant From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is ena
139. ber matches both the blocked list pattern and the allowed list pattern for example 847 is configured for block list and 847262 is configured for allow list the block list always takes precedence The standard format for all dial patterns is lt number pattern gt for example 900 The call restrictions feature described in this section allows you to define incoming and outgoing call restrictions for a single phone Call restrictions may also be configured as whitelists and blacklists in the Class of Service COS to which a phone is assigned If there is a conflict between the calling restrictions defined for the phone and the restrictions defined for a phone s COS VCX software applies the restrictions defined in the COS See Configuring Class of Service To add call restrictions to an existing phone In the USERS menu click Users The Users page appears Figure 30 Click Phones in the Phones column The User Assigned Phones page appears Click Call Restrictions in the Actions column The Call Restrictions page appears From the Call Restrictions page click Add Call Restriction The Call Restrictions page appears Figure 36 shows an example of an outgoing call restriction 114 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Figure 36 Add Phone Restrictions Window Add Call Restriction Direction OUT_GOING Type Blocked Owner Administrator Pattern 901 901
140. bled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears Locate the row containing the group you want to modify and click Status in the Actions column The Hunt Group Status page appears See Figure 88 246 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Changing the Login Status of Group Members Figure 88 Hunt Group Status Page Hunt Group Status Hunt Group Service Found 6 Phone s Gia Phone Address V Change selected member s rank to iam Phone Address a FirstName Last Name Site Name Rank Status Mw 631001 Anna Ballen Regional Office 1 1 Logged Out 631004 Jose Lima Regional Office 1 3 Logged Out 641001 Jean Martin Regional Office2 2 Logged Out 641003 Amadeo Ricci Regional Office2 6 Logged Out 641005 Ming Lee Regional Office2 65 Logged Out 641205 Jack Bauer Regional Office2 4 Logged Out Prev Page of1 Next The Rank column shows the order in which calls will be answered by group members Enable the radio button preceding the member whose rank you want to modify In the Change selected member s rank to text box enter the new rank and click Submit If you change a member s rank to that of another member the second member is assigned the rank of the first member In Figure 88 for example
141. cation of the user whose call coverage you want to configure see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window 2 Locate the user whose call coverage you want to configure 3 In the Phones column click the Phones link The User Assigned Phones page appears for the selected user See Figure 51 4 In the Actions column click Call Coverage The Coverage Rules page appears See Figure 53 This page displays the coverage rules in effect for the phone 5 Click Add Coverage Rule The Add Coverage Rule page appears See Figure 56 Configuring Call Coverage fora Telephone 177 Figure 56 Add Coverage Rule Page Phone Add Coverage Rule User Maria A Lopez Phone 641004 Coverage Rule Information Name Call Coverage Send to Voice Mail Send to Number Holiday Coverage Settings Event Coverage Settings Start Time lo v 0 StartDate January viii 2006 EndTime 0 O v EndDate January 1 2006 v All Day Weekly Coverage Settings Start Time lo v Ilo Sunday EndTime O 0 Monday All Day Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Cancel Jf Rese Fields marked with an asterisk are required 6 Enter a unique identifier for the rule in the Name
142. cation you want to manage see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears See Figure 23 Figure 23 USERS Interface Main Page QN 3Com VCX V7000 Networked Telephony Solution Data Server REG2 7 10 230 64 5 3COl Copyright 2006 3Com Corporation All Rights Reserved USERS DIRECTORY SEARCH PREFERENCES MAIN LOG OUT T Users sers Phone Book Found 9 User s Phones Add User Delete Selected Hunt Groups Call Pickup Groups E mail Weblogin User Name Phones Actions oun O Claude Annette cannette Phones Address Clone Delete Media ae O Ed kelly ekelly Phones Address Clone Delete Contro PER A TE ee _ _ _ B Group Page grouppage Phones Address Clone Delete ia Speed Harry Schultz hschultz Phones Address Clone Delete ials m lt gt R eee Phone O Jack Bauer jbauer Phones Address Clone Delete rae O Jean Martin martin Phones Address Clone Delete Service O Maria A Lopez lopez Phones Address Clone Delete pak la Ming Lee mlee Phones Address Clone Delete Patterns O Wendy Freeman wfreeman Phones Address Clone Delete Class of Service Prev Page A of 1 Next Elements Dial Plans Dial Rules Emergency Services Number Translation Call Park Camp On This page lists all the users configured on the selected region or branch Managing Phone Profiles 83 The menu options for th
143. change the default call coverage point click Default in the Name column The Edit Default Coverage Point page appears See Figure 54 Figure 54 Edit Default Coverage Point Page Phone Edit Default Coverage Point _ User Maria A Lopez Phone 641004 Default Coverage Information Call Coverage Send to Voice Mail Send to Number ONo Coverage Save J Cancel Jf Rese 6 Enable one of the following radio buttons and configure if necessary according to the type of coverage you want Note that call coverage works with the Call Fallback setting on a user s phone configuration page See Figure 28 in Managing Phone Extensions See the example following step 10 a Send to Voice Mail An unanswered call goes directly to the user s voice mailbox This is the default call coverage point The voicemail extension is specified when you configure a phone for a user on the Add Phone page see Figure 28 in Managing Phone Extensions Adding a Call Coverage Rule for a Telephone Extension Configuring Call Coverage fora Teleohone 173 a Send to Phone Number An unanswered call goes to the specified phone number The phone can be an internal extension or external number but must conform to the dial plan in effect for this phone This number can be an extension configured for an operator or an IP Messaging number configured for an Auto Attendant In either case the number must conform to the dial plan in effect for this ph
144. ck box preceding the IP address you want to delete Click Delete Selected A pop up window appears prompting you to confirm the IP address delete action Click OK The IP Ranges page refreshes verifying the IP address es were deleted To edit an Emergency Number for the ERL CAUTION If Emergency service settings or emergency lines are changed for example the gateway IP address or emergency digits they will not take effect until the telephones are power cycled A simple logout login of the telephone is not adequate In the USERS menu click Emergency Services The Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services page appears From the Location Settings column click Emergency Numbers for the ERL you want to configure The Emergency Numbers page appears 138 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Deleting Emergency Numbers from an ERL Editing Emergency Gateway IP Addresses from an ERL In the Emergency Number column click the number you want to edit The Edit Emergency Number page appears In the Emergency Number field edit the emergency number 5 Click Save 1 The Emergency Numbers page refreshes showing the new emergency number To delete an Emergency Number from an ERL In the USERS menu click Emergency Services The Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services page appears From the Location Settings column click Emergency Numbers for the ERL you want to configure The Emergency Number
145. ck the name of the new Class of Service The Class of Service Elements page appears Add one or more elements to the Class of Service by selecting an element from the Select element to add it to the Class of Service drop down list A CoS element includes one or more dialing patterns See Configuring Class of Service Elements for information on CoS elements Click Assign The Class of Service Elements page refreshes You can add as many elements as you want to the Class of Service By default inbound and outbound calls matching the dial patterns in each CoS element are allowed You can modify the default by toggling the setting under the nbound calls and Outbound calls heading to either enable or disable these types of calls a Whitelist Allows a phone to dial or receive calls matching the element a Blacklist Does not allow a phone to dial or receive calls matching the element 68 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES 8 For each Class of Service Trunk to Trunk Transfer and Forward to Trunk dialing can be configured Trunk to Trunk Transfer If enabled users are allowed to transfer a call from outside the phone system from a PSTN to somewhere else outside the internal phone system For example if phone A located on the PSTN calls phone B located on the VCX system phone B can forward the call to phone C located on the PSTN This creates a bridge between phone A and phone C and the company of
146. configure selective ringing for 2 bridged extensions and 12 hunt group extensions 1001 through 1012 VCX software impliments selective ringing for the two bridged extensions and for hunt group extensions 1001 through 1008 Hunt group extensions 1009 through 1012 use the default hunt group ring tone configure in the phone profile 118 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES For each number configured for selective ringing you can select one of 9 tones and for each tone you can choose to have the telephone ring once twice or three times To set a selective ring tone for a phone 1 In the USERS menu click Users The Users page appears Figure 30 2 Click Phones in the Phones column The User Assigned Phones page appears 3 Click Selective Ringing in the Actions column for the user s phone you want to configure The Selective Ringing page appears See Figure 38 Figure 38 Selective Ringing Page Selective Ringing User Ming Lee Phone 641005 Save Selected Reset Incoming Calls Hunt Group and Bridged Calls Phone Address Ring Tone Phone Address Ring Tone O 641004 Ring Tone 1 Single 5 O 641010 Ring Tone 1 Single 0 Prev Page1of1 Next The Selective Ringing page displays two columns that allow you to set ring tones for the current extension in Figure 38 641005 for the following types of calls a Incoming Calls Allows you to assign a ring tone to a partic
147. configured in a profile Once configured the profile can be assigned to one or more telephone extensions The profile identifies the user and also establishes account information required to access the VCX User application The user can access this web interface to configure some telephone features for example call forwarding and view account information for example calls made and received To create a user profile Access the Users page as described in Accessing User Options Click Add User The User Add page appears see Figure 12 which contains three sections Configuring User Profiles 57 a Personal Information Identifies the user a Phone Features Specifies the language and font size used on the user s telephone LCD Display Panel a Web Login Information Specifies the username and password required for access to the VCX User web interface Figure 12 Add User Page Title First Name Middle Name Last Name Add User Personal Information United States of America b Country E mail Phone Features Phone Language Phone Font Size English v Standard v Weblogin User Name Password Confirm Password Web Login Information esesesese Save J Cancel ff Reset Fields marked with an asterisk are required All fields marked with and asterisk are required 3 In the Personal Information secti
148. contain additional information about the products in this release that are a part of or support the 3Com Convergence Applications Suite The following documents are a part of the VCX IP Telephony Solution a VCX Installation Guide a VCX Maintenance Guide a VCX Administration Guide a VCX Basic Telephone Quick Reference Guide a VCX Business Telephone Quick Reference Guide a VCX Telephone Display Quick Reference Guide a VCX Manager s Telephone Quick Reference Guide a VCX Basic Telephone Guide a VCX Business Telephone Guide a VCX Manager s Telephone Guide a VCX Feature Codes for Analog Telephones Quick Reference Guide a VCX Security Guide The following documents are a part of the IP Messaging Module a P Messaging Module Quick Reference Guide 3Com Native Interface a P Messaging Module User Guide 3Com Native Interface a P Messaging Module Quick Reference Guide Traditional Interface a P Messaging Module User Guide Traditional Interface a P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide a E Mail Reader Application Quick Start Guide The following documents are a part of the IP Conferencing Module a P Conferencing Module Installation Guide a P Conferencing Module Administration Guide a P Conferencing Module User Guide a Convergence Center Client User and Administration Guide 14 ABOUT THIS GUIDE The following documents provide information on products that support this release Enterprise Management S
149. cribed earlier in this section each value must be within the range of valid values Click Save Mapping Features to Telephone Buttons Dynamic Button Mapping Overview 3Com maps calling features to buttons on VCX telephones For example many phones have a button users press to transfer a call to another destination Mapping a feature to a button allows one touch access to that feature Every VCX phone has a set of default features mapped to buttons For the 3Com Business telephones Models 3102 and 2102 and Manager s telephone Model 3103 you can change the default feature to button mapping to enable different features This capability is referred to as dynamic button mapping You have the following dynamic button mapping options for the Business and Manager s telephones You can specify that all users of a particular phone model use the same button mapping You enable this option by selecting a button mapping template for a Type of Service ToS and assigning that ToS to a phone profile see Managing Phone Profiles VCX software includes by default two button mapping templates for each supported phone type You can however create your own template for a phone type assign it to a ToS and assign that ToS to a phone profile Managing Button Mapping Templates Mapping Features to Telephone Buttons 195 You can override the button mappings specified for a phone type in the ToS by mapping buttons for individual
150. d Hunt Groups Page Groups Call Pickup Groups E mail Weblogin User Name Phones Actions So O Claude Annette cannette Phones Address Clone Delete Media porns O Ed kelly ekelly Phones Address Clone Delete Contro T 2 j _ Group Page grouppage Phones Address Clone Delete System Speed Hanv Schultz hschultz Phones Address Clone Delete ials f t t t i Phone O Jack Bauer jbauer Phones Address Clone Delete Slap O Jean Martin martin Phones Address Clone Delete Service oO Maria A Lopez lopez Phones Address Clone Delete Button mareen a o nas een Mappings OF Mingbee mies Phones Addiess Clone Delete Patterns Oo Wendy Freeman wfireeman Phones Address Clone Delete Class of 5 Service Prev Page Wa 1 Next Elements Dial Plans Dial Rules Emergency Services Number Translation Call Park Camp On The main menu options include m USERS Enables you to manage users groups of users and telephone features using the menu options shown on the left side of Figure 4 These topics are described in Chapter 3 through Chapter 9 The USERS main menu option is available with the following application access roles a The admin role allows access to all menu options a The user role allows access to all menu options The manager role allows access to the top section of menu options only Users Phone Book Phones Hunt Groups Page Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manag
151. d from an extension through the USERS interface but must be edited through the DIRECTORY interface see Chapter 10 To edit a call coverage rule for a phone extension Access the office location of the user whose call coverage you want to edit see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window 2 Locate the user whose call coverage you want to edit 3 In the Phones column click the Phones link The User Assigned Phones page appears for the selected user See Figure 51 In the Actions column click Call Coverage The Coverage Rules page appears See Figure 57 This page displays the coverage rules in effect for the phone In Figure 57 there are four coverage rules in effect for the selected extension 641004 Configuring Call Coverage fora Telephone 179 Figure 57 Call Coverage Rule s Page Coverage Rule s Found 4 Coverage Rule s Call Timeout seconds 5 Submit i Add Predefined Coverage Rule Add Coverage Rule j Delete Selected Cancel Name Type Coverage Start End Coverage Point Action s O New Years Day Holiday Jan1 All Day Voice Mail oO Vacation Event Jul 14 2006 Jul 24 2006 15 00 08 00 641 000 C Lunch Weekly Sun Sat 1200 13 00 Voice Mail Default Default Every Day All Day
152. d option 6 Click Save Adding a Call Coverage Rule for a Group When you create a hunt group or attendant VCX software automatically assigns the group s voice mailbox as the default coverage point In addition to the default coverage point you can create a call coverage plan for the group As described in Hunt Group and Attendant Call Coverage Options a call coverage plan consists of coverage rules Each rule is based on a date day or time event Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 231 You have two options when assigning a call coverage rule to a group a You can assign a predefined coverage rule This option allows you to select coverage settings previously configured through options on the DIRECTORY interface and are available to all groups and attendants configured on this server These options are described in Chapter 10 and include a Coverage rules based on a holiday See Managing Holidays Coverage rules based on the day of the week See Managing Week Day Bands a Coverage rules based on a time range See Managing Day Time Bands a Coverage rules based on a date or date range See Managing Calendar Bands a You can create a call coverage rule for this group or attendant A rule created for an individual group or attendant is by default not available to other groups or attendants Adding a Predefined Call Coverage Rule for a Group To add a predefined call coverage rule for a grou
153. d point assigned to a route Click Routes The Routes page appears See Figure 109 In the Actions column for the route click End Points The Route Assigned End Points page appears See Figure 111 In the Sort Order column change the priority of one or more end points 4 Enter a check mark in the check box preceding each end point whose Removing an End Point Assigned to a Route priority you changed in step 3 Click Update A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the priority update Click OK The Route Assigned End Points page refreshes showing the updated end points To remove one or more end points assigned to a route Click Routes The Routes page appears See Figure 109 In the Actions column for the route click End Points The Route Assigned End Points page appears See Figure 111 You can unassign one end point or multiple end points m To unassign one end point from a route click Unassign in the Actions column 302 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Assigning an OutDial Pattern to a Route m Tounassign multiple end points from a route enter a check mark in the check box preceding each end point you want to unassign then click Unassign Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the unassign action Click OK The Route Assigned End Points page refreshes An Outdial pattern is associated with an end point and an end point can be
154. d the following types of pages from a member phone a Send a page to a single phone individual page m Send a page to many phones group page m Send a page to an external paging amplifier a Send a page to a group and to an external paging amplifier 214 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Page group members must be local users A group can include all users at a site or a subset of users A telephone can belong to multiple page groups however a telephone can only receive one page at a time When you create a page group you assign phone extensions as members of the group You also assign an extension to the page group When a group member dials the group page extension speakers are activated on the telephones that are members of the group As the member speaks into the handset the member s voice is broadcast on the activated speakers Note that a user does not need to be a member of a page group to send a page to that group A page will not be broadcast on a phone if any of the following conditions are true m The phone is not a member of the target page group a The phone is not logged in m The phone is processing a call that is the call is ringing connected or on hold m The phone has redirect features enabled Do Not Disturb Call Forwarding or Forward to Voicemail A page is subject to the following restrictions a Users cannot park transfer hold conference or pick up a page a Users cannot camp on a page
155. dant to place a call in a holding pattern and make it available for another user to pick up from any telephone on the system by dialing the Call Park extension Call Transfer Allows the attendant to transfer a call to an extension mapped to one of the Attendant Console buttons Conference Allows the attendant to create a conference call with two other extensions mapped to Attendant Console buttons Attendant Serial Calling Allows the attendant to activate a serial call transfer from an external or internal caller to multiple internal destinations one at a time during a single connection Serial calling works as follows 1 A caller dials the attendant s number external caller or extension internal caller and requests a serial call transfer 2 The attendant uses one of the following methods to transfer the call Method 1 a Presses the button mapped to Attendant Serial Calling on the Attendant Console Presses the button mapped to the called party s extension on the Attendant Console Presses the button mapped to Attendant Serial Calling on the Attendant Console to complete the transfer Method 2 a Presses the Feature button on the attendant s phone and enters feature code 471 A prompt appears in the attendant phone s Display Panel requesting the Serial Calling Number the destination extension 124 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Mapping Phone Extension to an Attenda
156. ddress Active IP address of this telephone Subnet Mask Active IP mask Gatwy IP Address Active default gateway IP address NCP IP Address Active IP address of the call processor with which this telephone communicates ALT SrvrIP Active IP address of the secondary call processor VLAN Config Enabled or disabled VLAN for this telephone acquired from either DHCP option 184 or a setting in the telephone s memory Mem My IP Addr The IP address configured in the telephone s memory though the LUI utility Mem Subnet Mask The IP mask configured in the telephone s memory though the LUI utility Mem Gatwy IP The default gateway IP address configured in the telephone s memory though the LUI utility 3Com Telephone Local User Interface Menus 153 Table 20 Business and Basic Telephone LUI Menu Items continued Menu Option Description 1 View Settings continued Mem NCP IP Addr The NCP IP address configured in the telephone s memory though the LUI utility Mem ALT SrvrlIP Secondary download server address configured in the telephone s memory Mem VLAN Config VLAN values configured in telephone s memory 2 Set my IP 3 Set SUBNMsk 4 Set Gatwy IP Lets you specify the IP information for this telephone If you have a DHCP server this information is automatically provided by the server When entering an IP address a Use the key pad to enter digits 0 9 a Us
157. de assigned by default short cut dial strings for frequently used phone 9 y numbers These speed dials are phone specific not system wide The access code feature code is 601 See Configuring Personal Speed Dial Numbers Call Forward Busy Use this feature to redirect incoming calls when this phone is busy If the user has multiple lines on this phone the busy is defined as all lines exhausted with existing calls The access code feature code is 467 See Configuring Call Forward Busy Call Forward Ring No Use this feature to redirect incoming calls when this Answer phone rings for a specific time period in seconds The access code feature code is 466 See Configuring Call Forward Ring No Answer Configuring Type of Service 77 Table 11 Calling Features for Phones continued Calling Feature Description Caller Identity This feature blocks caller identity information user name and phone extension from appearing on called party s LCD Display Panel This feature can be enabled for all calls or for the next call only a The feature code to block caller ID for all calls is 889 a The feature code to block caller ID for the next call only is 890 The block caller ID for the next call feature overrides the current setting for block caller ID for all calls See Configuring Caller Identity Directed Call Pickup By enabling this feature and creating a security code a
158. describes how to globally configure call park for a VCX system Call park allows a user to place a call in a holding pattern where it can retrieved by any user from any telephone on the system When a call is parked it is assigned a call park extension The call park extension can be explicitly assigned by the user or the user can allow the system to assign the next available call park extension The parked call can then be retrieved by dialing the call park extension When a user parks a call the VCX system will not allow the user to specify a call park extension that is configured for some other purpose For example if the call park extension range overlaps numbers configured for voicemail access a hunt group or user extensions the VCX system will ignore the user specified call park extension and use the next available valid call park extension The default call park extension numbers are 800 through 899 inclusive which provides a call park range of 100 numbers See Figure 68 The VCX system allows you configure a call park range with a maximum of 2000 numbers The length of a call park number can be from 2 digits to 10 digits inclusive CAUTION You must ensure that the dial strings in your selected call park range are allowed by the dial plan in effect on your VCX system If for example you specify a call park range of 4000 through 4099 the dial Configuring Call Park 207 plan in effect must include a dial rule that allows four
159. direct Call Processor Use this type of call processing end point when a call does not terminate at the end point and therefore requires further routing information for example a region to region call in a multi site system a Gateway Use this type of end point to identify IP Messaging servers and clients IP Conferencing servers and media gateways so that calls can be placed throughout the PSTN end points Earlier releases of VCX software required configuration of route plans called URI route maps in previous releases to identify all call processing end points With VCX software version 7 1 this is no longer required Each call processor in a VCX single site or multi site system running version 7 1 can route calls to other call processors in the system using the Global Directory which you must configure see The Global Directory However you must still configure route plans that identify the IP Messaging servers and clients IP Conferencing servers and media gateways in your system See Route Configuration for Voicemail and Music on Hold and Route Configuration to a Gateway for detailed information Although not required you can still configure route plans to identify call processing end points See Route Plan Configuration for Single Site Systems and Route Plan Configuration for Multi site Systems for this optional configuration information A single site system includes either a single pair or two pairs of
160. disable the feature remove the check mark In the Phone Address field enter the phone number or extension of the phone that will receive incoming calls when this phone is busy for example 631002 Click Update The feature settings are applied to the user s phone To configure the Call Forward Ring No Answer feature Follow the steps in Configuring ToS Phone Features to access the Assigned Phone Features page for a user In the Action column click Edit Feature in the Call Forward Ring No Answer row 166 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER Configuring Call Forward Universal Configuring Caller Identity 1 1 The Call Forward Ring No Answer feature page appears To enable the feature ensure a check mark appears in the Enabled box To disable the feature remove the check mark In the Phone Address field enter the phone number or extension for example 631002 of the phone that will receive incoming calls when this phone does not answer a call within the specified Time Out interval In the Timeout seconds field enter the time in seconds you want a phone to ring before being forwarded Click Update The feature settings are applied to that user s phone To configure the Call Forward Universal feature Follow the steps in Configuring ToS Phone Features to access the Assigned Phone Features page for a user In the Action column click Edit Feature in the Call Forward Universal row The Cal
161. dit a site name Access the Central Manager see the previous section Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The Central Manager page appears Click Modify The regional and branch office site name fields become editable Modify a site name by editing the field value in the Site Name column 4 Click Save The site name is updated The Global Directory Global Directory Overview The Global Directory option on the Central Manager page see the left side of Figure 3 allows you to search for configured users in any office linked to the Central Manager You can search using first or last name phone extension or site ID or name Once you find the user you can launch the VCX Administrator provisioning interface for the office data server where the user is configured This feature is useful in multi site systems where there are multiple regional offices and possibly branch offices associated with a regional office The Global Directory is also used in VCX version 7 1 systems for call routing Prior to version 7 1 you had to configure routes between each VCX call processing end point to enable calling in a multi site system With version 7 1 VCX software can use the Global Directory on each call processor to make call routing decisions See Route Plan Configuration Requirements for more information on routing See topics in this section for information on setting up the Global Directory Figure 7 show the Glob
162. e column header In the Speed Dial Number column click the number of the entry you want to modify The Edit System Speed Dial page appears Figure 62 Edit System Speed Dial Page Edit System Speed Dial System Speed Dial Parameters Speed Dial Number 2 First Name Maria Last Name Lopez Phone Address 641004 Save Cancel Reset 4 Enter new information in the field or fields you want to change 5 Click Save The System Speed Dials page appears and the modified entry is listed 192 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES Deleting a System Speed Dial Entry You can delete one some or all existing system speed dial entries To delete one or more existing system speed dial entries In the USERS menu click System Speed Dials The Enterprise System Speed Dials page appears See Figure 61 The page lists the first 12 system speed dial entries Find the entry or entries you want to delete You can press Previous or Next to navigate to a different page or sort entries by clicking the appropriate column header To delete one system speed dial entry click De ete in the Action column To delete multiple system speed dial entries a Click the check box beside each entry left most column b Click Delete Selected To delete a system speed dial entries a Click the top check box to select all entries b Click Delete Selected In all cases click OK in the pop up m
163. e 1 Doe Jane 631101 REG1 7 Regional Office 1 Lima Jose 631004 REG1 7 Regional Office 1 payroll payroll 1631010 REG1 7 Regional Office 1 Prev Page 1of0 Next Locating Global Any modifications to the global directory using the global directory Directory Log Files configuration tool are captured log files that are located in the opt 3com VCX vcxdata globaldir log directory The files are listed in this format globaldirmenu_ROCSA_ lt year month date timestamp gt log Example globaldirmenu_ROCSA_200502031446 1log gt CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES This chapter provides information on how to add edit clone and delete users through the VCX Administrator web provisioning application The chapter also provides information on managing the user environment through Class of Service CoS and Type of Service ToS configuration This chapter includes the following topics Accessing User Options Contiguring User Profiles Viewing the Phone Book Contiguring Class of Service Configuring Class of Service Elements Configuring Type of Service Be sure to set your web browser preferences so that the cache is updated whenever you modify or view a new web page 54 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES Accessing User Options You can use the VCX Administrator provisioning application to manage user profiles and to assign one or more telephones to each user These provisioning options are avai
164. e Adding Routes Create a pattern for user access to voicemail and MOH The access numbers for voicemail and MOH are configured by the IP Messaging system administrator and are specified when you add a phone for a user see Managing Phone Extensions For example if the voicemail access number is 5000 and MOH access number is 5001 you would create the pattern 5 Note that you must also configure a dial rule for these access numbers and add the rule to the dial plan in effect for branch users For instructions on adding a pattern see Adding Patterns For information on dial rules and plans see Configuring Dial Rules and Configuring Dial Plans Configure a route plan to associate a pattern and a route In this example you would create one route plan that associates IPMRoute1 with the pattern 5 For instructions see Adding a Route Plan Repeat steps 1 through 6 on the primary call processor on region 2 R2a using the Gateway end points that point to IPM2a and IPM2b Configuring Routes for Global IP Messaging on a Branch Office This example describes how to create IP Messaging routes on a branch office that uses global IP Messaging services 286 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES The example uses the following multi site system a Ria identifies the primary call processor in region 1 a R1b identifies the secondary call processor in region 1 a IPM 1a identifies the primary IP Messaging server in r
165. e Name column click the name of the Type of Service you want to modify The Edit Type of Service page appears See Figure 22 To change the default button mapping template assigned to this Type of Service click the drop down list for the appropriate phone model select the template then click Save To add features to the Type of Service a Select a feature from the drop down list b Click Assign See Table 11 for descriptions of each feature c Repeat steps a and b until you have selected all the features you want available with this Type of Service To delete a feature currently assigned to the Type of Service click Unassign in the Action column When you are finished modifying the Type of Service you can either navigate to another menu option or log out It is important to understand the consequences of steps 4 and 5 a The features assigned to a Type of Service appear on and can be configured through the Assigned Phone Features page see Configuring Phone Features a The assigned features can also be configured by the user through the VCX User interface or the TUI a The assigned features can be mapped to buttons on the 3Com Business telephones Models 3102 and 2102 and for the Manager s telephone Model 3103 If you remove a feature that is mapped to a button in one of the selected button mapping templates there will be a mismatch between the template the Type of Service You must ensure that the Type of Ser
166. e USERS interface appear on the left side These options allow you to a Manage user profiles configure a Class of Service and configure a Type of Service See Chapter 3 a Manage telephone profiles and extensions configure an attendant console and configure emergency services These topics are described in this chapter a Manage phone features for example call forwarding for a user See Chapter 6 a Manage global phone features for example system speed dial numbers See Chapter 7 a Manage calling groups for example hunt groups See Chapter 8 a Manage dialing patterns plans and rules See Chapter 9 For information on user interface components see Using the Graphical User Interface Managing Phone Profiles Creating a Phone Profile Each phone extension has an associated phone profile A phone profile includes a set of attributes for example a dial plan and Class of Service that are common to all phones that use the profile This section describes how to create modify clone and delete a phone profile It also describes how to list the phones associated with a profile You can create multiple phone profiles customized for different groups of phone users For example you can create a different phone profile for sales accounting and customer service A phone profile specifies a primary and secondary call processor and an associated range of telephone extensions In a multi site VCX environment
167. e a pattern with a route when you create a route plan You can consider a prefix as a site ID A prefix is created as a dial rule and added to the dial plan in effect for users at a region For example if the site ID on region 1 is 61 the site ID on region 2 is 62 and the site ID on region 3 is 63 you would create these patterns 61 62 and 63 For instructions on adding a pattern see Adding Patterns For information on dial rules and plans seeConfiguring Dial Rules and Configuring Dial Plans Configure a route plan to associate a pattern and a route In this example you would create a route plan that associates Route1 with the dialing pattern 61 a route plan that associates Route2 with the dialing pattern 62 and a route plan that associates Route3 with the dialing pattern 63 For instructions see Adding a Route Plan You do not need to perform these steps on a secondary server in this example R1b Data replication between the primary and secondary servers ensures that the routing information gets propagated to both servers in the redundant pair At this point you have two options regarding the route configuration on the other regional servers m You could perform steps 2 through 6 on the primary servers hosting R2a and R3a This would configure all the servers as equals In this case each region includes redundant routes to every other region with the end points defined as type Call Processor a Allow only
168. e defaults for the organization Fields marked with an asterisk are required Emergency Services Found 1 Emergency Location s Add ERL Delete Selected gency 3 E ER a Emer aa Location Settings Action IP Ranges Emergency Numbers Emergency Gateway IP Emergency Lines Prev Page1of1 Next Delete meat 45083334444 6 Add an IP address range for the ERL The range specifies the telephones that can be included within this ERL for example all telephones on the 1st floor of a building Each phone in an ERL is assigned an IP address from a range of IP addressed specified by a network address and subnet mask a In the Location Settings column click IP Ranges for the ERL you want to configure The IP Ranges page appears b Click Add IP Range The Add IP Range page appears c Inthe P Address field enter the IP network address that identifies the range addresses you want to include in this ERL d Inthe Subnet Mask field enter the subnet mask for this IP address range e Click Save The IP Ranges page refreshes showing the new IP address range 7 Configure the Emergency Numbers for the ERL Dialing an emergency number signals the gateway that the call is an emergency and should be handled differently in case of a disconnect 134 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Click Emergency Services to return to the ERL configuration page From the Location Settings column clic
169. e extension To delete a Class of Service In the USERS menu click Class of Service The Class of Services page appears See Figure 18 In the Actions column of the CoS you want to delete click Delete A prompt appears asking you to confirm the delete action Click OK Class of Service elements include one or more dialing patterns Patterns of Service Elements Adding Class of Service Elements 1 are typically grouped in an element according to type For example the CoS element TollFree could contain patterns 91800 91888 that identify long distance calls that are paid by the called party When you create an element it is available to any Class of Service A CoS element can be assigned to multiple Classes of Service To add a Class of Service element In the USERS menu click Elements under Class of Service The Elements page appears listing all the currently configured Class of Service elements See Figure 19 Configuring Class of Service Elements 71 Figure 19 Class of Service Elements Page Elements Found 12 Element s Prev Page1of2 Next gt gt Name a Alternate Long Distance Long Distance Delete Operator Delete Enter name of new element E 2 In the Enter name of new element field enter a name to identify the new element Use alpha numeric characters only do not use or parentheses or other special characters 3 Click Add The Elements page refreshes and
170. e notification The member s extension could also be 248 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS 4 bridged to a primary extension and therefore have access to the primary extension s voice mailbox see Adding Bridge Permission for an Extension For example extension 641001 is a member of two hunt groups Service and Support and is configured to receive voicemail notification when a caller leaves voicemail for either group Extension 641001 is also bridged to the primary extension 641005 When a user presses the Message button on extension 641001 the telephone display panel shows the following information m The number of messages in the personal mailbox for extension 641001 a The number of messages in the mailbox for the hunt group Service a The number of messages in the mailbox for the hunt group Support a The number of messages in the mailbox for primary bridged extension 641005 Note that the display panel can list 26 mailbox status entries The display panel always lists the mailbox for phone s extension Therefore the display panel can list a maximum of 25 status entries for group mailboxes and bridged extension mailboxes Once the maximum is reached additional group or bridged extension mailboxes will not be listed To change the message waiting indicator of a hunt group or attendant member From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is
171. e number 5 to navigate through the list of options Soft Buttons Moves the cursor left or right The middle button is not used Key Pad Selects menu items or enter numeric characters in a configuration option Use the key to save changes after you edit an item Access Buttons AB1 AB4 Selects LUI menu items The buttons are numbered left to right AB1 is the first button on the left AB4 is the last button on the right Scroll Buttons Function as follows a Select Button The center Select button starts and exits from the LUI utility or exits from a menu item and moves to the next higher menu If you press Select before you save a change to a setting you exit the menu item without saving the change a Up and Down Buttons Moves up or down through the LUI menu and select hex digits when editing a MAC address 150 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS a Left and Right Buttons Positions the cursor in the Display Panel when editing a setting such as an IP address Model 2102 and 2102SP Business Telephones LUI Controls Figure 48 shows the LUI controls on the Model 2102 and 2102 IR Business Telephones Table 20 describes each LUI utility menu item Figure 48 Local User Interface Controls on the 3Com 2102 and 2102 IR Business Telephones ee T f CRO perons O 2 O eO 3 4 O sO Q D O iS OOW S o O O 1 Display Pane
172. e phone will not ring until the delay timer elapses When you change either the ring tone or delay value a check mark appears in the check box preceding the phone number Click Save Selected 6 To configure selective ringing for calls to a bridged line to which this user s extension is mapped follow these steps a In the Ring Tone drop down list for the extension to which this user s phone is mapped select the ring tone you want to ring on the user s phone In the Delay text box enter the time in seconds that will elapse before the user s phone rings The Message Waiting Indicator MWI lamp on the phone will flash as soon as a call arrives but the phone will not ring until the delay time elapses Note that the call will ring immediately on the bridged extension the delay and ring tone apply only to the phone mapped to the bridged extension When you change either the ring tone or delay value a check mark appears in the check box preceding the phone number Click Save Selected Configuring Media Access Control Each VCX telephone within the network has a unique Media Access Control MAC address which is printed on the bottom of the telephone You can lock a phone s MAC address with a phone extension This prevents use of the extension on a different telephone Configuring Media Access Control 121 Adding a MAC To associate a MAC address with a phone extension Address 1 In the USERS menu click Users The Us
173. e plan associates a route with a dial string pattern Note You can create a dial string pattern define end points add routes and create a route plan by running the Route Plan Wizard Managing Route Plans Using the Route Plan Wizard 7 Set up an outdial pattern to a route to strip off site specific access codes Improves call routing efficiency optional for multi site configurations only Assigning an OutDial Pattern to a Route 8 Examine the default Type Of Service TOS configurations supplied with VCX software A TOS determines the features available on a VCX telephone for example call forwarding and the default button mapping available on VCX Business and Manager s telephones If the supplied TOS configurations do not meet your needs you can modify the existing configurations or create new ones Configuring Type of Service 9 Examine the default Class Of Service COS configurations supplied with VCX software A COS determines what phone numbers a user is allowed to either call or receive If the supplied COS configurations do not meet your needs you can modify the existing configurations or create new ones Configuring Class of Service 10 Configure emergency services Emergency services are used to determine the location of a caller who has dialed the emergency number Configuring Emergency Services 11 Add users Each user configuration includes address
174. e source based input parameters allow the server to vary the translation or route mapping based on the source For example translation of the same number could be different based on which gatekeeper the request came from Table 32 Number Translation Direct Requestor Destination Number Translation Gatekeeper 1 312 555 1212 708 555 1212 Gatekeeper 2 312 555 1212 630 555 1212 The same logic applies for destination number to route mapping For example if the request comes from gatekeeper 1 then the route would be different than if the request comes from gatekeeper 2 This section describes how to configure a route plan using the Route Plan menu option You can also create a route using the Route Plan Wizard See Using the Route Plan Wizard for more information To add a route plan From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add a route plan see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears Click DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY interface page appears See Figure 103 Click Route Plans The Route Plans page appears by default Figure 116 shows the page with four previously configured route plans 306 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Figure 116 Route Plans Page Route Plans Found 3 Route Plan s Add Route Plan Delete Selected Filter ee Indirect Phone Holiday Vee Day Day Time Calendar Requestor Profile
175. e the emergency caller hangs up However if the ELIN is not released in this manner the usage release timer specifies how long the ELIN remains unavailable for reassignment A second timer the association release timer specifies how long an ELIN is associated with the IP address of the calling phone This allows an ELIN to be associated with a phone after the usage timer expires However if a new emergency call comes in the ELIN can be assigned to the new caller and the old ELIN phone association is overwritten 130 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES A Emergency Calling Considerations for Roaming Users If all the ELINs associated with an ERL are in use the default ERL emergency callback number is used instead Additionally you can specify a set of emergency gateways which are used to directly reach the emergency service if the call processor is unavailable To ensure that emergency calls always go through a set of system wide defaults are defined the callback phone number and an emergency gateway identified by its IP address These system defaults are used for example if a phone is not associated with any ELIN or if the call processor is down The emergency dialable digits are controlled by the ERL screens If the emergency digits are identified by an ERL then those emergency dialable digits will not be applied a Class of Service treatment Just because a Class of Service Element is named Emerge
176. e the left and right soft keys or scroll keys to move the cursor left or right m If any of the fields within the IP address contain only one or two digits add leading zeros Example Enter 10 234 1 125 as 010 234 001 125 To change a telephone back to its default setting enter 255 for each octet of the IP address To clear all configured settings and return to factory defaults select menu item O EEPROM default m Press the key to commit your address change 5 Set NCP IP Lets you specify the IP address of the primary Network Call Processor This information is typically provided by using a DHCP server configured with option 184 You can however manually enter the IP address When entering an IP address a Use the key pad to enter digits 0 9 a Use the left and right soft keys or scroll keys to move the cursor left or right m If any of the fields within the IP address contain only one or two digits add leading zeros Example Enter 10 234 1 125 as 010 234 001 125 To change a telephone back to its default setting enter 255 for each octet of the IP address To clear all configured settings and return to factory defaults select menu item O EEPROM default m Press the key to commit your address change 154 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS Table 20 Business and Basic Telephone LUI Menu Items continued Menu Option Description 6 VCX Config Menu Alt Dnid Servr Lets y
177. e the online help provided with the application You can control how CDRs are displayed a Use the Display tab in the Preferences dialog box from the View menu select Preferences to specify whether to display all records or a subset of records a Use the Column Selection option from the View menu select Column Selection to specify which fields should be displayed for each CDR a Use the Grids menu option to customize how rows and columns are displayed You can rearrange the sequence of columns sort the data by column and filter the displayed data for example show only CDRs generated on a specific date You can then create a grid for each customized display You can use the Purge Old Records option from the Data menu select Purge Old Records to remove CDRs locally records are not removed from the VCX server you can use the Reports option to generate reports based on one of the supplied formats or create customized reports Changing Configuration Preferences You can use the Preferences dialog box to change VCX server access information such as server IP address You can also use this dialog box to set CDR retrieval options and or CDR display options 1 Select VCX in the Data selection pane 2 From the View menu select Preferences 3 In the Preferences dialog box select the Server tab 4 Enter the required information using Table 36 as a guide 340 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING THE CALL REPORTS APPLICATION
178. e to Manually Configure d Press the button under the Feature tab To access the LUI utility when the Manager s Telephone is connected to the network a Press the button under the Feature tab b Use the Down button to scroll to the User Configurations menu option c Select User Configurations and press the button under the Select tab The telephone Display Panel shows the LUI utility See LUI Configuration Options for the Manager s Telephone for a description of the configuration menu options See Manager s Telephone Interface for a description of the buttons you use to enter configuration information on a Model 3103 telephone Button operation location and menu options are similar for the Model 3102 Business Telephone the Model 3101 or 3101SP Basic Telephones the Model 2102 and 2102 IR Business Telephones and the Model 2101 Basic Telephone Topics in this section describe each telephone model Model 3102 Business Telephone LUI Controls Figure 46 shows the LUI controls on the Model 3102 Business Telephone Table 20 describes each LUI utility menu item 148 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS Figure 46 Local User Interface Controls on the 3Com 3102 Business Telephone 5 Fe OOOOQO00000 1 3com Test Menu Sero MEER PETON ed e amp O TOORE O00009 vk o O83 00o 0900 GOGO K Je U 4 1 Display Panel Shows LUI utility menu options
179. e used by the VCX call processor to route calls to the correct destination For example in a multi site VCX system you can create a dial rule for each region that includes a site prefix You then create a pattern based on the site prefix and create a route plan that associates the pattern with a route to a specific call processor See Route Plan Configuration Requirements for more information gt Adding Patterns 1 Configuring Patterns USERS 261 You can use the VCX Administrator application to manage patterns on either the USERS interface or the DIRECTORY interface This section describes how to configure patterns through the USERS interface see Configuring Patterns DIRECTORY A pattern configured through the USERS interface also appears on the DIRECTORY interface To add a pattern From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add a pattern see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Patterns The Patterns page appears See Figure 98 CAUTION Most of the patterns shown in Figure 98 are provided by VCX software including patterns for the emergency numbers 911 and 9911 If your country does not use 911 emergency dialing you must ensure that a dial pattern and dial plan exist for
180. ed in Configuring Routes on a Branch Office a Ria identifies the primary call processor in region 1 a R1b identifies the secondary call processor in region 1 a R2a identifies the primary call processor in region 2 a R2b identifies the secondary call processor in region 2 Route Configuration to a Gateway Route Plan Configuration Requirements 281 a B1R1 identifies one branch call processor hosted by region 1 To configure a route from a regional office to a branch office Access the server you want to manage in this case R1a see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears 2 Click DIRECTORY 3 Add an end point of the type Call Processor that points to B1R1 For instructions on adding an end point see Adding End Points Create one route BrRoute1 includes the end point B1R1 For instructions on adding routes see Adding Routes Create a pattern that identifies calls to the branch office A pattern is a dial string prefix that indicates the call destination is the branch office A prefix is created as a dial rule and added to the dial plan in effect for users at the branch For example if the branch prefix is 8 you would create the pattern 8 For instructions on adding a pattern see Adding Patterns For information on dial rules and plans seeConfiguring Dial Rules and Configuring Dial Plans Configure a route plan to associate a pattern and a
181. egion 1 a IPM1b identifies the secondary IP Messaging server in region 1 B1R1 identifies a branch office region 1 To configure IP Messaging routes 1 Access the server you want to manage in this case B1R1 see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears 2 Click DIRECTORY 3 Create two end points a Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to IPM1a b Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to IPM1b For instructions on adding an end point see Adding End Points 4 Create one route IPMRoute1 includes the end points created for IPM1a and IPM1b For instructions on adding routes see Adding Routes 5 Create a pattern for user access to voicemail and MOH The access numbers for voicemail and MOH are configured by the IP Messaging system administrator and are specified when you add a phone for a user see Managing Phone Extensions For example if the voicemail access number is 5000 and MOH access number is 5001 you would create the pattern 5 Note that you must also configure a dial rule for these access numbers and add the rule to the dial plan in effect for branch users For instructions on adding a pattern see Adding Patterns For information on dial rules and plans see Configuring Dial Rules and Configuring Dial Plans 6 Configure a route plan to associate a pattern and a route In this example you would create one route plan t
182. egion to branch 280 on a branch office 278 to a gateway 281 to Music On Hold service 283 to voicemail service 283 route plan 304 adding 305 deleting 313 wizard 308 route plan configuration multiple site 275 requirements 271 single site 272 routes adding outdial patterns for 302 configuring 271 297 deleting 299 deleting outdial patterns 303 editing 299 managing 297 updating priorities 301 S searching for groups 249 for users 60 for users through global directory 50 secondary servers 18 selective ringing 117 and MWI 120 configuring 117 session timer web 35 silent monitoring configuring 169 removing an assigned extension 170 single site configuration options 19 route plan configuration 272 SIP 21 SIP phone downloader service 17 site names modifying 37 software version number 152 157 speed dials personal 167 system 188 system speed dials 188 adding 189 deleting 192 modifying 191 T telephone Model 2101 151 Model 2102 150 Model 3101 149 Model 3102 148 Model 3103 155 S 349 See also phones testing telephone buttons 154 telephone LEDs 154 trunk to trunk call transfers 68 type of service adding 74 configuring 73 deleting 78 editing features 79 managing 73 U uninstalling Call Report application 342 user interface using 34 users adding 56 adding address information 59 assigning phone extensions 102 cloning 63 deleting 56 63 editing 63 finding 60 sea
183. em includes two redundant IP Telephony and IP Messaging VCX servers A and B A is the primary server B is the secondary server Note that the following steps reference other topics in this chapter that describe how to configure a route plan and its elements end points patterns and routes You can also use the Route Plan Wizard to create a route plan and its elements See Using the Route Plan Wizard The following steps configure the required routes on VCX server A Access the server you want to manage see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears 2 Click DIRECTORY 3 Create four end points a Add an end point of the type Call Processor that points to A b Add an end point of the type Call Processor that points to B 274 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES c Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to the IP Messaging module running on A d Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to the IP Messaging module running on B For instructions on adding an end point see Adding End Points 4 Create two routes a Route includes the Call Processor end points created for A and B b Route2 includes the Gateway end points created for the IP Messaging modules running on A and B For instructions on adding routes see Adding Routes 5 Create a pattern for each route A pattern is a dial string prefix that indicates which
184. eman Phones Address Clone Delete Viewing All Users Accessing User Options 55 By default the USERS interface displays the Users page which lists the currently configured users See Viewing All Users for a description of the Users page The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side These options allow you to a Manage user profiles configure a Class of Service and configure a Type of Service These topics are described in this chapter Manage telephone profiles and extensions configure an attendant console and configure emergency services See Chapter 4 a Manage phone features for example call forwarding for a user See Chapter 6 a Manage global phone features for example system speed dial numbers See Chapter 7 a Manage calling groups for example hunt groups See Chapter 8 a Manage dialing patterns plans rules and number translation See Chapter 9 See Using the Graphical User Interface for information on interface options The Users page Figure 11 appears by default when you access the USERS interface You can use this page to view information for all currently configured users on the server You can also use this page to edit an existing user profile delete a user profile and manage the telephone information for a user To access the Users page from any page in the USERS interface click the Users menu option on the left side of the page Each row on the Users page c
185. en you add a phone for a user see Managing Phone Extensions By using different voicemail and MOH access numbers for the IP Messaging servers and for each of the IP Messaging clients you can specify whether a user accesses voicemail on the server or on a client For example you could create the following patterns for voicemail and MOH access numbers in the example IP Messaging client server system 5 Used for a voicemail access number of 5000 and MOH access number of 5001 for the IP Messaging server 6 Used for a voicemail access number of 6000 and MOH access number of 6001 for the first IP Messaging client 7 Used for a voicemail access number of 7000 and MOH access number of 7001 for the second IP Messaging client 8 Used for a voicemail access number of 8000 and MOH access number of 8001 for the third IP Messaging client 9 Used for a voicemail access number of 9000 and MOH access number of 9001 for the fourth IP Messaging client Note that you must also configure a dial rule for these access numbers and add the rule to the dial plan in effect for server and client users For instructions on adding a pattern see Adding Patterns For information on dial rules and plans see Configuring Dial Rules and Configuring Dial Plans 290 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES 6 Configure a route plan to associate a pattern and a route In this example you would create five route plans I
186. end point entry you want to delete To delete multiple end points enter a check mark in the check box preceding each end point you want to delete then click Delete Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the delete action Click OK The End Points page refreshes and the deleted end point or end points is not listed You can assign one or more OutDial patterns to an end point The OutDial pattern determines how an outbound destination number is modified You must create an OutDial pattern before you can assign it to an end point See Adding OutDial Patterns To add an OutDial pattern to an end point From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add an OutDial pattern see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears Click DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY interface page appears See Figure 103 Click End Points The End Points page appears See Figure 104 In the Actions column for an end point click OutDial Patterns The End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns page appears See Figure 106 Figure 106 End Point Assigned OutDlal Patterns Page End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns End Point CallP Primary R2a No Results Found Assign OutDial Patterns OutDial Pattern a Translation String 296 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES 5 Click Assign OutDial Patterns The End Point
187. endant a To remove a single group member enable the check box preceding the user extension and click Unassign in the Actions column a To remove multiple group members enable the check box preceding each user extension and click Unassign Selected A confirmation box appears verifying you really want to remove these members from the hunt group Click OK This section describes how to remove remote users from a hunt group or attendant These users have extensions on a regional or branch office not the site hosting the group To remove local users see Removing Local User Extensions from a Hunt Group or Attendant Removing remote users from a hunt group or attendant is a two step process On the site hosting the group unassign the phone extension of the remote group member On the site hosting the user extension remove the extension from the remote group To unassign a remote user extension from a hunt group or attendant From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which the group is configured see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears See Figure 83 Locate the row containing the group you want to configure and click Phones in the Actions column The H
188. ensions 51 100 click the 57 700 button c Click Save The Attendant Console page refreshes and the extension mappings are configured To immediately implement feature button changes or extension mappings power cycle the attendant console Otherwise changes are implemented at the end of the current Subscription Interval see Table 19 To edit a telephone feature button on an attendant console In the USERS menu click Attendant Console The Attendant Consoles page appears In the Actions column click Feature Mappings for the attendant console whose feature button mappings you want to edit The Attendant Console page appears Reassign a function to the appropriate feature button 1 through 4 4 Click Save The Attendant Consoles page refreshes To immediately implement feature button changes power cycle the attendant console Otherwise changes are implemented at the end of the current Subscription Interval see Table 19 To edit the extensions for a attendant console In the USERS menu click Attendant Console The Attendant Consoles page appears In the Actions column click Extension Mappings for the attendant console you want to edit The Attendant Console page appears Add delete or modify telephone extensions as necessary 4 Click Save 128 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Editing Attendant Console Basic Information The Attendant Console page refreshes and the teleph
189. ensions in any office The Global Directory is described in this chapter see The Global Directory You access the Central Manager through a web browser by entering an IP address in the browser s address bar The IP address required identifies the server hosting the Authentication and Directory service see VCX_ Software Components for information on VCX services For single site VCX systems enter the IP address of the primary call processor Once you log in see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager the Central Manager displays links that allow you to launch either VCX Administrator provisioning application and the IP Messaging Administrator provisioning application for the selected site For multi site VCX systems enter the IP address of the regional server running the Authentication and Directory service In a multi site system the Authentication and Directory service can run on one of the following VCX servers a IP Telephony and IP Messaging Server a IP Telephony Server a Authentication and Directory Server Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager 29 You can determine the IP address of the server hosting the Authentication and Directory service or any VCX service by logging in to the VCX primary call processor using the root account and entering the following commana vex config services show Once you log in see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager the Central Manager displa
190. ent you want to edit or delete The Element Patterns page appears See Figure 20 a To delete a pattern click Delete in the Action column Configuring Type of Service 73 To add anew pattern Enter a pattern in the Enter pattern value you want to add to element field and click Add Or Select a pattern from the drop down list and click Add 3 The Element Patterns page refreshes showing the current list of patterns Configuring Type of Service gt for the element When you create a phone extension you assign the extension to a phone profile see Managing Phone Extensions A phone profile includes a set of common phone attributes including a Type of Service ToS A Type of Service ToS determines what phone features are available to a user A ToS is comprised of a set of phone features For example these features include options that allow you or the user to configure call forwarding or personal speed dialing A ToS allows you to bundle common phone feature configurations into one Type of Service and assign that ToS to a phone profile This allows you to configure default phone settings for a range of extensions Each ToS also includes a default button mapping template for the 3Com Business telephones Models 3102 and 2102 and Manager s telephone Model 3103 Each template specifies a set of default features mapped to configurable buttons on each phone model You can modify the existing templates or create you
191. entify this speed dial entry The field accepts a maximum of 5 numeric characters The value you enter is the index number associated with the speed dial number The index number is used when mapping a telephone button to a system speed dial number or when a user enters the speed dial feature code 700 190 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES 5 In the First Name field enter the first name of the user associated with this system speed dial entry The field accepts a maximum of 64 characters This field is optional In the Last Name field enter the last name of the user associated with this system speed dial entry If the system speed dial entry is for an organization or department enter the name in this field and leave the First Name field blank The field accepts a maximum of 64 characters In the Phone Address field enter the complete telephone number of the user associated with this system speed dial entry The field accepts a maximum of 32 numeric characters a For all VCX users local or remote enter the full extension number a For external users enter all required digits for example the number required to access an outside line and the area code Click Save The System Speed Dials page appears showing current and new entries See Figure 61 The list is limited to 12 entries by default to change the default see Using the Graphical User Interface You can navigate to a different page by pressing
192. er 33 Groups Call Pickup Groups Attendant Console and Media Access Control DIRECTORY Enables you to configure communication services for example manage routes and end points See Chapter 10 The DIRECTORY main menu option is available with the following application access roles a The admin role allows access to all menu options a The dir role allows access to all menu options SEARCH Enables you to locate a user a hunt group page group or call pickup group See Using the Users Search Tool or Using the Group Search Tool This option is available to all application access roles except dir PREFERENCES Enables you to specify how many entries are listed on the VCX provisioning page If a page has more entries than a single page can display the page includes Next and Previous buttons see Using the Graphical User Interface This option is available to all application access roles MAIN Enables you to return to the Central Manager page This option is available to all application access roles LOG OUT Enables you to end your session and return to the Central Manager login page This option is available to all application access roles By default an inactive web session times out after 30 minutes which forces the user end user or administrator to log in again You can change the web session timeout value to extend or shorten the time allowed for inactive web sessions See Modifying the Web Ses
193. er interface for managing authentication and directory data Call Records Service Stores CDRs received from the Accounting Service Sometimes referred to as the Billing Server a IP Messaging Module Provides integrated voice messaging fax and e mail capabilities and advanced messaging features such as Find Me Follow Me call routing and text to speech e mail reading Also supports Global Voicemail Integration which links regional and branch office IP Messaging servers through a universal mailbox directory on a special IP Messaging server called the Global Voicemail Central Server GVCS These components can be installed in various configurations as shown in Table 3 18 CHAPTER 1 VCX SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW Table 3 VCX Software Configuration Options Standard Software Configurations IP Telephony Authentication Global and IP IP and Call VM Software IP Messaging Call Telephony Messaging Directory Records Central Service Server Server Server Server Server Server Server Call Processor Yes Yes Yes SIP Downloader Yes Yes Yes Authentication Yes Yes Yes and Directory Services Accounting Yes Yes Yes Services Provisioning Yes Yes Yes Services Common Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Agent IP Messaging Yes Yes Yes Services Call Records Yes Yes Yes Services Depending on the hardware configuration some services are typically installed in redundant pairs For example the Call Processor Se
194. erences so that the cache is updated whenever you modify or view a new web page 162 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER Configuring Phone Features Some features available for a telephone are determined by the Type of Service ToS enabled for the phone see Configuring Type of Service Other features are provided by default Many features however require configuration For example the Call Forward Busy feature must be configured with the extension to which calls will be forwarded when the phone user is on another call Phone feature configuration can be performed by you the administrator or by the phone user using the TUI or VCX User web interface This chapter describes administrator configuration of phone features To see the features available on a phone Access the office location of the user whose phone features you want to configure see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window The procedure describes how to configure features for a phone extension that has been assigned to a user You can also configure features for a phone extension that has not been assigned to a user To do this select Phones instead of Users 2 Locate the user whose phone features you want to configure 3 In the Phones colum
195. ers are activated on the phones of other members of this Page Group The value must be unique duplicate Group Address values are not allowed In the Multicast IP Address field enter a multicast IP address VCX can use to broadcast the audio to page group members The valid range for multicast IP addresses is 224 2 0 0 through 224 2 255 255 Page groups can use the same multicast address if the groups use different port numbers 216 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS gt Adding Members to a Page Group 1 If the phones in the page group are connected to a switch or if a page for the group will cross multiple subnets multicast communication must be enabled on each switch In the Port Number enter a multicast port number the VCX system can use to broadcast the audio to page group members The valid range includes the even numbers from 8000 through 9000 inclusive Click Save The Page Groups page appears and lists the Page Group you just created See Figure 74 Figure 74 Page Group Added Page Groups Found 1 Page Group s Add Page Group Delete Selected i Group Name a Group Address Multicast IP Address Port Number Actions O Sales 641006 224 2 2 2 8004 Phones Delete Prev Page of1 Next To modify an existing group click on the appropriate name in the Group Name column You can create a maximum of 100 Page Groups for each site The maximum number of members in a group is 300 An extension can belong to 10
196. ers page appears Figure 30 2 Click Media Access Control The Media Access Controls page appears 3 Click Add MAC The Add Media Access Control page appears See Figure 40 Figure 40 Add Media Access Control Page Add Media Access Control MAC Information PhoneMAC Address 00 beo bes L Phone Address Locked Location Fields marked with an asterisk are required 4 Enter the required information using Table 18 as a guide Table 18 MAC Address field descriptions Field Heading Description Phone MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the phone The MAC address is typically printed on a label under a phone For example 00 e0 bb 13 48 5f NOTE 3Com products have a MAC address that start with 00 e0 bb Phone Address Enter the phone s extension This extension was configured when you added the phone and assigned it to a user See Managing Phone Extensions 122 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Editing a MAC Address 1 Deleting a MAC Address 1 Table 18 MAC Address field descriptions continued Field Heading Description Locked Indicates whether or not the extension is locked to this telephone Checked The user cannot change the extension assigned to this telephone or access any of the Advanced Settings configuration options available through the Telephone User Interface TUI Unchecked The user can change the extension
197. es assigned to the hunt group m The ring tone can be specified in the phone profile to which the hunt group extension is assigned see Creating a Phone Profile m The ring tone can be specified for each extension assigned to the hunt group see Configuring Selective Ringing A ring tone specified for a hunt group member extension overrides the ring tone configured in phone profile This section describes how to add remote users to a hunt group or attendant These users have extensions on a regional or branch office not the site hosting the group To add local users to a group see Adding Local User Extensions to a Hunt Group or Attendant Adding remote users to a hunt group or attendant is a two step process On the site hosting the group add the phone extensions of the remote users to the group Each hunt group or attendant group can support a maximum of 75 members On the site hosting the user extensions add the extension to the remote group The maximum numbers of groups to which an extension can be a member is 25 see Configuring the Message Waiting Indicator for Hunt Group Members for additional information Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 239 To add a remote user extension to a hunt group or attendant From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which the group is configured see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears Th
198. es in the system nor will this extension appear in the Phone Book see Viewing the Phone Book Phone Profile Select the phone profile you want to associate with the phone extension If you are creating multiple phone extensions all the extensions are associated with the selected profile If you are creating phone extensions for a branch office specify the phone profile associated with the branch office Click Save The Phones page appears listing the new phone After creating one or more phone extensions you assign them to users one at a time See Assigning a Phone Extension to a User This section describes how to modify the settings assigned to a phone extension To modify phone extension settings Access the Phones page see Accessing the Phones Page Click the phone extension you want to modify in the Phone Address column You can use the column headings to sort the listed phone extensions For example you can sort the extensions according to the profile assigned to a phone by clicking the Phone Profile column heading You can also search for a particular extension user name or phone profile by selecting a search option in the Filter drop down list Then enter the appropriate search criteria in the Filter text box and click Go The Edit Phone page appears See Figure 29 Managing Phone Extensions 101 Figure 29 Edit Phone Page Edit Phone Phone Information Phone Extension 641000
199. essage box that asks you to confirm the delete action Configuring Camp On Parameters This section describes how to configure Camp On parameters The configured parameter values apply to all Types of Service that include the Camp On feature see Configuring Type of Service Camp On allows a user who places a call to a busy or an unanswered internal telephone to be called back when the called telephone becomes available When a user activates Camp On the system monitors the called telephone When the called telephone becomes available the system automatically rings the calling party and redials the call Camp On can be invoked in either of the following calling conditions a Call Transfer Allows a user to invoke Camp On while transferring a call to another extension The calling party waits on hold until the transfer destination becomes available a New Call Allows a user to invoke Camp On if the called party does not answer The user enables Camp On and specifies the called party s Configuring Camp On Parameters 193 extension The user can then hang up or place another call When the called party becomes available the system automatically calls the user and then the called party s extension The two Camp On parameters that you can configure apply to the two types of Camp On calls Camp On Return Interval Determines how long a transferred caller waits on hold If the Camp On Return Interval elapses before the t
200. essor on which the phone extension is configured is referred to as the home call processor The processor to which the phone is connected is referred to as the foreign call processor Although the phone has been assigned an extension configured on the remote home processor a branch office for example the phone retains the IP address that was assigned when the phone booted at the foreign call processor a regional office for example An ELIN see the previous section is associated with a range of phone IP addresses Note the following implications for emergency calls made by a roaming user m If aroaming user makes an emergency call using a dialing pattern that matches an emergency number configured for the foreign site the foreign call processor intercepts the call and routes it locally a If aroaming user makes an emergency call using the dialing pattern for his or her home site and that pattern does not match the pattern configured on the foreign call processor the emergency call is routed using the home site configuration As a result the user may be sent to an emergency response center that cannot support the location that originated the call m For enhanced emergency services to work for all roaming situations the home site for example a branch office and its backup site for example the regional office to which the branch is connected must have IP address range based ERLs defined for the phones at each site In this case
201. esumes numbering You cannot however exceed the 10 digit maximum for an extension For example if you try to create 10 phone extensions but specify a starting extension of 9999999995 VCX software will create 5 extensions only 9999999995 through 9999999999 Name Specifies the name to be displayed on the phone LCD Display Panel If you are creating multiple phone extensions enter a generic name such as New User Phone Password Specifies the password for the phone This is the password the user enters to log on to a telephone and is used for phone registration The password is automatically generated and by default is 12345 If you are creating a single phone extension you can enter a different password Note The first digit of the password cannot be zero 0 The minimum password length is 4 digits the maximum password length is 9 digits Confirm Password Reenter the password for the phone or accept the default system generated password 100 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Modifying a Phone Extension Table 13 Add Phone Page Field Descriptions continued Field Description Location Specifies the value shown when a user lists phones in the LCD directory You can provide specific information you want listed such as geographic location or building name Exclude from Phone Book When checked this extension will not be listed in the LCD display panel of other phon
202. etween the primary and secondary servers ensures that the routing information gets propagated to both servers in the redundant pair Configure any other required routes to gateways by repeating steps 1 through 6 Whether you need to configure gateway routes on the other regional servers depends on how you have configured those servers relative to Ria a If you have configured R1a to have all of the routing information for the other regional servers and therefore servers R2a and R3a have routes that include the end point R1a defined as type Redirect Call Processor you do not need to configure a route to the gateway on R2a and R3a a If you have configured R1a R2a and R3a as equals and therefore each region includes redundant routes to every other region with the end points defined as type Call Processor you need to repeat steps 2 through 6 on R2a and R3a If your VCX system uses the IP Messaging system you need to configure routes to identify the voicemail and Music On Hold MOK services In a multi site system there are three options for configuring routes to provide user access to IP Messaging voicemail and MOH services The options you select depend on whether your multi site system includes branch offices and if it does where the IP Messaging system is located a When a multi site system does not include branch offices IP Messaging services are installed on the redundant VCX servers in each the regional system a W
203. eways in your system See Route Plan Configuration Requirements The steps in Table 4 are required to set up a VCX system with basic services There are many other configuration options described in this guide For example you can also enable the following features on your VCX system For multi site systems configure the Global Directory to enable users to see the names and extensions of users at other sites Configure an Attendant Console VCX Model 3105 Configure features such as call forwarding silent monitoring hunt groups call park extensions call bridging and system speed dial numbers Configure the Call Reports PC based application to view Call Detail Records CDRs collected by the VCX Accounting service Refer to the VCX Maintenance Guide for the following VCX system maintenance tasks Accounting and Call Records services configuration Database maintenance including backup and restore and multi master replication configuration VCX Server management and reconfiguration VCX configuration backup and restore Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS management Bulk user creation through the command line interface VCX software upgrade and downgrade procedures 24 CHAPTER 1 VCX SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW About VCX Administrator Passwords Access to the VCX Administrator Provisioning application through a web browser requires logging in using the appropriate username and password The application include
204. f the following options a Click Assign Phones This option displays the Bridge Permissions Unassigned Phones page which allows you to select a secondary phone located on same call processor as the primary phone a Click Assign External Phones This option displays the Bridge Permissions Unassigned External Phones page which allows you to select a secondary phone located on a different call processor Configuring Bridge Permissions 183 than the primary phone Note that external in this case does not mean a phone extension external to the VCX network for example the PSTN 6 Check the box preceding the phone extensions you want to designate as gt secondary phones You are granting permission for these phones to answer calls to the primary phone You can select a maximum of four secondary phones The bridged phone can identify up to four phone numbers to bridge with but the number of extensions it can actually bridge is determined by the maximum number of contacts that set up for the phone which may be less than four The Maximum Number Contacts value is specified when you configure a phone for a user on the Add Phone page see Figure 28 Optionally you can enable MWI Message Waiting Indicator on the secondary phone by entering a check mark in the MWI column When checked the following features are enabled on the secondary phone a The MWI light on the secondary phone will light when a caller leaves a messa
205. ffice Log on to the primary VCX server in Boston using the cworks account and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata globaldir bin config sh At the prompt enter 101 The Enter the Primary ROSCA IP Address or Hostname prompt appears Enter the hostname or IP address of the primary server at the remote regional office in this example the Chicago office whose user directory you want to add The Enter the Secondary ROSCA IP Address or Hostname prompt appears Enter the hostname or IP address of the secondary server at the remote regional office in this example the Chicago office The Enter an Username for both Primary amp Secondary ROCSA s prompt appears Enter the username for the cworks account The default is cworks but may be changed during installation The Enter Password prompt appears Enter the password for the cworks account after the asterisks The default is cworks but may be changed during installation Press Enter The Re type Password prompt appears Reenter the password for the cworks account after the asterisks The Enter the Global Directory Input Path at ROCSA opt 3com VCX vcxdata db export prompt appears which lists the default path to the location of the regional user directory common file Press Enter 3Com does not recommend changing this default directory path Press Enter to return to the main menu The Boston global directory information will be updated with the
206. figuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY 328 10 11 Understanding Translation Algorithms 328 Adding a Number Translation Pattern 329 Editing Number Translation Patterns 332 Deleting Number Translations 333 CONFIGURING THE CALL REPORTS APPLICATION Call Detail Records Overview 336 Accessing the Call Reports Application 337 Downloading CDR Data 338 Retrieving VCX CDRs Manually 338 Retrieving VCX CDRs Automatically 338 Managing the CDR Display and Generating Reports 339 Changing Configuration Preferences 339 Uninstalling the Call Reports Application 342 INDEX ABOUT THIS GUIDE This guide describes how to configure 3Com VCX IP Telephony Solution software VCX software runs on either the 3Com V6000 or 3Com V7000 server platforms This guide describes how to configure and maintain the following VCX IP Telephony Solution components a VCX IP Telephony Solution server software m 3Com Telephones and Attendant Console a VCX CDR Reporting Application software This guide is for operators and administrators of the system and assumes the reader has a thorough understanding of telecommunications VoIP technology and network and system administration operation Release notes are issued with some products If the information in the release notes differs from the information in this guide follow the instructions in the release notes 12 ABOUT THIS GUIDE Conventions Table 1 and Table 2 Table 1 Notice Icon
207. file correct profile errors or update settings for a group of phones in one step When you change a phone profile all profile settings not just the changed settings are reset on all phones associated with that profile If a user has changed one or more personal settings for example ring tones the reapplied profile overrides any personal settings If this is a concern you should warn users that their personal phone settings may be affected by the profile change To edit a phone profile 1 In the USERS menu click Phone Profiles The Phone Profiles page appears listing all current profiles See Figure 25 Figure 25 Phone Profile Page Phone Profiles Found 2 Phone Profile s Add Phone Profile Delete Selected iter I M E a Name Actions Default Membership Clone Oo Engineering Membership Clone Delete Prev Page of1 Next Record marked with is a Default Phone Profile 2 Click the name of the phone profile you want to modify The Edit Phone Profile page appears see Figure 24 If the profile does not appear on the first Phone Profiles page you can search for it Enter the first few letters of the profile name in the Filter text box and click Go You can also reverse the sort order of profile names by clicking the Name column heading 3 Edit the fields as required using Table 12 as a guide 92 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Viewing Phone Profile Member Phones Deleting a Phone
208. for the ERL you want to configure The Emergency Gateway IP Addresses page appears Enter a check mark in the check box preceding the emergency gateway IP address you want to delete Click Delete Selected A pop up window appears prompting you to confirm the emergency gateway IP address delete action Click OK The Emergency Gateway IP Addresses page refreshes verifying the emergency gateway IP was deleted 140 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Editing Emergency Lines for an ERL A To edit an Emergency Line for the ERL CAUTION If Emergency service settings or emergency lines are changed for example the gateway IP address or emergency digits they will not take effect until the telephones are power cycled A simple logout login of the telephone is not adequate enough CAUTION Ensure that the emergency line you want to modify is not in use The Usage State field on the Emergency Line ID Numbers page must be Not in use In the USERS menu click Emergency Services The Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services page appears From the Location Settings column click Emergency Lines for the ERL you want to configure The Emergency Line ID Numbers page appears In the ELIN column click the ELIN you want to edit The Edit Emergency Line ID Number page appears In the ELIN field type the Emergency Location Identification Number 5 In the Association Release Timer field enter the amount of ti
209. g host regional office 43 provisioning through Central Manager 29 route configuration for global IP Messaging 285 for local IP Messaging 287 bridge mappings adding an extension 185 bridge permissions adding an extension 182 removing an assigned extension 184 344 INDEX bridged lines 117 business telephones accessing the LUI 145 busy lamp flash 129 buttons telephone mapping features to 194 testing 154 C calendar bands adding 325 deleting 327 editing 327 managing 325 call coverage 170 and call fallback 90 default 171 for attendants 227 for hunt groups 227 for phones 170 types 170 call coverage rule adding for groups 230 adding for phones 173 deleting 180 editing 178 types 173 Call Detail Record see CDR call fallback 90 call forward busy 76 ring no answer 76 universal 76 call history phones 115 Call Hold attendant console button 123 call identity suppression 77 Call Park attendant console button 123 call park configuring 206 managing 206 call pickup 210 call processor specifying the MAC address from a telephone 157 viewing the MAC address from a telephone 152 Call Processor service 16 Call Records service 17 Call Reports application 336 accessing 337 CDR sources 336 changing servers 339 introduction 336 logging in 337 uninstalling 342 viewing CDRs 336 call restrictions 112 adding 113 deleting 115 viewing 115 Call Transfer attendant console button 123 caller id 77 calling features call for
210. g information a Voice Mail Number Identifies the extension dialed by the call processor to access the IP Messaging voicemail system a Announcement Number Identifies the recording a caller hears before the call is answered for example Your call is important to us Please hold for the next available agent a Music On Hold Number Identifies the extension dialed by the call processor to play a MOH recording when a caller is put on hold When a caller dials a group or attendant number the call processor connects the call redirects the caller to the announcement number and hunts for the next available agent If no announcement number is configured the call processor redirects the caller to MOH and hunts for the next available agent If neither an announcement number or MOH number is configured the caller hears ringing while the call processor hunts for the next available agent You can add users at remote sites for example a branch office to a hunt group or attendant configured on another site for example a regional office To enable a group member at a branch office to access the group s voice mailbox or hear MOH or announcements which is configured on the regional office you must create a route plan on the branch that identifies the IP Messaging server running at the regional office See Configuring Routes for Global IP Messaging on a Branch Office If a hunt group contains fax machines the hunt group c
211. g is not supported on Basic phones Models 2101 or 3107 To map a primary extension to a button on a secondary phone Access the office location of the user whose phone you want to configure as a secondary phone see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Locate the user assigned to the phone you want to designate as the secondary the phone that will receive calls to the primary phone Alternatively you can click Phones in the USERS interface menu and go to step 4 In the Phones column click the Phones link for the secondary phone The User Assigned Phones page appears for the selected user See Figure 51 In the Actions column click Button Mappings The Button Mappings page appears In the Select the phone type drop down list box select the phone model used by the secondary phone Click Select A graphic appears showing the button mappings for the selected phone Click the Feature Type drop down list for the button you want to map and select Bridged Line 8 In the Number Index field enter the extension of the primary phone 9 Click Save 186 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER gt The Buttons Mappings page refreshes For the bridged line settings to take effect the secondary phone
212. g parameter see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears Click DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY interface page appears See Figure 103 Click Holidays The Holidays page appears See Figure 125 Managing Holidays 319 Figure 125 Holidays page Holidays Found 1 Holiday s Add Holiday j Delete Selected Fiter E F Name Month Oo New Years Day January Prev Page i iv of1 Next 4 Click Add Holiday The Add Holiday page appear See Figure 126 Figure 126 Add Holiday Page Add Holiday Holiday Information Name Month January Day 1 v J Fields marked with an asterisk are required Note Time Day Date configuration is applied according to GMT 5 Enter the following field information a Name Enter the name of the holiday m Month From drop down list select the month in which the holiday occurs a Day From drop down list select the day on which the holiday occurs 6 Click Save The Holidays page appears listing the added holiday Editing Holidays To edit a holiday 1 Click Holidays The Holidays page appears See Figure 125 320 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Deleting Holidays 2 In the Name column click the name of the holiday you want to modify 1 The Edit Holiday page appears Modify the fields as required See the field descriptions in Addi
213. g the call processor or the gateway in the IP Address field f Click Add The new end point appears in the list of end points Go to step 4 To assign one or more end points for this route plan select an end point name in the Available list then click gt to move the selected end points to the Selected list To assign all the end points in the Available list click gt gt If the Selected list includes more than one end point you can specify end point priority by selecting the end point and clicking Up or Down End point priority determines the order of call processing within a route The end point with the highest priority one 1 is the highest processes all calls If the end point with the highest priority is unavailable the end point with the next highest priority begins processing calls 312 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES 5 Click Next The third page of the Route Wizard appears See Figure 120 Figure 120 Route Plan Wizard Page 3 Directory Route Plan Creation Wizard Destination Detail End Point Route Plan Summary Route Plan Details Route Plan Name Test Dialed Number To Be routed 77 End Points Details End Point Name Type Site Id IP Address IP Port Priority TestEP Gateway 65 10 230 65 6 5060 1 TestEPbackup Gateway 65 10 230 65 8 5060 2 Save Changes The third page of the wizard summarizes the route plan configuration data entered on pages 1 and 2 If you want
214. ge at the primary phone and the display panel on the secondary phone shows the number of new and old messages in the voice mailboxes of both the secondary phone and the primary phone a Pressing the MSG button on the secondary phone lists both mailboxes and allows the secondary user to access the voice mailbox of the primary user Note that the secondary user can access the primary user s voice mailbox even if the primary user is logged off or the primary phone extension has been disabled Click Assign Selected A confirmation window appears Click OK to grant permission The Bridge Permissions Assigned Phones page appears listing the secondary phones See Figure 59 184 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER Figure 59 Bridge Permissions Assigned Phones Page Bridge Permissions Assigned Phones Phone 641004 Found 2 phone s Assign External Phones Assign Phones Save Selected Unassign Selected Cancel a Phone Address First Name a Last Name Site Name MW O 631002 Chris Bourget Regional Office 1 O Unassign O 641005 Ming Lee Regional Office 2 Unassign Prev Page1of1 Next You can modify the MWI status for a secondary phone on the Bridge Permissions Assigned Phones page Change the status in the MWI column for the appropriate phone and click Save Selected The preceding steps identified on the primary bridged phone the secondary phones that will be able to answer calls for the primary phone The next s
215. ging client a C3 identifies the third IP Messaging client a C4 identifies the fourth IP Messaging client To configure IP Messaging client routes 1 Access the server you want to manage in this case R1a see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears 2 Click DIRECTORY 3 Create the following end points a Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to IPM1a Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to IPM1b Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to C1 Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to C2 oa ao TF Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to C3 Route Plan Configuration Requirements 289 f Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to C4 For instructions on adding an end point see Adding End Points Create five routes IPMRoute1 includes the end points created for IPM1a and IPM1b IPMRoute2 includes the end point created for C1 IPMRoute3 includes the end point created for C2 IPMRoute4 includes the end point created for C3 IPMRoute5 includes the end point created for C4 For instructions on adding routes see Adding Routes Create a pattern for voicemail and MOH access numbers for the IP Messaging servers and for each of the IP Messaging clients The access numbers for voicemail and MOH are configured by the IP Messaging system administrator for each user These numbers are also specified wh
216. ging on the phone of a specific user To answer the call the user enables the Directed Pickup feature feature code 455 enters a security code and then enters the extension of the ringing phone This transfers the call to the user Group Call Pickup Allows a user to answer a call ringing on the phone of any user who is a member of a configured Call Pickup group A Call Pickup group is a collection of phones that allow each member of the group to answer another member s calls if The other member s telephone is ringing a The other member s telephone has a flashing call appearance light but the call itself is not ringing because the phone has been programmed with Ring Delay or No Ring options You can also configure a Call Pickup group to allow non group members to answer a call ringing on a phone in the group This section describes how to configure a Call Pickup group See Configuring Directed Call Pickup for information on configuring a Directed Call Pickup group Call Pickup group configuration is subject to the following limits a Each site can can support a maximum of 100 groups a Each group can support a maximum of 75 members a An extension can a member of a maximum of 100 groups To create a Call Pickup group From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to create the Call Pickup group see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Use
217. gs phone is allowed to dial See Configuring Dial Plans Note The default dial plan Internal includes default dial rules that may or may not meet your site requirements Other dial plans in the drop down list contain their own set of default dial rules 90 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Table 12 Add Phone Profile Field Descriptions continued Field Description Call Center Names Identifies all of the Call Centers the end user should be assigned to If there are multiple Call Centers for a user separate each Call Center with a comma Call Fallback When checked Call Fallback is enabled Call Fallback works with the call coverage setting configured for a phone If a phone forwards calls to another number and that number does not pick up the call the call is routed back to the coverage point of the original destination if that coverage point is voice mail The fallback option does not apply to other coverage points See Configuring Call Coverage for a Telephone For example phone A is configured to forward unanswered calls to phone B A call arrives at A is not answered and is forwarded to B B does not answer In this case the call falls back to A s call coverage point voice mail The Call Fallback and Create Mailbox fields are enabled by default so that unanswered calls will by default be forwarded to voicemail Create Mailbox When checked a voicemail mailbox i
218. gure see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears see Figure 78 Click the Call Coverage link in the Actions column for the appropriate hunt group The Coverage Rules page appears See Figure 79 This page displays the coverage rules in effect for the hunt group or attendant Initially the only coverage rule listed is the default call coverage point Click Add Coverage Rule The Add Coverage Rule page appears See Figure 82 234 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Figure 82 Add Coverage Rule Page Hunt Group Add Coverage Rule Coverage Rule Information Name Call Coverage Send to Voice Mail Send to Number Holiday Coverage Settings Date January JE i Event Coverage Settings StartTime 0 O StartDate January 1 2006 End Time 0 v 0 EndDate January 1 2006 AllDay o StatTime 0 0 Sunday C End Time 0 0 Monday All Day Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Save f Cancel ff Reset Fields marked with an asterisk are required 5 Enter a unique identifier for the rule in the Name field 6 Select a Call Co
219. gure 15 shows search criteria based on a last name containing a single letter L 62 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES Figure 15 Search for a User Search Users Search Information Phone Address First Name Last Name L Weblogin User Name Group Name Group Address Figure 16 shows the search results for the criteria shown in Figure 15 Figure 16 User Last Name Search Results Search Results Found 7 Record s Weblogin User Name GroupName GroupAddress GroupType Ballen Service Hunt Group Lima Service Hunt Group Lop ez Sales _ Page Group 641004 Maria Lopez Support 631010 Call Pickup Group 641005 i Lee Serice 641010 Hunt Group 641200 Kelly 1641203 Harry Schultz Payroll Call Pickup Group Several last names satisfied the search criteria Notice that the search results list all users whose last name includes the letter L uppercase or lowercase including members at remote sites indicated by an next to the phone address The results also show group membership One user Lopez is listed twice because she is a member of two groups Editing User Profiles Cloning User Profile Information Deleting User Profiles gt Configuring User Profiles 63 You can modify profile information for an existing user To edit a user profile
220. gure 65 shows the default button mappings for in the 3103 Default Template 196 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES Figure 65 3103 Default Template Button Mapping Edit Button Mappings Button Mappings Information Name 3103 Default Template Phone Type 3103 Manager Phone ock Feature Type NumberAndex Additional Argument Do Not Disturb Forward Universal Park Personal Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial WAIANAE aE o N Personal Speed Dial Bridged Extension 1 Bridged Extension 2 There are two default button mapping templates for each supported phone type For the Model 2102 Business telephone you can map 12 buttons 2102 Default Template Maps one of the 12 buttons to the Call Forward Universal CFU function a 2102 Default Template NO CFU Omits the CFU mapping and maps that button to the Feature function For the Model 3102 Business telephone you can map 18 buttons 3102 Default Template Maps one of the 18 buttons to the Call Forward Universal CFU function 3102 Default Template NO CFU Omits the CFU mapping and maps that button to the Feature function For the Model 3103 Manager s telephone you can map 8 buttons a 3103 Default Template Maps one of the 8 buttons to the
221. hat associates IPMRoute1 with the pattern 5 For instructions see Adding a Route Plan Route Plan Configuration Requirements 287 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the other branch offices that use global IP Messaging services Configuring Routes for Local IP Messaging on a Branch Office This example describes how to create IP Messaging routes on a branch office that uses local IP Messaging services The example uses the following branch system B1R1 identifies the call processor running on the branch in region 1 a IPMBria identifies the IP Messaging service running on the branch in region 1 To configure IP Messaging routes on the branch office 1 Access the server you want to manage in this case B1R1 see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears 2 Click DIRECTORY 3 Create one end point Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to IPMBr1a For instructions on adding an end point see Adding End Points 4 Create one route IPMRoute1 includes the end point created for IPMBr1a For instructions on adding routes see Adding Routes 5 Create a pattern for user access to voicemail and MOH The access numbers for voicemail and MOH are configured by the IP Messaging system administrator and are specified when you add a phone for a user see Managing Phone Extensions For example if the voicemail access number is 5000 and MOH access number is 5
222. he VCX call processor rings at one extension before moving to the next extension if there is no answer a Total Timeout Specifies how long the VCX call processor attempts to make a connection within the group before directing the call to the 220 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS group s call coverage point You can configure the call coverage point to be a A voice mailbox a Another group a An individual extension a An Auto Attendant number a An external phone number Each hunt group has a default call coverage point However you can also create a call coverage plan that specifies where unanswered calls should be redirected based on a specific date day of the week or time See Hunt Group and Attendant Call Coverage Options Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 221 Table 25 summarizes how the three group types route incoming calls Table 25 Hunt Group and Calling Group Behavior Linear Hunt Group Circular Hunt Group Calling Group Condition Result Result Result No members Go to call coverage Go to call coverage Go to call coverage All members logged out Go to call coverage Wait for a member to log in or until total timeout reached Go to call coverage All members busy Go to call coverage Wait for a member to become available or until total timeout reached Queue the call and wait for an available member or until total timeout reached All members available Route call to firs
223. he button or change the index assignment through the VCX User interface a f instep 5 you selected a feature that requires additional information to execute for example a telephone extension enter the information in the Number Index field a f instep 5 you selected a feature that requires additional information to execute you can enter the information in the Additional Arguments field 7 Click Save when you finish remapping buttons This section lists the features you can map to buttons when you create a button mapping template Table 22 shows the features you can map to buttons on the VCX Business Telephones Models 2102 and 3102 Table 22 Mappable Features for Model 2102 and 3102 Telephones Mapped by Number Index or Additional Feature User Arguments Anonymous Next Yes Anonymous All Yes Attendant Serial Call Yes Transfer destination number Barge In No Block Monitor No Bridged Line No Bridged extension number Multiple buttons must be mapped consecutively Busy Lamp Field No Destination number COS Override Yes User extension number User password Call Yes Destination number Call History Yes Camp On Yes Destination number Directed Pickup Yes Security code Destination number Do Not Disturb Yes CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES Table 22 Mappable Features for Model 2102 and 3102 Telephones continued
224. he prompt enter in minutes the frequency at which you want the data collection to occur You are returned to the main menu The user directory on the branch office will automatically collect information from its host region at the specified interval You can force a regional office to collect global directory database updates from its peer regional offices and its own database The updated global directory is not immediately visible on the regional office phones but it is visible on the branch office phones To make the updated global directory immediately available on the regional office phones see Manually Loading a Global Directory Database The following example resynchronizes the Boston global directory To manually resynchronize a regional office Log on to the primary VCX server in Boston using the cworks account and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata globaldir bin config sh At the prompt enter 106 The global directory on the Boston office resynchronizes immediately Press Enter You are returned to the main menu To make the updated global directory immediately available on the Boston regional office phones see Manually Loading a Global Directory Database You can load an updated global directory on a regional office so it is immediately visible on the regional office phones This option is generally used after an updated global directory has been manually resynchronized 46 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSI
225. hen a multi site system does include branch offices IP Messaging services can be provided globally or locally a When a multi site system with branch offices is configured for global messaging the branch offices include a call processor but 284 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES no IP Messaging services In this case voicemail and MOH services are provided to all branches by the regional server a When a multi site system with branch offices is configured for local messaging the branch offices are configured as IP Telephony and IP Messaging systems that include both a call processor and IP Messaging services In this case voicemail and MOH services are provided locally by each branch office In each of these systems you can implement IP Messaging in a client server configuration An IP Messaging server can support up to 20 IP Messaging clients One client can be dedicated to non voice applications such as Web provisioning e mail synchronization and logging The remaining clients can be dedicated to voice functions This type of setup improves the IP Messaging server performance The topics in this section describe how to configure each option Configuring Routes for IP Messaging on a Regional Office This example describes how to create IP Messaging routes on a regional office While branch users can use IP Messaging services located on either the branch office or its host region you must configure IP Messagi
226. his Group Call Pickup group to pickup member calls enable the check box a When the Global Pickup Allowed check box is enabled the Global Pickup Allowed column on the Call Pickup Groups page displays Yes a When the Global Pickup Allowed check box is disabled the Global Pickup Allowed column on the Call Pickup Groups page displays No 212 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Adding Members to a Call Pickup Group 7 Click Save 1 The Call Pickup Groups page appears and lists the Call Pickup group you just created See Figure 70 Figure 70 Call Pickup Group List Call Pickup Groups Found 2 Call Pickup Group s Add Call Pickup Group Delete Selected Fitter o Group Address Global Pickup Allowed Actions 641008 Phones Delete O sales 631010 No Phones Delete Prev Page Wa 1 Next To modify an existing group click on the appropriate name in the Group Name column You can create a maximum of 100 Call Pickup groups for each site To add members to a Call Pickup group On the Call Pickup Groups page Figure 70 click on the Phones link in the Actions column for appropriate group The Call Pickup Group Assigned Phones page appears and displays the phone number and name of each existing member if any See Figure 71 Figure 71 Call Pickup Group Assigned Phones Call Pickup Group Assigned Phones Call Pickup Group payroll No Results Found Assign Phones Phone Address a First Name Last Name
227. ick Save The Users page see Figure 11 appears listing the new user When you are finished adding users you can assign one or more telephones to each user See Managing Phone Extensions Adding User Address You can enter optional postal address information for a user Information To add or modify user address information 1 Access the USERS page as described in Accessing User Options The Users page appears listing all current users 2 Click Address in the Actions column for a user The Edit User Address page appears See Figure 13 60 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES Figure 13 Edit User Address Page Edit Address for Ming Lee Address Street 1 Street 2 City State Province ZIP Code 3 Enter user address information using Table 10 as a guide Table 10 Adding Address Information Field Description Example Street 1 Enter the first line of the user s 1234 University St street address Street 2 Enter the second line of address P O Box 5678 information Use this field for apartment unit numbers or P O Box numbers City Enter the user s city name Chicago State Enter the user s state or province IL Province name ZIP Code Enter the ZIP Code or Postal 12345 6789 Code 4 Click Save Using the Users You can search for users based on user information name or phone Search Tool extension You can also search for groups based on gro
228. ifying a User s Phone Settings Delete one or more phone extensions See Deleting a Phone Extension The other options in the Actions column Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Bridge Permissions and Bridged Phones are described in Chapter 6 This section describes how to add one or more phone extensions to your VCX system While you can run the VCX Administrator provisioning application on a branch site to add new telephone extensions 3Com Corporation recommends that you add all extensions on the regional site to avoid duplicating extension numbers 98 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES To add a one or more phone extensions 1 In the USERS menu click Phones The Phones page appears 2 Click Add Phone The Add Phone page appears See Figure 28 Figure 28 Add Phone Page Add Phone Phone Information Number of Phones to create 1 Starting Phone Extension Display Name Phone Password eeese Confirm Password eeeee Location Exclude from Phone Book Profile Information Phone Profile Default Nj Save f Cancel Jf Reset 3 Enter the required field information using Table 13 as a guide Table 13 Add Phone Page Field Descriptions Field Description Number of Phones to Create Enter the number of phone extensions you want to create The default is 1 extension The maximum value for this field is 2000 If y
229. igned Phones page appears for the selected user In the Actions column click Call Coverage Do one of the following To remove a single coverage rule click Delete in the Actions column a To remove a multiple coverage rules enable the check box preceding the name of each rule and click Delete Selected A confirmation box appears verifying you really want to remove these coverage rules from the hunt group Click OK Configuring Bridge Permissions This section describes how to configure bridge permissions on a phone The VCX system allows you to set up an extension so that other users can receive calls to that extension at their phones You can grant permission to up to four other users to receive calls intended for a bridged extension The bridged phone is sometimes referred to as the primary phone The phone receiving bridged calls is sometimes referred to as the secondary phone A secondary phone may be on the same site as the primary phone or in a multi site VCX system a secondary phone may be located on a remote site A bridged extension is typically used by an administrative assistant the secondary phone to accept calls for one or more managers primary phones Or one manager primary phone may be monitored by multiple assistants secondary phones 182 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER gt Adding Bridge Permission for an Extension 1 Bridge permissions can be configured by
230. information phone settings the language and font size used on the phone LCD and data the user needs to access the VCX User web interface Configuring User Profiles 12 Create one or more phone profiles A phone profile includes a set of attributes for example a dial plan and Class of Service that are common to all phones that use the profile Managing Phone Profiles VCX Configuration Tasks 23 Table 4 VCX Basic Configuration Steps continued Step Purpose Reference 13 Assign a phone to each user Phone assignment includes specifying the Managing Phone Extensions phone extension password voicemail and MOH access number TOS COS and dial plan 14 Configure each telephone through its Local User Interface LUI Programs the phone with an extension 3Com Telephone Configuration 1 Earlier releases of VCX software required you to configure route plans called URI route maps in previous releases that identified all call processing end points With VCX software version 7 1 this is no longer required Each call processor in a VCX single site or multi site system running version 7 1 will automatically be able to route calls to another call processor in the system using the Global Directory in multi site systems which you must configure see The Global Directory However you must still configure route plans that identify the IP Messaging servers and clients IP Conferencing servers and media gat
231. ing User Phone Extensions 105 m Remove an extension assigned to a user See Unassigning a Phone Extension a Delete a phone extension The Delete option on the User Assigned Phones page first unassigns the phone then removes the phone from the system See also Deleting a Phone Extension a Modify the MAC address associated with the phone extension if configured Click the link in the MAC column See Configuring Media Access Control a Prevent anonymous calls from reaching users Click Call Restrictions in the Actions column and see Adding Anonymous Call Restrictions a View phone registration information such as the IP address assigned to the phone Click Registrations in the Actions column and see Viewing Phone Registration Information a Prevent specific incoming and outgoing calls for a phone Click Call Restrictions in the Actions column and see Configuring Phone Restrictions a View the call history for a phone Click Call History and see Viewing Call History a Change the default ring tone for the phone for a hunt group or for a bridged line Click Selective Ringing and see Configuring Selective Ringing a View the hunt group or groups to which an extension is assigned Click Hunt Groups and see Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants a Override phone settings such as date and time format and ring tones configured by a user through the VCX User web interface Click Settings and see Modifying a U
232. ing domain the v7 1 upgrade procedure successfully substitutes the phone profile for the direct requestor in the v7 1 route map a f av7 0 source based route used a direct requestor that was not based on the default dialing domain the resulting source based route map will not work For example in VCX v7 0 you could configure a source based route that used the IP address of a call processor for the direct requestor However it is possible that no phones were configured to use this call processor as the default dialing domain In this case the v7 1 upgrade procedure will not create a phone profile and there will be no v7 1 substitute for the v7 0 direct requestor Even if the procedure does successfully create a phone profile the v7 1 route map may not contain the correct routing IP address information If you have source based routing configured in a VCX v7 0 system after the upgrade to v7 1 examine the route map configuration section see Editing a Route Plan to see if you need to modify or create a route map based on v7 1 configuration requirements Managing Phone Extensions You can create a single phone extension or you can create a range of extensions You can also modify phone extensions settings for example the profile assigned to a phone and delete phone extensions Phone extension management tasks are executed on the Phones page described in Accessing the Phones Page 96 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AN
233. ional Feature User Arguments Anonymous Next Yes Anonymous All Yes Attendant Serial Call Yes Transfer destination number Barge In No Block Monitor No Busy Lamp Field No Destination number COS Override Yes User extension number User password Call Yes Destination number Call History Yes Camp On Yes Destination number Directed Pickup Yes Security code Destination number Do Not Disturb Yes Feature Yes Forward Busy Yes Destination number Forward Ring No Answer Yes Destination number Forward Universal Yes Destination number Fwd Mail Yes Global Directory Yes Hands free Yes Headset Yes Hunt Group Log in Log out Yes Hunt Group number Local Directory Yes Malicious Call Trace Yes OK Yes Park Yes Park extension Personal Speed Dial Yes Index number Phone Login Logout Yes 206 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES Table 23 Mappable Features for the Model 3103 Telephone continued Mapped by Number Index or Additional Feature User Arguments Release Yes Remote Fwd Universal Yes Source extension Destination extension Retrieve VMail Yes Silent Monitor No Extension to be monitored System Speed Dial No Index number Transfer to Voicemail Yes Destination mailbox number View Hunt Group Yes View Personal Speed Dials Yes View System Speed Dials Yes Configuring Call Park This section
234. ions Note You can only use the Logout button to delete the registration 3Com P enabled phones You cannot use the button to log out other end points for example analog phones connected to an FXS gateway Adding Anonymous Call Restrictions Use anonymous call restrictions to block all incoming calls that arrive from sources that do no match defined patterns With this feature incoming calls with Identification Protection are blocked This feature reduces anonymous calls because the caller must allow his or her number to be identified to communicate with the calling phone To add an anonymous phone restrictions to a phone In the USERS menu click Users The Users page appears Figure 30 Click Phones in the Phones column The User Assigned Phones page appears Click Call Restrictions in the Actions column The Call Restrictions page appears 4 From the Call Restrictions page click Block Anonymous Incoming Calls 5 An anonymous call restriction is automatically configured and added to the Call Restrictions page Configuring Phone Restrictions 113 Configuring Phone Restrictions gt Adding Call Restrictions 1 Use call restrictions to block specific incoming and outgoing call patterns for a phone These are commonly referred to as blacklists blocked patterns and whitelists allowed patterns You can configure block and allow lists for both incoming and outgoing calls If the incoming or outgoing num
235. is all calls originating on this site will be examined 266 CHAPTER 9 CONFIGURING DIAL PLANS PATTERNS AND DIAL RULES Table 29 Number Translation Information Field Description Result Source Pattern If you want to modify the Source Pattern call string choose the appropriate pattern from the drop down list In this example the Result Source Pattern is source call strings will not be modified Destination Pattern Choose the pattern that identifies the destination call strings you want to translate from the drop down list In this example the Destination Pattern is 10 all calls arriving at the call processor that start with 10 will be modified translated with the value defined by the Result Destination Pattern Result Destination Pattern If you want to modify the Destination Pattern call string choose the appropriate pattern from the drop down list In this example the Result Destination Pattern is 6410 the call processor will prepend 64 to all calls that start with 10 Active A check mark indicates this number translation is active 5 Click Save The Number Translations page appears listing the new translation patterns See Figure 102 Figure 102 Number Translation Page USERS Added Number Translations Found 1 Translation s __ Add Ne Number Translation f Delete Selected Fite E T Source Result Source Destination Result Destination Pattern Pattern Pattern C drop64 10
236. is case R1a see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears 2 Click DIRECTORY 3 Create two end points a Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to R1a b Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to R1b For instructions on adding an end point see Adding End Points 4 Create one route GWRoute1 includes the end points created for R1la and R1b For instructions on adding routes see Adding Routes 5 Create a pattern for the gateway A pattern is a dial string prefix that indicates the gateway that should receive a call You associate a pattern with a route when you create a route plan A prefix is created as a dial rule and added to the dial plan in effect for users at a region For example if an internal caller must dial 81 plus the number for external calls you would create the pattern 81 For instructions on adding a pattern see Adding Patterns For information on dial rules and plans see Configuring Dial Rules and Configuring Dial Plans Route Configuration for Voicemail and Music on Hold Route Plan Configuration Requirements 283 6 Configure a route plan to associate the pattern and the route In this example you would create a route plan that associates GWRoute 1 with the dialing pattern 81 For instructions see Adding a Route Plan You do not need to perform these steps on a secondary server Data replication b
237. is page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears See Figure 83 Locate the row containing the group you want to configure and click Phones in the Actions column The Hunt Group Assigned Phones page appears listing any current members of the group To assign one or more members whose phone extension is configured remotely on a different site click Assign External Phones The Hunt Group Unassigned External Phones page appears This page lists users who are not members of the group Do one of the following a Toadda single group member enable the check box preceding the user extension and click Assign in the Actions column a To add multiple group members enable the check box preceding each user extension and click Assign Selected A confirmation box appears verifying you really want to add these members Click OK The Hunt Group Assigned Phones page reappears listing the member phones See Figure 84 Notice that external members are flagged with an asterisk Next you must access the site hosting each remote user extension and add each extension to the group From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which the phone extension is configured see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page
238. is value requires stopping and restarting the Tomcat server which will terminate any active web sessions To modify the web session timeout value Log in to the primary VCX call processor server as root 2 Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX tomcat scripts sessioncfg The session timeout configuration script prompts you for a new session timeout value 3 Enter the number of minutes you want to allow a user s web session to remain inactive before terminating the session The session timeout configuration script asks you to confirm the change to the new value 4 Enter Y to accept the change Enter N to cancel the change Your response is case sensitive You must enter Y to make the change If you enter y or any other response except Y the script terminates and the new value is not applied If you enter Y the script responds with the following prompt For your changes to take effect you must retsart tomcat Do you want to restart tomcat now Y N 5 Enter Y to restart Tomcat and apply the new session timeout value Your response is case sensitive You must enter Y to restart Tomcat and make the change If you enter y or any other response except Y the script terminates Tomcat is not stopped and restarted and the new value is not applied Modifying Site Names through the Central Manager The Global Directory 37 You can change the site name of regional and branch offices using the Central Manager To e
239. ivates the phone and only allows outgoing emergency calls With the following possible exceptions all phone features work for a roaming user as they would if that user was connected to the home call processor Emergency Calls There are several important implications for emergency calls made by a roaming user See Emergency Calling Considerations for Roaming Users a Group Paging Group paging may or may not work depending on the router configuration in the path between the foreign call processor and the home call processor Routers must be configured for multicast pass through to enable group paging a BLF Busy Lamp Flash may or may not work depending on firewall or NAT settings or both in the path between foreign login point either the foreign phone or the location where the device connects to the foreign network and the location of the devices that are monitored As BLF depends on point to point messaging between the devices involved firewall and NAT settings must allow this messaging to pass through in order for the BLF feature to function properly a Number Translation If you have set up number translation and source based routing for calls originating from a user s home call processor configured as an indirect requestor the settings will not work when the user roams To enable number translation to work on a foreign call processor for a roaming user you must configure the same number translation enable sou
240. k Delete Selected A pop up window appears prompting you to confirm the ERL delete action Click OK The Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services page refreshes To edit an IP address range for the ERL CAUTION If Emergency service settings or emergency lines are changed for example the gateway IP address or emergency digits they will not take effect until the telephones are power cycled A simple logout login of the telephone is not adequate In the USERS menu click Emergency Services The Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services page appears In the Location Settings column click P Ranges for the ERL you want to edit The IP Ranges page appears Deleting IP Addresses from an ERL Editing Emergency Numbers AN Configuring Emergency Services 137 In the Network P heading click the IP address you want to edit The Edit IP Range page appears In the IP Address field enter the IP network address that identifies the range addresses you want to include in this ERL 5 In the Subnet Mask field enter the subnet mask for this IP address range 6 Click Save 1 The IP Ranges page refreshes showing the new IP address range To delete an IP address range from an ERL In the USERS menu click Emergency Services The Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services page appears In the Location Settings column click P Ranges for the ERL you want to edit The P Ranges page appears Enter a check mark in the che
241. k Emergency Numbers for the ERL you want to configure The Emergency Numbers page appears Click Add Emergency Number The Add Emergency Number page appears In the Emergency Number field enter an emergency number that will signal the gateway to treat it as an emergency number when dialed for example 911 Click Save The Emergency Numbers page refreshes showing the new emergency number If you have more emergency numbers to add repeat steps b through e 8 Configure the Emergency Gateway IP for the ERL Configuring the emergency gateway IP specifies the address of the gateway used to reach an emergency service provider if the call processor is unavailable You can configure multiple gateways for a redundant configuration a b Click Emergency Services to return to the ERL configuration page From the Location Settings column click Emergency Gateway IP for the ERL you want to configure The Emergency Gateway IP Addresses page appears Click Add Gateway IP The Add Gateway IP page appears In the Gateway IP Address field enter the IP address of the gateway to which you want emergency calls routed for the telephones within the ERL Click Save The Emergency Gateway IP Addresses page refreshes showing the emergency gateway To configure additional emergency gateways for the same ERL repeat c through e 9 Configure the Emergency Lines for the ERL Adding or Editing the Emergency Defaults AN Configuring
242. l Shows LUI utility menu options Use the scroll buttons see number 6 to navigate through the list of options 2 Soft Buttons Moves the cursor left or right The middle button is not used 3 Program Button Starts and exits from the LUI utility or exits from a menu item and moves to the next higher menu If you press the Program button before you save a change to a setting you exit the menu item without saving the change 4 Key Pad Selects menu items or enter numeric characters in a configuration option Use the key to save changes after you edit an item 5 Access Buttons AB1 AB4 Selects LUI menu items AB1 is topmost AB4 is on the bottom 3Com Telephone Local User Interface Menus 151 6 Scroll Buttons Moves up or down through the LUI menu and select hex digits when editing a MAC address Model 2101 Basic Telephone LUI Controls Figure 49 shows the LUI controls on the Model 2101 Basic Telephone Table 20 describes each LUI utility menu item Figure 49 Local User Interface Controls on the 3Com 2101 Basic Telephone 3Com Test Menu Sero MT OPETONS 2e ee OO O xD o O83 ODEO e O C eD G8 CE ke oO C O 0 1 Display Panel Shows LUI utility menu options Use the scroll buttons see number 7 to navigate through the list of options 2 Soft Buttons Moves the cursor left or right The middle button is not
243. l Forward Universal feature page appears To enable the feature ensure a check mark appears in the Enabled box To disable the feature remove the check mark In the Phone Address field enter the phone number or extension of the phone that will receive all incoming calls for this phone for example 631002 In this case the phone does not ring and all calls are immediately redirected to 631002 Click Update The feature settings are applied to that user s phone To configure the Caller Identity feature Follow the steps in Configuring ToS Phone Features to access the Assigned Phone Features page for a user In the Action column click Edit Feature in the Caller Identity row The Caller Identity feature page appears To enable the feature ensure a check mark appears in the Blocked box To disable the feature remove the check mark Configuring Personal Speed Dial Numbers Configuring Directed Call Pickup 1 Configuring ToS Phone Features 167 When enabled all calls from this phone do not include the caller s name and phone number The LCD Display Panel on the called phone does not show the caller s name or extension Instead the Display Panel on the called phone shows Anonymous Click Update To configure the Speed Dial feature Follow the steps in Configuring ToS Phone Features to access the Assigned Phone Features page for a user In the Action column click Edit Feature in the Speed Dial row The
244. lable through menu options available on the USERS interface To access the USERS interface 1 Access the office location for the user you want to add see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears See Figure 11 Figure 11 USERS Interface Main Page eV 3Com VCX V7000 Networked Telephony Solution 3com Users Phone Book Phones Hunt Groups Page Groups Call Pickup Groups Attendant Console Media Access Control System Speed Dials Phone Profiles Type of Service Button Mappings Patterns Class of Service Elements Dial Plans Dial Rules Emergency Services Number Translation Call Park Camp On USERS Data Server REG2 7 10 230 64 5 SEARCH Copyright 2006 3Com Corporation All Rights Reserved DIRECTORY PREFERENCES Users Found 9 User s Delete Selected MAIN LOG OUT Fiter i es Prev Page My of 1 Next E mail Weblogin User Name Phones Actions Oo Claude Annette cannette Phones Address Clone Delete O Edkelly kelly Phones Address Clone Delete Fj Group Page grouppage Phones Address Clone Delete E HanySchuttz schultz Phones Address Clone Delete Fj Jack Bauer jbauer Phones Addres Clone Delete O Jean Martin martin Phones Address Clone Delete E Mariaa Lonez opez Phones adress Clone Delete Fi Ming Lee imlee Phones Address Clone Delete Oo Wendy Freeman wire
245. lation Note that the Pattern field provides a drop down list of all the patterns currently configured on the server If the pattern you want to use is not listed you must create it see Adding Patterns Similarly if you enable the Sourced Based field you must pre configure any requestor holiday day band or date band settings see the appropriate topic in this chapter Table 35 Number Translation Menu Descriptions Configuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY 331 Subheadings Field Description Number Translation Name Enter a unique name to identify this number Information translation Pattern Choose the pattern for outbound calls you want to translate from the drop down list Translation String Enter a translation string for the outdial pattern This determines how the outbound destination number will be translated Active Enter a check mark to enable this number translation Clear the check mark to disable this number translation Source Based When checked enables selection of options in the irect and Indirect Requestor Day Band and Date Band sections to refine the number translation gJ f unchecked no source based inputs can be selected Requestor Profile Holiday Indirect Requestor Allows you to select a defined requestor which is normally an IP Address of a 1st Tier component such as a Gateway This can be used in combination with Phone Profile and Holiday See Managing Re
246. lication Log in to the personal computer running the VCX Call Reports application From the Start menu click VCX Call Reports The installation default location is Start All Programs 3Com VCX VCX Call Reports The VCX Call Reports application main window appears See Figure 136 Figure 136 VCX Call Reports Application f VCX Call Reports Eile View Grids Data Reports Help Data CALLINGPARTYE1644DDRESS V4 CALLEDPARTYEIG4ADDRESS Ya 641203 641201 641203 00713194 20e7 dal1 S92d d2ededa 00713194 20c7 da11 9924 d2cd e4ad 647201 641202 641203 641202 00713194 20c7 dat 1 982d d2cdDeda 641203 641200 641203 641201 00610066 21c7 da11 99f5 461325177 641200 641203 641202 A IPMSG 641203 641200 0061 0066 21 dal1 99f5 d613251 77 641200 0061 0066 21 da11 99f5 d613251 77 641201 The first time you start the VCX Call Reports application the application prompts you for the following configuration information a The IP address of the server hosting the VCX call processor a The IP address of the server hosting the IP Messaging module a Whether or not the Call Reports application should automatically retrieve CDRs a The format used to display CDR fields You can modify any of these and other configuration preferences at any time See Changing Configuration Preferences 338 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING THE CALL REPORTS APPLICATION Downloading CDR Data
247. lly or manually see Manually Resynchronizing the Global Directory on page 45 To add remote branch users in R1B1 and R1B2 to the global directory for R2 execute steps 1 through 10 while logged in to R2 and enter the appropriate IP addresses in steps 3 and 4 Adding Global Directory Redundancy for a Branch Office Because database replication is automatically enabled between a regional office R1 and its associated branches R1B1 and R1B2 the global directory at each location region or branch includes users at the other sites For example the global directory at R1B1 includes users provisioned on R1 and R1B2 If the region R1 fails the local branches cannot receive global directory updates If database replication is enabled between two regions R1 and R2 you can configure a branch R1B1 to receive updates from the other region R2 if the local region R1 fails 10 11 The Global Directory 49 To configure global directory redundancy at a branch office R1B1 in this example Log on to the VCX branch server R1B1 using the cworks account and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata globaldir bin config sh At the prompt enter 101 The Enter the Primary ROSCA IP Address or Hostname prompt appears Enter the hostname or IP address of the primary server at the local regional office in this example R1 The Enter the Secondary ROSCA IP Address or Hostname prompt appears Enter the hostname or IP
248. m Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager browser Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher 2 Examine the default dial plans supplied with VCX software Each dial plan includes a set of dial rules The Configuring Dial Plans dial rules determine the length and allowed digits a user can dial to make a call If the supplied dial plans and dial rules do not meet your needs you can modify the existing plans and rules or create new ones Configuring Dial Rules 3 Create dial string patterns A pattern defines the sequence of digits a Configuring Patterns USERS user dials to call another site and the sequence of digits dialed to reach an IP Messaging voicemail server or Music On Hold MOH server The voicemail and MOH numbers are set up through the IP Messaging Module Administrator Provisioning application 22 CHAPTER 1 VCX SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW Table 4 VCX Basic Configuration Steps continued Step Purpose Reference 4 Define end points 1 An end point is a device to which a call may be sent End points include the VCX Call Processors primary and secondary that process local network calls gateways that process out of network calls and IP Messaging servers that manage voice mailboxes Managing End Points 5 Add routes A route includes one or more end points Route Plan Configuration Requirements Managing Routes 6 Add route plans A rout
249. matically configured during installation and does not require any additional configuration The branch office configuration tool is provided for any manual modifications that might be required Configuring Data Collection Frequency for a Regional Office This procedure determines how often the Boston regional office collects data from its peer regional offices in Chicago and Los Angeles To configure the data collection frequency on a regional office Log on to the primary VCX server in Boston using the cworks account and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata globaldir bin config sh 2 At the prompt enter 105 3 At the prompt enter in minutes the frequency at which you want the data collection to occur You are returned to the main menu The user directory in Boston will automatically collect information from the Chicago and Los Angeles regions at the specified interval Configuring Data Collection Frequency at a Branch Office This procedure determines how often a branch office collects user directory data from its host regional office Manually Resynchronizing the Global Directory Manually Loading a Global Directory Database The Global Directory 45 To configure the data collection frequency on a branch office Log on to the primary VCX server of the branch office using the cworks account and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata globaldir bin config sh 2 At the prompt enter 105 3 At t
250. mber translation 1 From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to configure a number translation see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears 2 Click DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY interface page appears See Figure 103 3 Click Number Translation The Number Translations page appears See Figure 133 Figure 133 Number Translations Page Number Translations Found 2 Translation s Add Number Translation Delete Selected mter Name via CS Week Day Holiday Day Time eea Band Band Pattern Translation Phone E Name a Active NameWalue String Indirect Requestor profile Action C no64 Y sip 64107 Years Delete Day pay Y 508 area 508 1508 161 104 123 50 5060 Delete Prev Page of1 Next 4 Click Add Number Translation The Add Number Translation page appears See Figure 134 330 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Figure 134 Add Number Translation Page Add Number Translation Number Translation Information Name Pattern 508 area vj Translation String Active V Source Based Requestor Profile Holiday Indirect Requestor v Phone Profile v Holiday v D Day Band veek Day Band v Day Time Band v Calendar Band Calendar Band v Save Cancel Jf Reset 5 Using the descriptions in Table 35 as a guide configure the number trans
251. me you want to leave the ELIN associated with the emergency caller The number is specified in hours and the range is 1 through 24 This association is used to callback the emergency caller After the configured time expires the association between the emergency caller and ELIN is dropped In case an ELIN is not in use it can be assigned to a new emergency caller and the association with an older emergency caller is overwritten with the association of the new emergency caller In the Usage Release Timer field enter in the maximum amount of time you want to allow the ELIN to remain in use The number is specified in hours and the range is 1 through 24 Normally an ELIN is freed when the emergency caller goes on hook before the emergency service provider goes on hook otherwise the ELIN is kept in use for the duration of this timer Click Save The Emergency Line ID Numbers page refreshes showing the updated ELIN Deleting Emergency Lines from an ERL 1 Configuring Emergency Services 141 To delete an Emergency Line from an ERL In the USERS menu click Emergency Services The Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services page appears From the Location Settings column click Emergency Lines for the ERL you want to configure The Emergency Line ID Numbers page appears Enter a check mark in the check box preceding the ELIN you want to delete Click Delete Selected A pop up window appears prompting you to confirm the ELI
252. more information click Help Copyright c 2006 3Com Corporation All Rights Reserved 2 Click Central Management Console The Central Manager login page appears see Figure 2 Figure 2 Central Manager Login Page 3Com VCX V700 Networked Telephony S Central Manager Console 3 Log in to the Central Manager using your assigned username and password The default usernames and passwords are described in About VCX Administrator Passwords There are four usernames that correspond to four VCX administrator roles See VCX Administrator Access Roles The Central Manager page appears Figure 3 which allows you to choose the site you want to manage You can manage either a VCX regional office branch office or an IP Messaging server depending on your network setup VCX Administrator Access Roles Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager 31 Figure 3 Central Manager Site Page Qe VCX V7000 3com Central Manager Display information and links to the Regional and Branch offices Click the Modify button below to edit the Site Names When you have finished gt Central Manager Bete Save button to store the names or click the Cancel button to cancel your Global Directory EGIL za Regional and Branch Offices 7 eee Site ID al Site Type Site Name _ Site Access PrilP Messaging Server Sec IP Messaging Server REG2V7 Regional Req ional Office 2 Allowed 10 230 64 5 10 230 64 7
253. n a Map a dedicated telephone access button to a system speed dial number which enables one touch speed dialing System wide Speed Dial numbers are subject to Class of Service restrictions For example if a phone is assigned to a CoS that prohibits dialing toll free numbers a System Speed Dial configured for a specific toll number will not work on that phone Adding a System Speed Dial Entry 1 Configuring System Speed Dial Numbers 189 To add a system speed dial number From the Central Manager select the VCX server that has been designated the system speed dial master site see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click System Speed Dials The Enterprise System Speed Dials page appears Click Add System Speed Dial The Add System Speed Dial page appears See Figure 60 Figure 60 Add System Speed Dial Page Add System Speed Dial System Speed Dial Information Speed Dial Number 1 First Name Last Name Phone Address Save Cancel Reset Fields marked with an asterisk are required Note Ifthe System Speed Dial is for an Organizational type please enter the name in Last Name field 4 In the Speed Dial Number field enter a unique number to id
254. n all the selected phones Click Assign Selected A confirmation window appears Click OK The Remote Forward Universal Assigned Phones page appears Configuring Silent Monitor and Barge In Configuring ToS Phone Features 169 The feature settings are applied to that user s phone To remove a phone extension from the Remote Forward Universal Assigned Phones page follow steps 1 and 2 then Check the box preceding the phone extension for each user you want to remove from the remote forward universal access list 2 Click Delete Selected 3 A confirmation window appears Click OK to remove the user The Silent Monitor and Barge In feature is enabled on the phone of an agent Calls to the agent can be monitored by a supervisor who can also participate in barge in to a monitored call To configure the Silent Monitor and Barge In feature Follow the steps in Configuring ToS Phone Features to access the Assigned Phone Features page for the user whose phone will be monitored In the Actions column click Edit Feature in the Silent Monitor and Barge In row The Silent Monitor and Barge In Assigned Monitoring Phones page appears which lists the phones that can monitor this user that is the user specified in the User field at the top of the Silent Monitor and Barge In Assigned Phones page Click Assign Phones You can also specify the phone number of a user on a remote VCX system but not an external phone numbe
255. n click the Phones link The User Assigned Phones page appears for the selected user See Figure 51 Configuring Phone Features 163 Figure 51 User Assigned Phones Page User Assigned Phones User Maria A Lopez Found 2 Phone s Assign Phones Unassign Selected Delete Selected a E li Phone Address Display Name a Phone Profile Actions Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Lopez Maria Default 00 e0 bb aa bb cc Enabled Restrictions Registrations CallHistory Selective Ringing Bridge Permissions Bridged Phones Hunt Groups Settings Unassign Delete Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Lopez Maria Default Enabled Restrictions Registrations Call History Selective Ringing Bridge Permissions Bridged Phones Hunt Groups Settings Unassign Delete Prev Page My of1 Next The Action column provides links to the following phone feature configuration options a Features Clicking this link allows you to configure the following features provided by the enabled ToS and described in Table 11 Call Forward Busy See Configuring Call Forward Busy Call Forward Ring No Answer See Configuring Call Forward Ring No Answer Call Forward Universal See Configuring Call Forward Universal a Caller Identity See Configuring Caller Identity Speed Dial See Configuring Personal Speed Dial Numbers a Directed Call Pickup See Configuring Directed Call Pickup a Remote
256. n the check box preceding each number translation then click Delete Selected A confirmation box appears prompting you to confirm the delete action 3 Click OK The Number Translations page refreshes and the deleted number translation is not listed 334 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES 11 CONFIGURING THE CALL REPORTS APPLICATION This chapter describes how to configure and use the VCX Call Reports application to view Call Detail Records CDRs collected by the server hosting the VCX Accounting service for each office regional and any associated branches This chapter includes the following topics Call Detail Records Overview Accessing the Call Reports Application Downloading CDR Data Managing the CDR Display and Generating Reports Changing Configuration Preferences Uninstalling the Call Reports Application 336 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING THE CALL REPORTS APPLICATION Call Detail Records Overview gt Call Detail Records CDRs contain information about each call that is processed by the VCX IP Telephony Suite CDR information can be generated by either a gateway the IP Messaging server or the call processor These components send the CDR information directly to the Accounting server In general the CDR generating component is responsible for deciding which CDR fields are appropriate for that particular type of component Typically one CDR is generated by a component at the
257. n this case B1R1 see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears 2 Click DIRECTORY 3 Create three end points a Add an end point of the type Redirect Call Processor that points to Ria b Add an end point of the type Redirect Call Processor that points to R1b c Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to B1R1Gw You do not need to create end points or a route for R2a and R2b Region 1 will redirect calls from B1R1 to the correct destination This assumes however that region 7 has a route and route plan configured for region 2 For instructions on adding an end point see Adding End Points Create two routes Route includes the end points created for R1a and R1b Routez2 includes the end point created for B1R1Gw For instructions on adding routes see Adding Routes Create a pattern for each region a branch user is allowed to call A pattern is a dial string prefix that indicates the call destination is inside or outside of the branch office You can consider a prefix as a site ID A prefix is created as a dial rule and added to the dial plan in effect for users at a branch or region If the site 280 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES ID for region 1 is 61 and the site ID for region 2 is 62 you would create two patterns 61 and 62 You also need to create a pattern that identifies calls to the PSTN for example 81
258. nassign one OutDial pattern or multiple OutDial patterns a To unassign one OutDial pattern click Unassign in the Action column for the OutDial pattern you want to unassign from the end point m Tounassign multiple OutDial patterns enter a check mark in the check box preceding each OutDial pattern you want to unassign then click Unassign Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the unassign action Click OK The Route End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns page refreshes Managing Route Plans This section describes how to add and delete route plans A route plan associates a pattern with a route which includes one or more end points A route plan can also specify a routing policy and source based routing input parameters Note that you can also add a route plan by running the Route Plan Wizard See Using the Route Plan Wizard Source based input parameters are used for the following two routing functions a Destination number to route mapping associates the destination number to a specific route This option is described in Adding a Route Plan a Destination number translation translates the number which can be a string or an E 164 phone number into another number This translation can be a complete replacement of the number or a partial replacement This option is described in Configuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY Adding a Route Plan Managing Route Plans 305 Th
259. ncy and is blacklisted does not mean that Emergency calls will not go through Note that a VCX phone can dial an emergency phone number even if the phone is not logged in to the VCX system However the phone must be properly configured with the IP address of the VCX call processor have a network connection to an operational VCX system and the region must support emergency dialing If the VCX system is not operational an emergency call can be routed optionally directly through a PSTN media gateway L CAUTION You must ensure that a dial plan and dial pattern exist for your emergency number and that the dial plan is included in the phone profile assigned to your users extensions VCX software provides by default a dial plan named Emergency that includes the emergency numbers 911 and 9911 See Chapter 9 for information on patterns dial plans and dial rules As described in User Roaming Services VCX software version 7 1 allows a user to log in to any phone in the system regardless of the call processor to which the phone is connected The user simply configures the phone with his or her extension and logs in with the appropriate password This allows for example a user whose phone extension is configured at a branch office to assign that extension to a phone at regional office Consequently the user s branch extension and phone features are enabled on the phone at the regional office Configuring Emergency Services 131 The proc
260. nes page appears listing any current members of the group 4 To assign one or more members whose phone extension is configured locally on this site click Assign Phones The Hunt Group Unassigned Phones page appears This page lists users who are not members of the group 5 Do one of the following Toadd a single group member enable the check box preceding user extension and click Assign in the Actions column To add multiple group members enable the check box preceding each user extension and click Assign Selected A confirmation box appears verifying you really want to add these members 6 Click OK The Hunt Group Assigned Phones page reappears listing the member phones See Figure 84 238 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Adding Remote User Extensions to a Hunt Group or Attendant Figure 84 Hunt Group Assigned Phones Page Hunt Group Assigned Phones Hunt Group Service Found 5 Phone s Assign External Phones Assign Phones Unassign Selected d Phone Address First Name Last Name Site Name Action O 631001 Anna Ballen Regional Office 1 Unassign O 631004 Jose Lima Regional Office 1 Unassign O 641001 Jean Martin Regional Office 2 Unassign O 641005 Ming Lee Regional Office 2 Unassign O 641205 Jack Bauer Regional Office 2 Unassign Prev Page of1 Next Note The phones marked with are External Phones You can specify that calls to a hunt group extension generate a distinctive ring tone on phon
261. nfigured 5002 through the IP Messaging Administration interface This is the recording a caller hears before a hunt group or attendant member answers the call such as Your call is important to us Please wait for the next available customer service agent See the P Messaging Operations and System Administration Guide for details on how to configure the announcement number Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants Table 26 Add Hunt Group Information continued 225 Field Description Example Music on Hold Identifies access to an audio file 5001 Number configured through the IP Messaging Administration interface This is the recording either a voice or music a caller hears when put on hold See the P Messaging Operations and System Administration Guide for details on how to configure the music on hold number Voice Mail Identifies the number dialed to access the 5000 Number mailbox where voicemail for this hunt group or attendant is stored on the IP Messaging server Per Device Specifies how long in seconds the VCX 10 Timeout call processor rings one extension before 2 20 seconds moving to the next extension if there is no answer The default is 10 seconds Total Timeout Specifies how long in seconds the VCX 120 2 900 seconds call processor attempts to make a connection within the hunt group or attendant before directing the call to the default call coverage point The default is 120 seconds
262. ng Holidays Click Save The Holidays page appears To delete a holiday Click Holidays The Holidays page appears See Figure 125 You can delete one holiday or multiple holidays To delete one holiday click Delete in the Action column for the holiday entry you want to delete a To delete multiple holidays enter a check mark in the check box preceding each holiday you want to delete then click Delete Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the delete action Click OK The Holidays page refreshes and the deleted holiday or holidays is not listed Managing Week Day Bands Adding Week Day Bands 1 This section describes how to add edit and delete week day time bands The configured data can be used for source based input parameters for destination number routing and number translation see Managing Route Plans and Configuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY The week day time bands can also be used for scheduling group or phone call coverage see Hunt Group and Attendant Call Coverage Options and Configuring Call Coverage for a Telephone To add week day bands From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add a weekday based routing parameter see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears Managing Week Day Bands 321 2 Click DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY interface p
263. ng routes on each primary regional server for users assigned to that region that is users not configured on a branch This example describes how to create IP Messaging routes on the primary call processor in a region The example uses the following simple multi site system in which the six servers are running IP Telephony and IP Messaging configurations a Ria identifies the primary call processor in region 1 a R1b identifies the secondary call processor in region 1 a IPM 1a identifies the primary IP Messaging server in region 1 a IPM1b identifies the secondary IP Messaging server in region 1 a R2a identifies the primary call processor in region 2 a R2b identifies the secondary call processor in region 2 a IPM2a identifies the primary IP Messaging server in region 2 a IPM2b identifies the secondary IP Messaging server in region 2 Route Plan Configuration Requirements 285 To configure IP Messaging routes Access the server you want to manage in this case R1a see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears 2 Click DIRECTORY 3 Create two end points a Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to IPM1a b Add an end point of the type Gateway that points to IPM1b For instructions on adding an end point see Adding End Points Create one route IPMRoute1 includes the end points created for IPM1a and IPM1b For instructions on adding routes se
264. ng Tone Ring Tone 1 Single v Private Ring Tone Ring Tone 1 Single be Call Waiting Ring Tone Ring Tone 6 Triple Call Fallback 5 Modify the field information using Table 14 as a guide Modifying a User s Phone Settings 109 Table 14 User Phone Settings Page Options Field Description Date Time Format Display Indicates the format used on the phone s LCD The following formats are available MMM dd HH mm Nov 07 16 20 a MMM dd hh mm a Nov 07 04 20 AM or Nov 07 04 20 PM MM dd HH mm 11 07 16 20 MM dd HH mm 11 07 04 20 AM or 11 07 04 20 PM a dd MMM HH mm 07 Nov 16 20 a dd MMM hh mm a 07 Nov 04 20 AM or 07 Nov 04 20 PM a dd MM HH mm 07 11 16 20 a dd MM hh mm a 07 11 04 20 AM or 07 11 04 20 PM Local Time Zone Specifies the time zone of where the server is located Field options preceded by x indicate time zones that support Daylight Savings Time adjustments Observe Daylight Savings Check this box if the time zone you selected observes Daylight Savings Time Inside Ring Tone Specifies the ring tone users hear for phone calls that use Caller ID and originate from within the VCX system Private Ring Tone Specifies the ring tone users hear for phone calls that do not use Caller ID and originate from within the VCX system Outside Ring Tone Specifies the ring tone users hear for phone calls that originate f
265. ns Emergency calls such as calls to 911 are not subject to CoS restrictions and cannot be blacklisted Emergency numbers are configured and controlled through the Emergency Services menu option see Configuring Emergency Services System wide Speed Dial numbers are subject to Class of Service restrictions For example if a phone is assigned to a CoS that prohibits dialing toll free numbers a System Speed Dial configured for a specific toll number will not work on that phone When you create a new phone profile see Managing Phone Extensions the system assigns the default CoS unless you specify a different one If you edit the properties of the default CoS verify that it contains a minimum set of permissions This section describes how to add a Class of Service To add a Class of Service In the USERS menu click Class of Service The Class of Services page appears See Figure 18 Configuring Class of Service 67 Figure 18 Class of Services Page Class of Services Found 7 Class of Service s Prev Page 1of1 Next 3com Class of Service Delete Default Class Of Serice Internal mema j Deele International Hatona Sample Class Of Service Enter the name of new Class of Service eS In the Enter the name of new Class of Service field enter a unique name to identify the new Class of Service Click Add The Class of Services page refreshes and lists the new Class of Service In the Name column cli
266. nt Console b The attendant enters the destination extension and presses to complete the call When the called party disconnects the caller is transferred back to the attendant who can activate another serial call transfer to another extension If the calling party reaches the called party s voice mailbox the calling party can press 99 to return to the attendant If the calling party disconnects with the called party the serial calling session terminates To map a telephone extension to an Attendant Console In the USERS menu click Attendant Console The Attendant Consoles page appears Click Add Attendant Console The Add Attendant Console page appears See Figure 41 Figure 41 Add Attendant Console Page Add Attendant Console Attendant Console Information mac Address o0 leo kbb iL Location Associated User Phone Address Associated User Phone MAC Address 00 e0 bb I Subscription Interval seconds 30 Fields marked with an asterisk are required 3 Fill in the fields according to Table 19 Table 19 Attendant Console Field Description Field Description MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the attendant console Location Enter a textual description of where the Attendant Console is located such as a cube office or geographic area Configuring an Attendant Console 125 Table 19 Attendant Console Field Description Field Description
267. nt Group Service Found 1 Coverage Rule s Add Predefined Coverage Rule Add Coverage Rule Name Type Coverage Start End Coverage Point Action s Default Default Every Day All Day Voice Mail Prev Page1of1 Next 4 To change the default call coverage point click Default in the Name column The Edit Default Coverage Point page appears See Figure 80 230 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Figure 80 Edit Default Coverage Point for a Hunt Group Edit Default Coverage Point Hunt Group Service Default Coverage Information Call Coverage Send to Voice Mail Send to Number ONo Coverage 5 Select one of the following default hunt group call coverage points a Send to Voice Mail Unanswered calls to the hunt group or attendant are redirected to the group voice mailbox Send to Number Unanswered calls to the hunt group or attendant are redirected to the specified teleohone number or extension for example a receptionist an Auto Attendant or another group If a call coverage is internal another VCX extension enter the extension number If call coverage is external outside the VCX system enter the number as an E 164 number 8475555555 You cannot select the No Coverage option All hunt groups calling groups and attendants must have a a default call coverage point This dialog box is also used to configure call coverage points for individual users in which case No Coverage is a vali
268. nterface is enabled and the Users page appears 2 Click DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY interface page appears See Figure 103 3 Click OutDial Patterns 4 The OutDial Patterns page appears See Figure 121 Figure 121 OutDial Patterns Page OutDial Patterns Found 1 OutDial Pattern s Add OutDial Pattern Delete Selected Match Pattern String Translation String Oo Removeb4 Prev Page1of1 Next 5 From the OutDial Patterns page click Add OutDial Pattern The Add OutDial Pattern page appears See Figure 122 Figure 122 Add OutDial Pattern Page Add OutDial Pattern OutDial Pattern Information Name Match Pattern String 508 v _ Translation String Save Reset 6 Enter the following field information a Name Enter a unique name to identify the OutDial pattern Editing OutDial Patterns Deleting OutDial Patterns 1 1 Managing OutDial Patterns 315 a Match Pattern String From the drop down list select the pattern that will identify the outbound calls whose destination will be modified by the translation string a Translation String Enter the translation string that will be applied to the pattern string This determines how the outbound destination number will be translated Click Save The OutDial Patterns page appears listing the added OutDial pattern To edit an OutDial pattern Click OutDial Patterns The OutDial Patterns page appears See Figure 121 In the
269. om each feature drop down list assign a unique feature to each feature button 1 through 4 d Click Save The Attendant Consoles page refreshes and the feature mappings are assigned 6 Map the phone extensions to the attendant console buttons The attendant console allows up to 100 telephones to be configured a From the Attendant Consoles page in the Actions column click Extension Mappings for the attendant console you want to edit The Attendant Console page appears which allows the attendant console buttons to be mapped to specific extensions See Figure 43 Figure 43 Attendant Console Button Mapping Page Attendant Console Extension Mappings MAC Address 00 e0 bb aa bb cc Location main office Associated User Phone Address 641000 Associated User Phone MAC Address 00 e0 bb 0f ff0e ID Extension ID Extension ID Extension ID Extension ID Extension 1 641004 11 21 31 41 2 12 22 32 42 3 13 23 33 43 4 14 24 34 44 5 15 25 35 45 6 16 26 36 46 F 17 27 37 47 8 18 28 38 48 g 19 29 39 49 10 20 30 40 50 Save Jf Cancel Jf Reset Editing Feature Mapping Buttons on an Attendant Console Editing Extensions on an Attendant Console Configuring an Attendant Console 127 b Enter a phone extension There are 100 fields available to configure telephone extensions To configure extensions 1 50 click the 7 50 button and to configure ext
270. on and the bottom button invokes the third option 3 Select Button Selects the highlighted option in a list on the Display Panel The highlighted option is indicated by a black dot to the left of the option 4 Scroll Buttons Up Down Left Right The Up and Down buttons move scroll up and down through the options shown in the Display Panel Arrows in the display show if there are more options above or below those displayed The options are described in Table 21 The Left button functions as a backspace key and deletes the character to the left of the cursor position The Right button highlights the cursor position it does not move the cursor to the right 5 Telephone Key Pad Enables you to enter data required to enable a configuration option for example an IP address 6 Soft buttons Each of the four buttons activates the tabbed command shown in the Display Panel above the corresponding button The commands change according to context Possible options include Messages Directory Call Logs Features Exit Cancel Back and Select 7 Left Buttons Have no function when the phone is not connected to the VCX network When the phone is connected and configured these buttons are used to process calls LUI Configuration Options for the Manager s Telephone Table 21 describes each Configuration menu item that appears in the LUI for the Manager s Telephone 3Com Telephone Local User Interface Menus 157 Table 21
271. on enabling or disabling these features For all features following these general steps to launch the feature configuration page In the USERS menu click Users A list of the users configured on this server appears 2 Locate the user whose phone features you want to configure 3 In the Phones column click the Phones link The User Assigned Phones page appears for the selected user See Figure 51 Click Features The Assigned Phone Features page appears See Figure 52 Configuring Call Forward Busy Configuring Call Forward Ring No Answer 1 1 Configuring ToS Phone Features 165 Figure 52 Assigned Phone Features Page Assigned Phone Features User Maria A Lopez Phone 641004 Found 9 Feature s Call Forward Busy Edit Feature Call Forward Ring No Answer Edit Feature Call Forward Universal Edit Feature Caller Identity Edit Feature Speed Dial Edit Feature Directed Call Pickup Edit Feature Remote Call Forward Edit Feature Silent Monitor and Barge In Edit Feature Camp On Click the Edit Feature link for the feature you want to configure To configure the Call Busy Forward feature Follow the steps in Configuring ToS Phone Features to access the Assigned Phone Features page for a user In the Action column click Edit Feature in the Call Forward Busy row The Call Forward Busy configuration page appears To enable the feature ensure a check mark appears in the Enabled box To
272. on enter the required information using Table 7 as a guide Table 7 Adding Personal Information Field Description Title Enter the social honorific or professional title associated with the user First Name Enter the user s first name Middle Name Enter the user s middle initial Last Name Enter the user s last name Country Select the country in which the user is located This field determines the country specific tones for example the dial tone used on the phone CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES Table 7 Adding Personal Information continued Field Description E mail Enter the user s e mail address 4 In the Phone Features section enter the required information using Table 8 as a guide Table 8 Configuring Phone Language and Font Size Field Description Options Phone Language Allows you to specify the language used to display menu options and prompts in the LCD Display Panel of the user s telephone The default language is US English This field is valid for the following 3Com VCX telephone models a Model 3101 Basic Telephone Model 3102 Business Telephone a Model 3103 Manager s Telephone Select a language from the drop down list box Phone Font Size Allows you to specify the size of the fonts displayed on the LCD of the user s telephone This field is valid for the following 3Com VCX telephone models a Model 3101 Basic Tele
273. one a No Coverage Call coverage is not activated and the caller hears a busy tone If the extension is offline the caller hears an error or busy tone The call coverage option Send to Voice Mail works as follows when Call Fallback is enabled for a phone A call to extension A gets forwarded to extension B if extension A is busy Extension A has also enabled the Fall Back option Extension A receives a call that gets forwarded to extension B However extension B is also busy Instead of sending the call to extension B s coverage point or call forwarding destination VCX returns the call to extension A s voice mail If Call Fallback is enabled for the extension voice mail is the only valid call coverage option Call Fallback is enabled in the phone profile assigned to a group of phones see Table 12 in Creating a Phone Profile Call Fallback can also be set for individual phones on the User Phone Settings page see Modifying a User s Phone Settings Click Save The call coverage option is applied to the phone and you return to the Coverage Rules page In the Call Timeout field enter the number of seconds you want a phone to ring or timeout if offline before the call goes to call coverage and click Submit When you create a phone extension and associated voice mailbox VCX software automatically assigns the voice mailbox as the default coverage point In addition to the default coverage point you can create a call cove
274. one see Creating a Phone Profile Similarly if you want to map buttons as Bridged Lines see Mapping Bridged Extensions you must use consecutive buttons 5 Enable or disable the Lock check box for the feature All features are unlocked by default except for buttons mapped to the System Appearance lines on Models 2102 and 3102 You can unlock a button mapped to a System Appearance line so a user can remap it or you can remap a System Appearance button but this reduces the number of lines available to make or receive calls on the phone 6 For the Number Index field a If instep 5 you added a personal speed dial enter a number in the Number Index field The number to enter is the current maximum index number plus 1 For example if the current maximum personal speed dial index number is 5 the index number for the new speed dial number should be 6 a If instep 5 you removed a personal speed dial entry delete the number in the Number Index field A user can configure a maximum of nine personal speed dial numbers If you create or modify a template the index numbers for the available personal speed dial entries should be contiguous and start at 1 a If instep 5 you added a system speed dial specify the index number associated with a previously configured speed dial number Mappable Features Mapping Features to Telephone Buttons 203 A button mapped to system speed dial is automatically locked Users cannot remap t
275. one extension mappings are reconfigured To immediately implement extension mappings power cycle the attendant console Otherwise changes are implemented at the end of the current Subscription Interval see Table 19 To edit attendant console MAC addresses location associated user phone address and subscription interval In the USERS menu click Attendant Console The Attendant Consoles page appears In the MAC Address column click the attendant console you want to edit The Edit Attendant Console page appears Change the field values as necessary See Table 19 for field information 4 Click Save Deleting an Attendant Console The Attendant Consoles page refreshes and the attendant console configuration is updated To immediately implement changes power cycle the attendant console Otherwise changes are implemented at the end of the current Subscription Interval see Table 19 To delete an attendant console entry In the USERS menu click Attendant Console The Attendant Consoles page appears Enter a check mark in the box preceding the attendant console you want to delete Click Delete Selected A pop up window appears prompting you to confirm the delete action Click OK 5 The Attendant Consoles page refreshes and the attendant console is no longer listed Attendant Console Busy Lamp Flash Descriptions Configuring Emergency Services 129 The attendant can use the Busy Lamp Flash BLF lights tha
276. ones Unassign Selected DEE Phone Address VP Phone Address First Name Last Name O 641001 i _ Unassian Oo 641 004 Unassign O 641205 Jack Bauer Unassian Prev Page KEK of1 Next 218 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS To remove a phone from a group click Unassign for the appropriate phone number To delete multiple phones select them by enabling the check box next to each entry and click Unassign Selected Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants Hunt Groups and Calling Groups You can establish formal and informal call centers so that incoming calls can be directed to several telephones that have been associated into hunt groups or attendant coverage A call center is a general term that refers to any system that accepts incoming calls to a site ensures that those calls are sent to the proper destination within the site and manages database records on call activity and distribution The call center can be used for example as a help desk a reservations counter an information hotline or a customer service center A hunt group is a group of VCX phone extensions that are configured under a virtual extension An incoming call to the virtual extension rings on the phone of one hunt group member If that member s telephone is in use or if that member does not answer the call the system hunts for another member of the group until the call is answered or is forwarded to the group call coverage point For example if
277. ontains six columns of information for each user Table 6 lists each column and describes the type of information available in that column Table 6 Users Page Information Column Description Sample Content Selection box Use the check box to select multiple N A users This is useful when deleting multiple users 56 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES Table 6 Users Page Information continued Column Description Sample Content Name Specifies the first middle and last John T Smith names of a user E mail Specifies the user s e mail address jtsmith 3com com User Name Specifies the username used to access jtsmith the VCX User web interface and provides a link which allows you to edit the personal information for the user Phones Contains a link that allows you to add N A view and modify phone information for the user Managing Phone Extensions Actions Provides the following three options N A Address Use this option to enter address information for a user See Adding User Address Information a Clone Use this option to clone an existing user See Cloning User Profile Information a Delete Use this option to delete a user profile See Deleting User Profiles Configuring User Profiles Adding a User Profile This section provides information on how to add list search for edit clone and delete user profiles Every VCX user must have account information
278. open or start of a call and another CDR is generated at the close or end of a call Also CDRs are generated by components on the ingress incoming and egress outgoing sides of a call The Accounting server supports the 3Queue protocol for receiving CDRs 3Queue is a high performance reliable 3Com proprietary protocol which uses ASN 1 formatted UDP messages The UDP messages are sent to and received from the back end servers The Call Reports application can retrieve and display Call Detail Records CDRs from a VCX or IP Messaging server You can schedule the Call Reports application to retrieve CDRs at a specific time or you can retrieve them on demand The Call Reports application also includes an option for creating reports that contain a subset of CDR information by filtering content The VCX Call Reports application is available on the 3Com Partner Access web site and is installed on a personal computer The download and installation process is described in the VCX Installation Guide Microsoft NET Framework version 1 1 or later must be installed on the personal computer before the VCX Call Reports application is installed The NET Framework software is available from the Microsoft Download Center See the VCX Maintenance Guide for information on configuring the Accounting and Call Records servers Accessing the Call Reports Application 337 Accessing the Call Reports Application To access the VCX Call Reports app
279. or outbound calls that will be mapped to the route selected in the next field from the drop down list See Configuring Patterns DIRECTORY Route Choose the route from the drop down list See Managing Routes Active Enter a check mark to enable this route plan Clear the check mark to disable this route plan Sourced Based When checked enables selection of options in the Requestor Profile Holiday Day Time Band and Calendar Band sections to refine the route plan If unchecked no source based inputs can be selected Requestor Profile Holiday Indirect Requestor Allows you to select a defined requestor which is normally an IP Address of a 1st Tier component such as a Gateway This can be used in combination with Phone Profile Holiday or both See Managing Requestors Phone Profile Allows you to select a defined phone profile A phone profile includes the IP address for a primary call processor and a secondary call processor as well as other attributes A profile typically applies to a group of phone extensions and therefore allows you to enable source based routing based on a group of users The profile can be used in combination with Indirect Requestor Holiday or both See Managing Phone Profiles Holiday Allows you to select a defined holiday This can be used alone or in combination with an indirect requestor or phone profile or both See Managing Holidays 308 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING RO
280. ou want to create more than 2000 phone extensions execute the Add Phone operation multiple times For example to create 10 000 extensions access the Add Phones page five times and enter 2000 in the Number of Phones to Create field each time Note that creating 2000 extensions in one operation is a time consuming process that will take several minutes to complete Managing Phone Extensions 99 Table 13 Add Phone Page Field Descriptions continued Field Description Starting Phone Extension Enter the phone extension for the phone you want to add Each phone extension must be unique within the entire VCX system including all regional and branch offices Note Valid extensions are determined by the dial plan you have configured for this site See Adding Dial Plans Depending on the dial plan a valid extension can range from a minimum of 2 digits to a maximum of 10 digits If you are creating multiple phone extensions enter the extension number that starts the phone extension range VCX software will create consecutive phone extensions by incrementing this starting number by 1 up to the value entered in the Number Phones to Create field For example if you enter 10 in the Number Phones to Create field and enter 2000 in the Starting Phone Extension field VCX software creates 10 extensions 2000 through 2009 If one or more extensions within the range already exist VCX software skips the existing extensions and r
281. ou can assign one or more phone extensions To assign one extension click Assign in the Action column for the extension you want to assign a To assign multiple extensions enter a check mark in the check box preceding each phone extension you want to assign and click Assign Selected The User Assigned Phones page appears showing the phone extension or extensions assigned to the user See Figure 33 Figure 33 User Assigned Phones Page Extension Assigned User Assigned Phones User Maria A Lopez Found 2 Phone s Assign Phones Unassign Selected Delete Selected Cancel Gea Dispay Name E n E Phone Address Display Name Phone Profile MAC Status Feat jres Call Coverage Button Mappings Call lnmcarncaaiis Restrictions Registrations CallHistory Selective 00 20 bb aa bb cc Enabled Ringing Bridge Permissions Bridged Phones Hunt Groups Settings Unassign Delete Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Restrictions Registrations CallHistory Selective Ringing Bridge Permissions Bridged Phones Hunt Groups Settings Unassign Delete Defaul Default Enabled Prev Page of1 Next You can use this page to perform the following tasks m Modify phone extension settings For example in Figure 33 both assigned extensions use the default phone profile You can use the Edit Phone page to reassign an extension to a different profile See Modifying a Phone Extension Unassigning a Phone Extension Manag
282. ou specify the IP address of the secondary Network Call Processor See the description for 5 Set NCP IP for information Set VLAN Config Used to enable or disable VLAN configuration a VLAN Enable 1 You are prompted to enter the VLAN ID A valid VLAN ID is in the range of 0 through 4095 Press the pound key to store it in memory a VLAN Disable 0 7 Reserved Reserved for future use 8 Test LED amp LCD Turns on all LEDs for 5 seconds then fills every pixel on the display panel for 5 seconds 9 Test Buttons Puts the telephone in the button test state Press any telephone button to see a description of the button s function To return to the main menu you must press the menu button twice m On the 3Com 3102 Business Telephone m On an 3Com 2102 or 2102 IR Business Telephone m On an 3Com 3101 or 3101SP Basic Telephone a On an 3Com 2101 Basic Telephone O EEPROM Default Restores the phone to default settings by clearing these configured settings IP Information My IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP NCP IP and the Alt Download Server IP return to 255 255 255 255 NCP MAC address The NCP MAC address returns to fff fff ff fff SIP Parameters All SIP specific parameters will be set to default Oxffff data parameters or 255 255 255 255 for IP addresses NOTE If you select this option you are prompted to verify your action before the system clears the EEPROM
283. ovable media in a directory file named LICENSE TXT or LICENSE TXT If you are unable to locate a copy please contact 3Com and a copy will be provided to you UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGENDS If you are a United States government agency then this documentation and the software described herein are provided to you subject to the following United States Government Legend All technical data and computer software is commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense Software is delivered as Commercial Computer Software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a and as such is provided with only such rights as are provided in 3Com s standard commercial license for the Software Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252 227 7015 Nov 1995 or FAR 52 227 14 June 1987 whichever is applicable You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or documentation contained in or delivered to you in conjunction with guide Unless otherwise indicated 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may not be registered in other countries 3Com and the 3Com logo are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation VCX is a trademark of 3Com Corporation Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries
284. ows you to select a specific date range calendar band such as 1 1 05 to 6 1 06 The calendar time band includes use of the time component This cannot be used in combination with other source based inputs See Managing Calendar Bands 6 Click Save By default the number translation is active Editing Number To edit the pattern properties associated within a number translation Translation Patterns 1 Click Number Translation The Number Translations page appears See Figure 135 Figure 135 Number Translations Page Number Translations Found 2 Translation s Add Number Translation Delete Selected Fitter hs Week Day Pattern Translation Phone 3 Calendar _ E Name Active NamelValue String Indirect Requestor Profile Holiday Day Time Band Action Band Band O nob4 Y sip 6410 Years Delete Day ares Y S508 area s08 1508 151 104 123 50 5060 Delete Prev Page of1 Next 2 This page provides the following editing options Click a name in the Name column The Number Translation page shown in Figure 135 appears displaying the current properties of the selected Number Translation You can modify these properties described in Table 35 Click the pattern name in the Pattern Name Value column The Pattern page shown in Figure 99 appears displaying the current properties of the selected pattern You can modify these properties described in Adding Patterns Note that any modifications are Config
285. p Access the office location of the group whose call coverage you want to configure see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears see Figure 78 Click the Call Coverage link in the Actions column for the appropriate hunt group The Coverage Rules page appears See Figure 79 This page displays the coverage rules in effect for the hunt group or attendant Initially the only coverage rule listed is the default call coverage point Click Add Predefined Coverage Rule The Add Rule Using Predefined Coverage Settings page appears See Figure 81 232 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Figure 81 Add Predefined Coverage Rule Page Hunt Group Add Rule Using Predefined Coverage Settings Coverage Rule Information Name Call Coverage Send to Voice Mail Send to Number Holiday Coverage Settings Date New Years Day Jan1 Event Coverage Settings Date Shutdown May 31 2006 Jun 07 2006 Weekly Coverage Settings Week Days Weekend Sun Sat Day Time Lunch 12 00 13 00 v Save f Cancel Jf Reset Fields marked with an asterisk are required Figure 81 shows several predefined coverage settings
286. pattern or multiple OutDial patterns m To assign one OutDial pattern click Assign in the Action column for the OutDial pattern you want to assign To assign multiple OutDial patterns enter a check mark in the check box preceding each OutDial pattern you want to add then click Assign Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the assignment action 6 Click OK The Route End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns page refreshes showing the assigned OutDial pattern See Figure 115 Figure 115 Route End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns Page Route End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns Route Region2a End Point CallP Primary R2a Found 1 OutDial Pattern s Assign OutDial Patterns _ Unassign Selected EP OutDial Pattern CallP Primary R2a Removeb4 Unassign Prev Page1of1 Next Unassigning an To unassign an OutDial pattern for an end point associated with a route OutDial Pattern for a Route 1 Click Routes The Routes page appears See Figure 109 304 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES 2 In the Actions column for the route click End Points The Route Assigned End Points page appears See Figure 111 In the Action column click OutDia Patterns for the appropriate end point The Route End Point Assigned OutDial Patterns page appears showing any OutDial patterns currently associated with the end point assigned to the route See Figure 115 You can u
287. phone a Model 3102 Business Telephone In this release only English can be rendered in the Large font size Chinese is rendered in the Large font size by default Standard Renders fonts in the default size Large Renders fonts approximately 45 larger than the Standard font size 5 In the Web Login Information section enter the required information using Table 9 as a guide Configuring User Profiles 59 Table 9 Configuring Web Login Information Field Description Weblogin User The web login name defaults to the first letter Name entered for First Name and up to seven letters entered in the Last Name field For example if the First Name field value is Pedro and the Last Name field is Martinez the default web login name is pmartine Note that the default login name is lowercase regardless of the capitalization used in the First Name and Last Name fields You can override the default web login name by entering a different login name for the user Note If the login name is not unique an error message appears Password The web password defaults to changeme for all users You can override the default web login password by entering a different password for the user Confirm Password The web password defaults to changeme for all users If you overrode the default password reenter the new password for verifications Note If the two passwords do not match an error message appears 6 Cl
288. phone B pays for the call Select Whitelist in the Trunk To Trunk Transfer field to allow trunk to trunk call transfers Select Blacklist to block trunk to trunk call transfers Forward to Trunk If enabled users are allowed to forward calls to the PSTN For example a user could configure his or her phone to forward calls to an international location Consequently the user s company pays for the long distance call and not the user Select Whitelist in the Forward To Trunk field to allow call forwarding to the PSTN Select Blacklist to block call forwarding to the PSTN Modifying a Class of You can modify a Class of Service CoS to change the following settings Service The elements assigned to the CoS How elements are applied to inbound and outbound calls the whitelist or blacklist status The Trunk to Trunk Transfer and Forward to Trunk status applied to calls To modify a Class of Service 1 In the USERS menu click Class of Service The Class of Services page appears See Figure 18 2 In the Name column click the name of the CoS you want to modify The Class of Service Elements page appears To add a CoS element a Select an element from the Se ect element to add it to the Class of Service drop down list b Click Assign Configuring Class of Service 69 To delete a CoS element a Inthe Name column locate the element you want to delete b In the Action column click Unassign To enable inbo
289. pplication for example 3Com IP Messaging If your system implements an IP Messaging client server configuration the server and each client must have distinct voice mail access numbers For example an IP Messaging server could have 3 client systems In this case you could configure 1000 as the voice mail access number for the server 2000 as the voice mail access number for the first client 3000 as the voice mail access number for the second client and so on The number you enter depends on whether you want this phone to be associated with the server or one of the clients Number Of Lines Specifies the number of lines available on a phone The default is 3 lines the range is 1 to 12 lines Note that the number of lines available depends on the phone model and how buttons on the phone are mapped see Creating a Button Mapping Template You can use the Number Of Lines field to reduce the number of lines that can be mapped on a phone Managing Phone Profiles 89 Table 12 Add Phone Profile Field Descriptions continued Field Description Inside Ring Tone Specifies the ring tone users hear for phone calls that use Caller ID and originate from within the VCX system Private Ring Tone Specifies the ring tone users hear for phone calls that do not use Caller ID and originate from within the VCX system Outside Ring Tone Specifies the ring tone users hear for phone calls that originate from outside the VCX
290. previously configured through options on the DIRECTORY interface 5 Enter a unique identifier for the rule in the Name field 6 Select a Call Coverage option for this rule a Send to Voice Mail Unanswered calls to the hunt group or attendant are redirected to the group voice mailbox a Send to Number Unanswered calls to the hunt group or attendant are redirected to the specified telephone number or extension for example a receptionist an Auto Attendant or another hunt group If a call coverage is internal another VCX extension enter the extension number If call coverage is external outside the VCX system enter the number as an E 164 number 8475555555 7 Enable the scheduling setting you want this rule to apply a Holiday Coverage Settings Select the holiday a Event Coverage Settings Select a date range Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 233 a Weekly Coverage Settings Select a time and day or days that will be applied weekly Click Save The Coverage Rule s page reappears and the new rule is listed New rules are assigned to the hunt group or attendant and take effect immediately You cannot edit an existing rule for example to adjust the time You must delete the rule and create a new rule with the correct settings Creating a Call Coverage Rule for a Group To create a call coverage rule for a group Access the office location of the group whose call coverage you want to confi
291. ptions for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window 2 Locate the user whose call coverage you want to configure 3 In the Phones column click the Phones link The User Assigned Phones page appears for the selected user See Figure 51 4 In the Actions column click Call Coverage The Coverage Rules page appears See Figure 53 This page displays the coverage rules in effect for the phone Initially the only coverage rule listed is the default call coverage point 5 Click Add Predefined Coverage Rule The Add Rule Using Predefined Coverage Settings page appears See Figure 55 Configuring Call Coverage for a Telephone 175 Figure 55 Add Predefined Coverage Rule Page Phone Add Rule Using Predefined Coverage Settings User Maria A Lopez Phone 641004 Coverage Rule Information Call Coverage Send to Voice Mai Name Send to Number Holiday Coverage Settings Date New Years Day Jan 1 x Event Coverage Settings Date Shutd Week Days Wiee Weekly Coverage Settings Day Time Lun Save Jf Cancel Jf Reset Fields marked with an asterisk are required Figure 55 shows several predefined coverage settings previously configured through options on the DIRECTORY interface If the coverage setting you want to use is not listed you can create it See Creating a Call Coverage Rule for an Extension 6 Enter a unique identifier for the
292. questors Phone Profile Allows you to select a defined phone profile A phone profile includes the IP address for a primary call processor and a secondary call processor as well as other attributes A profile typically applies to a group of phone extensions and therefore allows you to enable number translation based on a group of users The profile can be used in combination with Indirect Requestor Holiday or both See Managing Phone Profiles Holiday Allows you to select a defined holiday This can be used alone or in combination with an indirect requestor or phone profile or both See Managing Holidays Day Band Weekday Band Allows you to select a defined weekday band that represents particular days of the week such as Monday through Friday A Day Time Band and a Weekday Band must be used together but cannot be used in combination with other source based inputs See Managing Week Day Bands Day Time Band Allows you to select a defined day time band that represents a time band within one day for example 0800 1200 hours The granularity is in seconds A Day Time Band and a Weekday Band must be used together but cannot be used in combination with other source based inputs See Managing Day Time Bands 332 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Table 35 Number Translation Menu Descriptions continued Subheadings Field Description Calendar Band Calendar Band All
293. r by clicking the Assign External Phones button Check the box preceding the phone extension or extensions that will be allowed to monitor this user Click Assign Selected A confirmation window appears Click OK The Silent Monitor and Barge In Assigned Phones page appears The feature settings are applied to that user s phone 170 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER To remove a phone extension from the Silent Monitor and Barge In Assigned Phones page follow steps 1 and 2 then Check the box preceding the phone extension for each user you want to remove from the monitoring list 2 Click Delete Selected 3 Aconfirmation window appears Click OK to remove the user Configuring Call Coverage fora Telephone Incoming calls that are not answered or cannot be answered because the destination is busy or unreachable follow a specific call coverage pattern Call coverage determines how a call is routed when a phone is not answered Every phone extension has a default coverage point to handle unanswered calls There are three default call coverage options a Calls can be redirected to the phone s voice mailbox this is the default a Calls can be redirected to a telephone number extension or auto attendant a Calls are not redirected The caller hears a busy tone or the phone continues to ring until the caller hangs up Note that if call fallback is enabled voice mail is the only valid call
294. r Translations page appears listing all the currently configured translation patterns See Figure 100 You can delete one translation pattern or multiple patterns a To delete one pattern click Delete in the Action column for the translation pattern entry you want to delete a To delete multiple patterns enter a check mark in the check box preceding each translation pattern you want to delete then click Delete Selected 268 CHAPTER 9 CONFIGURING DIAL PLANS PATTERNS AND DIAL RULES A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the delete action 4 Click OK The Number Translations page appears and the deleted pattern or patterns are no longer listed 10 gt CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES This chapter describes how to use the VCX Administrator web interface to manage routes end points patterns outdial patterns requestors time bands and number translation This chapter includes the following topics Accessing the DIRECTORY Interface Route Plan Configuration Requirements Using the Route Plan Wizard Configuring Patterns DIRECTORY Managing End Points Managing Routes Managing Route Plans Managing Requestors Managing OutDial Patterns Managing Holidays Managing Week Day Bands Managing Day Time Bands Managing Calendar Bands Configuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY Be sure to set your Web browser preferences so that the cache is
295. r own See Mapping Features to Telephone Buttons for more information The configured Type of Service names are added to a drop down menu when you configure a phone profile see Managing Phone Extensions If you modify the ToS assigned through a phone profile to a set of phone extensions VCX software compares the features of the old ToS with the features of the new ToS a f the new ToS includes a feature that was configured in the old ToS configuration information is retained For example users will not lose configured personal speed dial numbers as long as the new ToS includes the speed dial feature a Features that are in the new ToS but not in the old ToS must of course be configured 74 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES a Features that were in the old ToS but are not in the new ToS are removed and configuration information is deleted a Button mapping on each phone will be reset according to the new ToS and its corresponding button mapping template This means that any user customized button mapping will be lost when the new ToS is applied Adding a Type of To add a Type of Service Service 1 In the USERS menu click Type of Service The Type Of Services page appears See Figure 21 Figure 21 Types of Service List Page Type of Services Found 6 Type of Service s Prev Page1of1 Next Name a Status Actions Delete Default Type Of Senice Delete No CFU Delete Enter the n
296. r the following field information Name Enter a unique name to identify this calendar band Start Date From the drop down lists select the starting Month Date Year Hour Minute and Second for the calendar band The time drop down lists use military time for example 0 equals 12 00 00 AM midnight and 23 00 00 equals 11 00 00 PM a End Date From the drop down lists select the ending Month Date Year Hour Minute and Second for the calendar band The drop down lists use military time for example O equals 12 00 00 AM midnight and 23 00 00 equals 11 00 00 PM Editing Calendar Bands Deleting Calendar Bands 1 1 Managing Calendar Bands 327 Click Save The Calendar Bands page appears listing the added calendar band To edit a calendar band Click Calendar Band s The Calendar Bands page appears See Figure 131 In the Name column click the name of the calendar band you want to modify The Edit Calendar Band page appears Modify the fields as required See the field descriptions in Adding Calendar Bands Click Save The Calendar Bands page appears To delete calendar bands Click Calendar Band s The Calendar Bands page appears See Figure 131 You can delete one calendar band or multiple calendar bands a To delete one calendar band click Delete in the Action column for the calendar band entry you want to delete a To delete multiple calendar bands enter a check mark in the check
297. rage plan for the extension As described in Configuring Call Coverage for a Telephone a call coverage plan consists of coverage rules Each rule is based on a date day or time event 174 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER You have two options when assigning a call coverage rule to an extension a You can assign a predefined coverage rule This option allows you to select coverage settings previously configured through options on the DIRECTORY interface and are available to all phone extensions configured on this server These options are described in Chapter 10 and include a Coverage rules based on a holiday See Managing Holidays Coverage rules based on the day of the week See Managing Week Day Bands a Coverage rules based on a time range See Managing Day Time Bands Coverage rules based on a date or date range See Managing Calendar Bands a You can create a call coverage rule for this phone extension A rule created for an individual extension is by default not available to other extensions Adding a Predefined Call Coverage Rule for an Extension To add a predefined call coverage rule for a phone extension 1 Access the office location of the user whose call coverage you want to configure see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu o
298. ransfer destination becomes available the transferred caller is reconnected with the transferring caller The default Camp On Return Interval is 150 seconds 2 2 minutes The range of valid values is 30 to 300 seconds Camp On Callback Timeout Determines how long a caller who initiated Camp On waits for a return call from an unavailable destination If the Camp On Callback Timeout value elapses before automatic callback from the called party occurs the Camp On operation is canceled The default Camp On Callback Timeout value is 1800 seconds 30 minutes The range of valid values is 300 to 3600 seconds 5 to 60 minutes To change the default Camp On Return Interval or Camp On Callback Timeout values From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Camp On The Camp On Configuration page appears See Figure 63 194 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES Figure 63 Camp On Configuration Parameters Camp On Configuration Camp On Parameters Return Interval seconds h50 Callback Timeout seconds 1800 Fields marked with an asterisk are required 3 Click in text box for the parameter you want to change and enter the new value As des
299. rce based routing and specify the IP address of the foreign call processor as the indirect requestor See Configuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY Modifying a User s Phone Settings The following options are configured as part of the profile assigned to a phone see Creating a Phone Profile a Date and time formats a Ring tones for call waiting inside private and outside calls 108 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES a Call fallback Each user can reconfigure through the VCX User web interface these settings for an assigned phone As an administrator you can override a user s settings for these options To modify a user s phone settings 1 In the USERS menu click Users on the left side of the page The Users page appears listing all current users See Figure 30 Locate the user whose phone settings you want to modify In the Phone column click the Phones link for the user The User Assigned Phones page appears See Figure 31 This page lists all the extensions currently assigned to the user 4 In the Actions column click Settings The User Phone Settings page appears See Figure 34 Figure 34 User Phone Settings Page User Phone Settings User Maria A Lopez Phone 641004 Date Time Display Format MMM dd HH mm Local Time Zone x GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US and Canada Observe Daylight Savings Inside Ring Tone Ring Tone 1 Single Outside Ri
300. rching through global directory 50 unassigning phone extensions 105 viewing 55 Users interface accessing 54 V VCX Administrator provisioning application 28 accessing 29 VCX servers and constituent services 18 configuration options 18 multi site options 19 single site options 19 VCX services and related VCX servers 18 described 16 VCX system configuration tasks 21 hardware components configuration options 19 overview 16 software components 16 configuration options 17 version number software 152 157 350 INDEX viewing call history for phones 115 call restrictions 115 phone registrations 110 users 55 W web session timer modifying 35 week day bands adding 320 deleting 322 editing 322 managing 320 wizard route plan 308 Z zone paging 213
301. redundant VCX servers a Inasingle pair system both servers run the VCX IP Telephony and IP Messaging software configuration Each server has an IP address for its call processor and IP Messaging module a Ina two pair system one pair of servers runs the call processing software and the second pair runs IP Messaging software Each server in the first pair has an IP address for its call processor Each server in the second pair has an IP address for its IP Messaging module Route Plan Configuration Requirements 273 In both cases one server in the pair is designated the primary and the other server is designated the secondary In a single site system you need to configure end points routes patterns and route plans on the primary server running call processing software a You need to create end points that identify the other call processor and the IP Messaging modules a You need to define routes containing the appropriate call processor and IP Messaging end points m You need to define one or more dial string patterns A pattern identifies the dial string prefix used by an end point A pattern is associated with a route and indicates which end point should receive a call You need to create route plans associate a route with a dial string pattern on both call processing servers This enables each call processor to route a dialed number to the correct destination end point Example For example a VCX single site syst
302. rimary Network Call Processor This information is typically provided by using DHCP option 184 You can however enter the IP address manually See the description for Configure IP Address above for information on entering IP data 3Com Telephone Local User Interface Menus 159 Table 21 Manager s Telephone LUI Menu Items continued Menu Option Description Advanced Settings Displays the following menu options Set NCP MAC Address Not used in a VCX network Show EEPROM Contents Lets you scroll through the locations in the memory of the telephone The information is presented in hexadecimal format and can be properly interpreted only by a 3Com service person Set EEPROM Default Restores the phone to default settings by clearing these configured settings a IP Information Phone IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP and the NCP IP return to 255 255 255 255 a NCP MAC address The NCP MAC address returns to fff ffff fff SIP Parameters All SIP specific parameters will be set to default Oxffff data parameters or 255 255 255 255 for IP addresses NOTE If you select this option you are prompted to verify your action before the system clears the EEPROM Force Operational SW Upgrade Forces the phone to download the latest operational software from the NCP Hardware Reset Resets the phone You can perform the same task by disconnecting then reconnecting power to the phone Ping H3 IP
303. rom outside the VCX system the PSTN Call Waiting Ring Tone Specifies what a user hears when the user is busy with one call and new a call arrives You can select one of the following options a One of the 27 available ring tones one ring cycle only played through the phone s speaker a Ringer Disabled No ring tone played Beep Speaker A double beep is played on the speaker only Beep Active Device A double beep is played on the active listening device handset headset or speaker This setting can also be configured for multiple phones by you see Creating a Phone Profile or by a user through the VCX User interface 110 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Table 14 User Phone Settings Page Options continued Field Description Call Fallback Click Save When checked Call Fallback is enabled Call Fallback works with the call coverage setting configured for a phone If a phone forwards calls to another number and that number does not pick up the call the call is routed to the call coverage point if that coverage point is voice mail The fallback option does not apply to other coverage points See Configuring Call Coverage for a Telephone For example phone A is configured to forward unanswered calls to phone B A call arrives at A is not answered and is forwarded to B B does not answer In this case the call falls back to A s call coverage point
304. rs page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Configuring Call Pickup Groups 211 2 Click Call Pickup Groups The Call Pickup Groups page appears 3 Click Add Call Pickup Group The Add Call Pickup Group page appears See Figure 69 Figure 69 Add Call Pickup Group Page Add Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Group Information Group Name Group Address Global Pickup Allowed Save Cancel Reset Petanbel Wiateatieteiis Uhindi Fields marked with an asterisk are required 4 In the Group Name field enter an alpha numeric identifier for the new group 5 In the Group Address field enter a phone extension When a group member hears another group member s phone ring the member dials the Group Address extension to answer the call The value must be unique duplicate Group Address values are not allowed Note that you or the user can map a telephone button to the Call feature and specify the extension as the number to call When a group member hears another group member s phone ring the member can press the button mapped to the Group Address instead of dialing the extension 6 The Global Pickup Allowed check box is disabled by default When a call rings on a member s phone only other phones that are members of the group can answer the call If you want to allow phones that are not members of t
305. rule in the Name field 7 Select a Call Coverage option for this rule Send to Voice Mail Unanswered calls to the phone extension are redirected to the group voice mailbox If Call Fallback is enabled for the extension this is the only valid call coverage option see page 173 Send to Number Unanswered calls to the phone extension are redirected to the specified telephone number or extension for example a receptionist an Auto Attendant or another phone extension If call coverage is internal another VCX extension enter the extension If call coverage is external outside the VCX system enter as an E 164 number 8475555555 8 Enable the scheduling setting you want this rule to apply Holiday Coverage Settings Select the holiday 176 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER a Event Coverage Settings Select a date range a Weekly Coverage Settings Select a time and day or days that will be applied weekly 9 Click Save The Coverage Rule s page reappears and the new rule is listed New rules are assigned to the phone extension and take effect immediately You cannot edit a predefined rule for example to adjust the time You must delete the rule and either assign a different predefined rule or create a rule for the extension with the correct settings Creating a Call Coverage Rule for an Extension To create a call coverage rule for a phone extension 1 Access the office lo
306. rvice is designed to run on redundant servers so if the primary server fails the secondary server can take over processing However during installation specific software services may or may not be enabled in a given software configuration For example the Call Records Service is designed to run on a single hardware platform In single site configurations the Call Records Service is enabled on the primary IP Telephony and Messaging or primary IP Telephony server only VCX Hardware This section briefly describes the basic hardware configurations that Configurations support VCX systems Refer to the VCX Installation Guide for more information Because VCX system software can be installed in a wide variety of hardware configurations you must understand how your VCX system has been installed before you configure its components Single Site Configurations Multi Site Configurations VCX Hardware Configurations 19 There are two basic configuration options single site and multi site systems The hardware servers in each option type run the VCX operating system Currently supported hardware platforms include as 7000 series systems with IBM X306m or IBM X346 servers m 6000 Integrated Branch Communications servers m 6100 Integrated Branch Communications servers The next two sections describe typical examples of single site and multi site configurations This section describes two possible single site configurations One Pair of Servers
307. ry ROSCA IP Address or Hostname to Delete prompt appears Enter the IP address of the primary server at the remote regional office in this example the Chicago office that you want to remove A confirmation prompt appears asking you to confirm removal Enter y to delete the regional office directory The Chicago regional office user directory will be deleted from the Boston office s global directory when the user directory databases resynchronize either automatically or manually You can use the config sh script to list all of the peer regional offices whose user directories can be viewed on the server you are logged on to You can also list the host regional office of a branch office Listing Peer Regional Offices from a Regional Office In the following example the Boston office is configured to view the user directories on regional offices in Chicago and Los Angeles Configuring Data Collection Frequency The Global Directory 43 To list all of the peer regional offices whose user directories can be viewed on the Boston office Log on to the primary VCX server in Boston using the cworks account and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata globaldir bin config sh The SELECT OPERATION prompt appears At the prompt enter 103 The config sh script lists the details for the Chicago and Los Angeles regional offices Press Enter If there is more than one regional office the next one is listed otherwise you
308. s VCX Configuration Tasks describes the general tasks required to add users assign phones to users and enable communication between devices on your VCX system VCX Software Components This section describes the individual software components in a VCX system A VCX system includes the following software services a Call Processor Performs call processing functions and generates Call Detail Records CDRs VCX Software Components 17 a Authentication and Directory Service Performs the following tasks a Authentication Authentication for example validating a username and password Authorization for example verifying a user is allowed to make an international call User specific routing or translation for example processes a personal speed dial number a Directory routing and translation functions The routing function identifies selects and prioritizes all the possible routes for a given call The translation function manipulates the access number or URI as a call propagates through the system a Accounting Service Sends exports and manages CDRs a SIP Phone Downloader Loads an application image on to a 3Com phone which enables SIP support on the phone a Common Agent Connects other software components and the VCX server operating system to the Enterprise Management Suite EMS or other SNMP based network management tools a Provisioning Service Provides a web based us
309. s Icon Notice Type ist conventions that are used throughout this guide Description instructions D gt Information note Information that describes important features or f Caution h Warning Information that alerts you to potential loss of data or potential damage to an application system or device Information that alerts you to potential personal injury Table 2 Text Conventions Convention Description Screen displays This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen Syntax The word syntax means that you must evaluate the syntax provided and then supply the appropriate values for the placeholders that appear in angle brackets Example To enable RIPIP use the following syntax SETDefault lt port gt RIPIP CONTrol Listen In this example you must supply a port number for lt port gt Commands The word command means that you must enter the command exactly as shown and then press Return or Enter Commands appear in bold Example To remove the IP address enter the following command SETDefault 0 IP NETaddr 0 0 0 0 Words in italics Italics are used to a Emphasize a point Denote a new term at the place where it is defined in the text m Identify menu names menu commands and software button names Examples From the Help menu select Contents Click OK Related Documentation 13 Related Documentation These 3Com documents
310. s a Configuring Dial Plans a Configuring Dial Rules Configuring Patterns USERS Configuring Number Translation USERS All of the phone features described in this chapter are configured through VCX Administrator provisioning application menu options available on the USERS interface See Accessing the User Configuration Interface Be sure to set your Web browser preferences so that the cache is updated whenever you modify or view a new web page 254 CHAPTER 9 CONFIGURING DIAL PLANS PATTERNS AND DIAL RULES Configuring Dial Plans Adding Dial Plans 1 Dial plans consist of individual or grouped dial rules Dial rules determine what sequence of numbers a user is allowed to dial For example you can create a dial plan that includes dial rules that allow a user to dial 4 digit extensions starting with 1 or 2 If the user dials less than 4 numbers more than 4 numbers or the dial string does not start with a 1 or a 2 the call is not processed When you create a dial plan the dial plan name is added to the Dial Plan drop down menu on the phone profile configuration page see Managing Phone Profiles Your VCX system includes a set of dial rules and dial plans You can create your own dial plans that include system supplied dial rules Or you can create dial plans that include customized dial rules However you must create the dial rules before you can add them to a dial plan see Adding Dial Rules To add
311. s O Group Page ro Phones Address Clone Delete O Hany Schult schultz Phones Address Clone Delete O Jack Bauer Phones Address Clone Delete Jean Martin Phones Address Clone Delete O Maria ALopez Phones Address Clone Delete i Prev Page ia of1 Next 2 Locate the user to whom you want to assign a phone extension 3 In the Phones column click the Phones link for the user The User Assigned Phones page appears See Figure 31 This page lists all the extensions if any currently assigned to the user Figure 31 User Assigned Phones Page User Assigned Phones User Maria A Lopez Found 1 Phone s Assign Phones Unassign Selected Delete Selected DOE Display Name YE n E li Phone Address Display Name Phone Profile MAC Status Actions Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Call Restrictions 641004 Lopez Maria Default Enabled Realstrations Call History Selective Ringing Bridge Permissions Bridged Phones Hunt Groups Settings Unassign Delete Prev Page 1 of1 Next 4 Click Assign Phones The User Unassigned Phones page appears listing all the phone extensions that have not been assigned See Figure 32 104 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Figure 32 User Unassigned Phones Page User Unassigned Phones User Maria A Lopez Found 1 Phone s Assign Selected Cancel LCE Name a Phone Address a Phone Profile E 641000 New User Default Prev Page 1 al of 1 Next 5 Y
312. s and their branch offices See Configuring Routes on a Branch Office and Configuring a Route from a Regional Office to a Branch Office To enable user access to IP Messaging services see Route Configuration for Voicemail and Music on Hold Configuring Routes on a Branch Office In a multi site system that includes branch offices each branch must include a route to its regional call processor This enables branch users to make calls to destinations outside of the branch including calls to users at the regional office at other regional offices at other branch offices and to users on the PSTN Branch office users may also call users on the PSTN through a media gateway located at the branch office for example if the branch office has a 3Com V6000 Branch Office Gateway system Route Plan Configuration Requirements 279 This example describes how to create routes on a branch call processor hosted by region 1 The example uses the following multi site system a Ria identifies the primary call processor in region 1 a R1b identifies the secondary call processor in region 1 a R2a identifies the primary call processor in region 2 a R2b identifies the secondary call processor in region 2 a B1R1 identifies the branch call processor hosted by region 1 a B1R1Gw identifies the media gateway at the branch office To configure a route from a branch office to its host regional office Access the server you want to manage i
313. s automatically created on the IP Messaging system The mailbox number is the same as the phone extension The Create Mailbox and Call Fallback fields are enabled by default so that unanswered calls will by default be forwarded to voicemail 3Com Corporation recommends that you always ensure this check box is enabled a If you initially disable this check box and later enable it users may be unable to access voicemail by pressing the message button on their phones a If you initially enable this check box and later disable it when users press the message button the phone display panel will show Server error no VM The mailbox still exists but is not accessible Default Phone Profile When checked designates this phone profile as the default While not required a default profile can specify general default phone profile settings Only one phone profile can be designated as the default and the default profile cannot be deleted You can however clear this check box if you want to remove the default designation This allows you to delete the phone profile or designate another profile as the default Managing Phone Profiles 91 4 Click Save The Phone Profiles page appears and the new profile is listed You can now add phones to your VCX system and assign them to the phone profile see Managing Phone Extensions Editing a Phone You can modify the settings in an active phone profile This allows you to Pro
314. s four levels of access Each access level is also referred to as an administrative role The username and default password for each access level role is shown in Table 5 Table 5 Usernames and Default Passwords for VCX Administrator Provisioning Application Access Username Password admin besgroup dir besgroup user besgroup manager besgroup 3Com Corporation strongly recommends for security reasons that the default passwords not be retained To change the default passwords log on as root to the server hosting the Authentication and Directory service and enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX tomcat scripts admincfg This script generates the following prompts This script will change the admin user information Enter the password for dir Enter the password for manager Enter the password for user Enter the password for admin Do you want to apply your changes Y N Y Changes have been applied For your changes to take effect you must restart tomcat Do you want to restart tomcat now Y N Y Restarting tomcat At the password prompt for each access role dir manager user and admin enter a new password and press Enter To retain the existing default password just press Enter About VCX Administrator Passwords 25 When prompted to apply the changes and restart Tomcat you must enter Y uppercase Y Any other entry for example lower case y or yes will cancel the changes 2
315. s page appears Enter a check mark in the check box preceding the emergency number you want to delete Click Delete Selected A pop up window appears prompting you to confirm the emergency number delete action Click OK The Emergency Numbers page refreshes verifying that the emergency number was deleted To edit an Emergency Gateway IP Address for the ERL CAUTION If Emergency service settings or emergency lines are changed for example the gateway IP address or emergency digits they will not take effect until the telephones are power cycled A simple logout login of the telephone is not adequate In the USERS menu click Emergency Services The Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services page appears From the Location Settings column click Emergency Gateway IP for the ERL you want to configure Deleting Emergency Gateway IP Addresses from an ERL Configuring Emergency Services 139 The Emergency Gateway IP Addresses page appears In the P Address column click the IP address you want to edit The Edit Gateway IP page appears In the Gateway IP Address field enter the IP address of the gateway Click Save The Emergency Gateway IP Addresses page refreshes showing the emergency gateway To delete an Emergency Gateway IP Address from an ERL In the USERS menu click Emergency Services The Emergency Defaults and Emergency Services page appears From the Location Settings column click Emergency Gateway IP
316. s telephone 150 3101 Basic telephone 149 3102 Business telephone 148 3103 Manager s telephone 155 A access roles 24 31 admin 32 dir 33 manager 32 user 32 accessing the LUI 146 Accounting service 17 adding anonymous call restrictions 112 attendant console 124 bridge mappings for an extension 185 bridge permission for an extension 182 calendar bands 325 call restrictions 113 class of service 66 day time bands 323 dial plans 254 dial rules 258 emergency defaults 135 end points 291 ERL 131 holidays 318 MAC address 121 outdial patterns for routes 302 outdial patterns to end points 295 phone features 162 phones 95 requestors 316 route plans 305 type of service 74 user directory to global directory 39 user extensions to a hunt group 236 users 56 week day bands 320 address IP Call Processor 152 157 gateway 152 157 viewing 152 address MAC specifying from a telephone 157 viewing from a telephone 152 viewing in telephone diagnostics 152 157 anonymous call restrictions 112 application access 31 attendant console adding 124 busy lamp flash 129 configuring 122 deleting 128 feature buttons 123 Attendant Serial Calling 123 attendant console button 123 attendants 221 call coverage default 227 scheduled 227 scheduling night coverage 228 See also hunt groups Authentication and Directory service 17 basic telephones accessing the LUI 145 branch office accessing through Central Manager 29 branch offices listin
317. s through either the DIRECTORY interface or the USERS interface A pattern configured through the DIRECTORY interface also appears on the USERS interface A pattern configured through the USERS interface also appears on the DIRECTORY interface The Patterns menu option on both pages displays the same set of configuration pages only the access point is different To add edit and delete patterns From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add a pattern see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears Managing End Points Adding End Points Managing End Points 291 2 Click DIRECTORY 1 The DIRECTORY interface page appears See Figure 103 Click Patterns The Patterns page appears See Figure 98 Click Patterns The Patterns page appears See Figure 98 To add a pattern follow the directions in Adding Patterns To modify a pattern follow the directions in Editing Patterns To delete a pattern follow the directions in Deleting Patterns CAUTION Most of the patterns shown in Figure 98 are provided by VCX software including patterns for the emergency numbers 911 and 9911 If your country does not use 911 emergency dialing you must ensure that a dial pattern and dial plan exist for your emergency number and that the dial plan is included in the phone profile assigned to your users extensions See Configuring Emergency
318. s voice mailbox this is the default 228 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS a Calls can be redirected to a telephone number or extension In addition to the default call coverage point you can create a coverage plan for a hunt group or attendant A coverage plan consists of coverage rules A rule specifies the call coverage point voice mailbox or number to which unanswered calls should be redirected based on a specific date day of the week or time For example you can configure a coverage rule that specifies unanswered calls on weekends be redirected to another telephone number The following types of scheduled coverage rules are available listed in order of priority One time events You can configure a rule for a one time event that lasts for a single day multiple days or part of a day a Repeating events You can configure a rule for events that repeat on a weekly basis These events span one day or less a Default coverage You can assign multiple coverage rules to a hunt group or attendant each rule covering a different time window event However one time events cannot overlap and repeating events cannot overlap In a multi site VCX environment hunt group or calling group members can be located in different time zones Scheduled coverage rules are executed within the time zone provisioned for the hunt group see Table 26 not according to hunt group member location You can enable night service or night a
319. scribed in step 4 146 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS Accessing the Manager s Telephone LUI Menus For telephones that use a powered Ethernet cable instead of a power adapter reconnect the Ethernet cable To start or exit from the LUI utility m On the 3Com 3102 Business Telephone press the Program button Ba m On 3Com 2102 and 2102 IR Business Telephones press the Program button lt m On 3Com 3101 or 3101SP Basic Telephones press the Select button the center button in the cursor control button group a On the 3Com 2101 Basic Telephone press the MSG button The telephone Display Panel shows the LUI utility See LUI Configuration Options for Business and Basic Telephones for a description of the configuration menu options See Business and Basic Telephone Interfaces for a description of the buttons you use to enter configuration information You can access the LUI utility on the 3Com 3103 Manager s Telephone when the phone is connected to or disconnected from the VCX network To access the LUI utility when the Manager s Telephone is disconnected from the network a Disconnect the power connector b Unplug the network Ethernet cable c Reconnect the power connector The 3103 Display Panel shows the following message Business and Basic Telephone Interfaces 3Com Telephone Local User Interface Menus 147 No Network Connection Please Connect Cable or Press Featur
320. sed on the model of the phone a An IP address that establishes the phone as an IP device and allows it to communicate with other IP devices using the Session Initiation Protocol SIP The phone will automatically receive an IP address only if your network includes a DHCP server configured with Option 184 If DHCP is not available you must manually configure IP address information on the phone When the download process finishes the phone prompts for the following information m The extension that other phones will dial to communicate with the phone The extension is associated with an account that identifies the user who can use the phone a A password the user enters to log in to the phone Initial telephone configuration including DHCP setup is described in the VCX Installation Guide This chapter describes how to use the LUI to view and change current settings for all supported VCX telephone models If a VCX release includes new phone application or boot code all VCX phones connected to the system will upgrade automatically Every 30 minutes each phone sends a message to the Call Server that includes the software version running on the phone If a different version has been installed on the server then a code download to the phone is initiated 3Com Telephone Local User Interface Menus 145 3Com Telephone Local User Interface Menus Accessing the Business and Basic Telephone LUI Menus The firmware within each 3Com
321. ser s Phone Settings The other options in the Actions column Features Call Coverage Button Mappings Bridge Permissions and Bridged Phones are described in Chapter 6 This section describes how to remove one or more phone extensions assigned to a user Note that if an assigned user extension belongs to a group for example a hunt group or has an association with another phone for example is bridged to another extension you must delete the membership or remove the association before you can unassign the extension VCX 106 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES User Roaming Services software generates a warning message if it cannot unassign an extension To unassign a phone extension In the USERS menu click Users on the left side of the page The Users page appears listing all current users See Figure 30 2 Locate the user whose phone extension you want to unassign 3 In the Phone column click the Phone link for the user The User Assigned Phones page appears See Figure 31 This page lists all the extensions currently assigned to the user You can unassign one or more phone extensions Tounassign one extension click Unassign in the Actions column for the extension you want to unassign Tounassign multiple extensions enter a check mark in the check box preceding each phone extension you want to unassign and click Unassign Selected The User Assigned Phones page appears sho
322. sers from changing it a Unlock the feature to button mapping to allow users to change it However some features System Appearance lines for example are locked by default and cannot be unlocked unless you remap the button to a different feature To modify a button mapping template 1 From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window 2 Click Button Mappings 202 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING GLOBAL TELEPHONE FEATURES The Button Mappings List page appears 3 Click the name of the template you want to edit The Edit Button Mappings page appears See Figure 67 4 Click the drop down list for the button whose feature you want to change and select a new feature see Mappable Features On Models 2102 and 3102 you can specify the number of lines available to a phone by mapping buttons to the System Appearance feature maximum of 3 lines for the Model 2102 maximum of 9 lines for the Model 3102 You can map any button as a System Appearance line however multiple lines must be mapped to consecutive buttons You cannot map System Appearance lines on the Model 3103 phone Note that the number of lines available for mapping can be restricted by the value specified in the phone profile assigned to a ph
323. sers page click Delete Selected The Users page refreshes showing the new list of users Viewing the Phone Book gt The Phone Book option lists every user and their associated extension or extensions configured on the currently accessed server This display is for informational purposes and cannot be modified Only phones the administrator has allowed to be seen in the Phone Book appear To change whether or not a phone can be seen modify the Exclude from LCD Directory field on the phone configuration page see Managing Phone Extensions To view all the phones configured on a host server click Phone Book Note that a user is not listed until you assign a phone to that user The Phone Book page appears See Figure 17 You can edit phone attributes by clicking a phone number in the Phone Address column See Modifying a Phone Extension a You can edit user attributes by clicking a name in the First Name or Last Name column See Editing User Profiles Configuring Class of Service 65 Figure 17 Phone Book Page Phone Book Found 9 Phone s BEEN Phone Assess VI Phone Address a First Name Last Name Location ea io ae a io io 2e pa i gt w i 641004 Maria Lopez 641005 Ming Lee 641011 Group Page im i ho D iS im ia E im rE i Ino Q D ic io fy j gt gt o at io 641202 Wendy Freeman 641203 Harry Schultz 641205 Jack
324. sion Timeout Value To summarize the four VCX Administrator provisioning application access roles admin Provides access to the USERS menu options and the DIRECTORY menu options dir Provides access to the DIRECTORY menu options but not the USERS menu options user Provides access to all the USERS menu options but not the DIRECTORY menu options manager Provides access to a subset of the USERS menu options 34 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY Using the Graphical User Interface This section describes the common set of interface options used on VCX provisioning pages Some pages display currently configured values For example Figure 5 shows the Phone Book page which lists every user and extension configured on the server Figure 5 Phone Book Page Phone Book Found 9 Phone s EEE Phone Address vy Phone Address a First Name Last Name Location 641001 Jean Martin 641004 Maria Lopez 641005 Ming Lee 641011 Group Page im rE i n gt Io im iQ Kell Annette Freeman Hari Schultz 641205 Jack Bauer Prev Page of1 Next im rE i Ino Io Q D ic io fy im Es i n gt f In io io im Ee i n gt ia Note the following interface options m An underlined Next button not shown in Figure 5 indicates the interface cannot display all the entries on a single page Click Next to display the nex
325. t Group or Attendant The order in which user extensions are added to a group determines the order in which phones ring within the group however you can later rearrange the ringing sequence see Reconfiguring the Ring Sequence of Group Members Group hunt group and attendant configuration is subject to the following limits a Each site can can support a maximum of 100 groups a Each group can support a maximum of 75 members a An extension can a member of a maximum of 25 groups Also see Configuring the Message Waiting Indicator for Hunt Group Members for additional configuration information To add local user extensions to a hunt group or attendant From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 237 2 Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears See Figure 83 Figure 83 Hunt Groups Page Hunt Groups Found 1 Hunt Group s Add Hunt Group Delete Selected i Group Name a Group Address Actions O Service 641010 Phones Call Coverage Status Delete Prev Page of1 Next 3 Locate the row containing the group you want to configure and click Phones in the Actions column The Hunt Group Assigned Pho
326. t Groups page reappears listing the assigned group See Figure 87 Figure 87 Phone Assigned Hunt Groups Page Group Added Phone Assigned Hunt Groups Phone 631001 Found 2 Hunt Group s Assign External Hunt Groups Assign Hunt Groups Unassign Selected DEE cou name Y ul Group Name a Group Address Site Name Action Fj sales 631199 Regional Office 1 Unassign Fi Service 641010 Regional Office 2 Unassign Prev Page of1 Next Note The Groups marked with are External Groups Notice that the assigned hunt group or attendant is flagged as an external group Removing local user extensions from a hunt group or attendant only excludes them from the group it does not delete the user and their associated phones To remove users from a hunt group or attendant From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears Locate the row containing the group you want to configure and click Phones in the Actions column The Hunt Group Assigned Phones page appears see Figure 84 listing current members of the group Do one of the following 242 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Removing Remote User Extensions from a Hunt Group or Att
327. t are next to each extension on the attendant console to indicate the state of a user s telephone a When a BLF light is off the user s phone is not busy on hook and available a When a BLF light is on the user s phone is busy off hook and in use Configuring Emergency Services An Emergency Response Location ERL is a location to which an emergency team may be dispatched Depending on its size a VCX system may be organized into multiple ERLs For example in a multi building campus you could define an ERL for each floor in each building In this case all the phones uniquely identified by an assigned IP address on a floor would be members of a unique ERL When a phone assigned to an ERL dials the configured emergency number a callback number is presented as the caller ID to the Emergency Services Operator The presented number is either the ERL s default emergency callback phone number or an Emergency Location Identification Number ELIN A set of ELINs can be assigned to each ERL This pool of ELINs allows multiple phones within an ERL to dial the emergency number and be assigned a unique callback number an ELIN When a caller dials the emergency number an ELIN is associated with the IP address of the phone The Emergency Services Operator can use the ELIN to call back the emergency caller Normally an ELIN remains in use cannot be assigned to a new caller unless the Emergency Services Operator hangs up befor
328. t member in the list Route call to the member following the member to whom the last call was routed Ring all member phones Total timeout reached gt Attendants Configuring a Hunt Group or Attendant Go to call coverage Go to call coverage Go to call coverage Hunt Group calls routed to a call coverage point always go to the point configured for the Hunt Group not to the point configured for or by the Hunt Group member that is the member s personal call coverage point If the member has Do Not Disturb enabled personal non Hunt Group calls go to the call coverage point However Hunt Group calls always ring on a member s phone regardless of the Do Not Disturb setting In addition to hunt groups you can use the VCX hunt group configuration menu options to configure attendant call coverage An attendant is typically responsible for answering and redirecting calls to a company division or department main telephone number Attendant responsibilities may be handled by one person for example a operator or administrative assistant or by multiple people This section provides information on how to configure a hunt group or attendant When you create a hunt group or attendant you specify the extension callers dial to access the group or attendant VCX software automatically creates the extension and an associated voice mailbox 222 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS You need the following IP Messagin
329. t page Click Previous to return to the previous page By default a page that has multiple entries can list 12 entries Depending on your monitor you may want to list more or less than 12 entries on a page To change the number of entries displayed on a page click PREFERENCES see Figure 4 then click Page Size The page size range is a minimum of 2 entries up to a maximum of 500 entries m The underlined column headers in Figure 5 indicate that you can sort the listed entries by clicking a column name The entries in Figure 5 are sorted by Phone Address extension To sort the entries by last name click the Last Name column header a You can also search for a particular entry by selecting a search option in the Filter drop down list Extension First Name Last Name or Location Then enter the appropriate search criteria in the Filter text box and click Go Modifying the Web Session Timeout Value Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager 35 On pages that accept configuration information fields marked with an asterisk indicate required fields For example Figure 6 shows the Add User page The asterisk preceding the First Name field indicates you must enter a field value The Title field does not have an asterisk indicating that this field is optional If you skip a required field and click Save the interface displays a warning indicating you cannot omit a required field Figure 6 User Add Page Add User Person
330. ted For a server hosting the Accounting service the default path is opt 3com VCX acctxml db export For a Call Records Server the default path is opt 3com VCX bssxml data defaultGroup outbox The VCX supplied Accounting service group defaultGroup is specified by default However this group by default contains no Accounting services and is disabled see the VCX Maintenance Guide IPMSG Server Login 5 Click OK User Name Specifies the username of the account used to access the directory on the IP Messaging server to which CDRs are written The default is app Password Specifies the password of the account used to access the directory on the IP Messaging server to which CDRs are written The default is nice Remote Directory Specifies the default path on the IP Messaging server where CDRs are located The default directory is usr app app dir vmcdr dir 342 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING THE CALL REPORTS APPLICATION Uninstalling the To uninstall the Call Reports application Call Reports Application 1 From the Start menu click Control Panel The Control Panel window appears 2 Click Add or Remove Programs The Add or Remove Programs window appears 3 From the Currently installed programs column select 3Com VCX Call Reports 4 Click Change Remove 5 Click OK The program uninstalls If prompted reboot your computer INDEX Numerics 2101 Basic telephone 151 2102 Busines
331. ted to the specified telephone number or extension for example a receptionist an Auto Attendant or another phone extension If call coverage is internal another VCX extension enter the extension If call coverage is external outside the VCX system enter as an E 164 number 8475555555 8 Edit the exiting scheduling setting for the rule or create a different setting Holiday Coverage Settings Configure a holiday date Event Coverage Settings Configure a date range Weekly Coverage Settings Configure a time and day or days that will be applied weekly 9 Click Save The Coverage Rule s page reappears and the new values for the edited rule are listed Edited rules take effect immediately When you remove a coverage rule for a phone extension an unanswered call is either redirected by another rule or if no rule applies to the default coverage point Configuring Bridge Permissions 181 To remove one or more coverage rules from a phone extension Access the office location of the user whose call coverage you want to configure see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window 2 Locate the user whose call coverage rule you want to delete 3 In the Phones column click the Phones link The User Ass
332. tep is to map the primary extension to a button on each secondary phone See Mapping a Bridged Extension on a Secondary Phone To remove a phone extension from the Bridge Permissions Assigned Phones page follow steps 1 through 4 then Check the box preceding the phone extension for each phone you want to remove from the bridge permission list 2 Click Delete Selected 3 A confirmation window appears Click OK to remove the extension Mapping Bridged Extensions This section describes how to map a bridged extension a primary phone on a secondary phone that has been granted permission to answer calls to a primary phone Bridge mapping associates or maps a primary extension to a button on the secondary phone When a call is placed to the primary extension it also rings on the secondary phone so that it can be answered by the secondary phone user Mapped bridge extensions can be configured by a user through the VCX User web interface or by the administrator through the VCX gt Mapping a Bridged Extension ona Secondary Phone 1 Mapping Bridged Extensions 185 Administration web interface If a bridged extension is mapped through the Administration interface the Button Mappings tab in the VCX User interface for the secondary phone shows the primary extension mapped to a button However the secondary user can change the button mapping unless you lock it see Dynamic Button Mapping Overview Bridgin
333. ternatively you can set the default to no coverage To change the default call coverage for a phone extension Access the office location of the user whose call coverage you want to configure see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window 2 Locate the user whose call coverage you want to configure 3 In the Phones column click the Phones link The User Assigned Phones page appears for the selected user See Figure 51 In the Actions column click Call Coverage The Coverage Rules page appears See Figure 53 This page displays the coverage rules in effect for the phone Initially the only coverage rule listed is the default call coverage point As shown in Figure 53 by the default call coverage point for a phone extension is voicemail 172 CHAPTER 6 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE FEATURES FOR A USER Figure 53 Call Coverage Rules Page Phone Found 4 Coverage Rule s Call Timeout seconds 15 Submit Add Predefined Coverage Rule Add Coverage Rule _ Delete Selected Coverage Start End Coverage Point Action s Voice Mail New Years Day Holiday Jan All Day Event Jul 14 2006 Jul 24 2006 16 00 07 00 641000 Weekly Sun Sat 12 00 13 00 Voice Mail Voice Mail _ Every Day AllDay Prev Page1of1 Next 5 To
334. the instructions in Editing Attendant Console Basic Information 102 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES To delete one or more phone extensions Access the Phones page see Accessing the Phones Page You can delete one or more phone extensions a To delete one extension click Delete in the Actions column for the extension you want to remove a To delete multiple extensions enter a check mark in the check box preceding each phone extension you want to delete and click Delete Selected Click Save The Phones page refreshes and the deleted phone extension or extensions no longer appear in the list Managing User Phone Extensions Assigning a Phone Extension to a User This section describes the following phone extension management tasks a How to assign one or more phone extensions to a user a View the extensions assigned to a user a How to remove an extension assigned to a user This section describes how to assign one or more phone extensions to a user It also describes how you can view the extensions currently assigned to a user To assign a phone extension In the USERS menu click Users on the left side of the page The Users page appears listing all current users See Figure 30 Managing User Phone Extensions 103 Figure 30 Users Page Users Found 5 User s Add User Delete Selected _ Filter Es E mail User Name Phones Action
335. the specified Pattern and the Timeout value elapses the phone generates an error 260 CHAPTER 9 CONFIGURING DIAL PLANS PATTERNS AND DIAL RULES Deleting Dialing Rules Table 28 Dial Rule Field Descriptions continued Field Description Timeout Specify the number of seconds that the phone will wait for another digit to be dialed before it places the call The default timeout is 5 seconds Pattern Specify the pattern used by this dial rule A pattern is a pre defined dial string prefix A pattern can be used as a site ID that indicates which regional or branch call processor should receive a call When a dialed string of numbers includes the configured pattern and meets the minimum and maximum string length the phone s call processor routes the call to the correct destination Click Save The Dial Rules page appears and the new rule is listed You can delete a dial rule that is no longer required by a dial plan However deleting a dial rule removes it from all dial plans to which the rule is assigned To delete a dial rule Click Dial Rules The Dial Rules page appears See Figure 96 Use one of the following rule plan delete options a Click Delete in the Action column for the dial rule a To delete multiple dial rules enter a check mark in the check box preceding each dial rule you want to delete then click Delete Selected The Dial Rules page refreshes Configuring Patterns USERS Patterns ar
336. the Phones Registrations page displays no information Table 15 lists each column and describes the type of information available in that column Table 15 Phone Registrations Page Column Description Priority Specifies the registration priority for the phone registration End Time Specifies the expiration time for the phone registration Deletable Indicates whether the phone registration is a Provisioning static or Dynamic contact User Name Specifies the phone extension Host Specifies the IP address assigned to the phone Port Specifies the port number on the call processing server Type Indicates the type of phone registration for VCX phones the value is SIP Contact Specifies the SIP address configured for emergency calls for this URI Emergency phone Line 112 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Table 15 Phone Registrations Page continued Column Description Action Displays a link Logout that allows you to delete the registration by logging out the phone extension If you click the Logout link the phone becomes unregistered and all the fields on the Phone Registrations page are cleared you may need to refresh the page The Phone Registrations page also includes a Logout All button if the phone extension has at least one registration the extension is logged in to a call processor Click Logout All to delete all phone registrations and disable all login sess
337. the Previous or Next buttons You can also sort all the entries by clicking column headers Speed Dial Numbers First Name Last Name or Phone Address Figure 61 System Speed Dial List Enterprise System Speed Dials Found 2 System Speed Dials Add System Speed Dial Delete Selected a Speed Dial Number First Name Last Name Phone Address Action Bt HR 631001 Delete dll Maria Lopez 641004 Delete Prev Page1of1 Next By default system speed dial entries are available to users connected to the system speed dial master site including branch offices To make the system speed dial entries available to users at other regions in a multi site system you must run the config sh script This script is also used to add users to the Global Directory Log on to each region that will share the Modifying a System Speed Dial Entry Configuring System Speed Dial Numbers 191 system speed dial entries and run the config sh script as described in Directly Adding a User Directory to the Global Directory You can modify any of the information configured for an existing system speed dial entry To modify an existing system speed dial entry In the USERS menu click System Speed Dials The Enterprise System Speed Dials page appears See Figure 61 The page lists the first 12 system speed dial entries Find the entry you want to modify You can press Previous or Next to navigate to a different page or sort entries by clicking the appropriat
338. the dial rules assigned to that dial plan To delete a dial plan Click Dial Plans The Dial Plans page appears See Figure 94 Use one of the following dial plan delete options a Click Delete in the Actions column for the dial plan 258 CHAPTER 9 CONFIGURING DIAL PLANS PATTERNS AND DIAL RULES a To delete multiple dial plans enter a check mark in the check box preceding each dial plan you want to delete then click Delete Selected The Dial Plans page refreshes Configuring Dial Rules Adding Dial Rules 1 Dial rules simplify dialing and are created by configuring patterns for phone numbers or phone number ranges Dial rules can be grouped to create a dialing plan which can then be assigned to a phone profile To add a dial rule From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add the dial rule see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Dial Rules The Dial Rules page appears listing all the currently configured dial rules See Figure 96 Figure 96 Dial Rules Page Dial Rules Found 46 Dial Rule s _ Add Dial Rule Delete Selected Filter 7 Name Min Length Max Length Timeout Pattern Action O 2Eight 3 3 5 8 Delete O 3Five 3 3 5 5 Delete o 3
339. the fields see the field descriptions in Adding Patterns 4 Click Save Deleting Patterns gt The Patterns page appears To delete a pattern A pattern cannot be deleted if it is associated with a route plan The VCX Administrator application generates an error if you try to delete a pattern that is associated with a route plan Click Patterns The Patterns page appears See Figure 99 You can delete one pattern or multiple patterns a To delete one pattern click Delete in the Action column for the pattern entry you want to delete a To delete multiple patterns enter a check mark in the check box preceding each pattern you want to delete then click Delete Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the delete action Click OK The Patterns page appears and the deleted pattern or patterns are no longer listed Configuring Number Translation USERS The VCX system routes calls by translating numbers based on source and destination calling patterns For example you can set up number translation to facilitate calling between users on the same site In a multi site VCX system you can set up a dialing prefix to identify different sites Regional office extensions might use the range 771000 through 771099 A branch office might use the range 641000 through 641009 Callers at each site must dial the complete extension to reach a user at the other site Callers at a site must 264 CHAPTER 9
340. the hostname or IP address of the primary server at the remote regional office in this example R2 whose user directory you want add The Enter the Secondary ROSCA IP Address or Hostname prompt appears Enter the hostname or IP address of the primary server at the local regional office in this example R1 The Enter an Username for both Primary amp Secondary ROCSA s prompt appears Enter the username for the cworks account The default is cworks but may be changed during installation The Enter Password prompt appears Enter the password for the cworks account after the asterisks The default is cworks but may be changed during installation Press Enter 48 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY 10 11 12 The Re type Password prompt appears Reenter the password for the cworks account after the asterisks The Enter the Global Directory Input Path at ROCSA lopt 3com VCX vcxdata db export prompt appears which lists the default path to the location of the regional user directory common file Press Enter 3Com does not recommend changing this default directory path Press Enter to return to the main menu At the prompt enter o to exit the script At the system prompt enter the following command to reload the configuration reload pl The R2 branch users R2B1 and R2B2 will be added to R1 s global directory once the user directory databases resynchronize either automatica
341. the new element appears in the list 4 In the Name column click the new element to associate one or more dialing patterns with the element The Element Patterns page appears Figure 20 shows the patterns in the predefined element named Internal 72 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES Figure 20 Element Patterns Page 7 Element Patterns _ Element Name Internal Found 9 Mapped Pattern s Prev Page1of1 Next Value Action a Delete 4 Delete 5 Delete 6 Delete ia Delete oF Delete Enter pattern value you want to add to element co 5 You can add a pattern by a Entering a pattern in the Enter pattern value you want to add to element field a Selecting a pattern from the drop down list 6 Click Add The Element Patterns page refreshes and the new pattern is listed Continue to add as many patterns as you want to associate with the element Adding or Deleting a You can edit a Class of Service element to either add a new pattern or Class of Service delete an existing pattern However you cannot modify a pattern once it Element Pattern has been added to an element you can only delete a pattern you no longer want and add a new pattern To edit a Class of Service element 1 In the USERS menu click Elements under Class of Service The Elements page appears listing all the currently configured Class of Service elements See Figure 19 2 In the Name column click the elem
342. ther call joins the queue This prevents a flood of notification messages to group members A new notification is not sent until the queue threshold falls below the limit and then exceeds the limit again or the previous message was sent more than 30 seconds ago If you enable both queue notification options and one of the threshold limits is exceeded the telephone display panel of each hunt group member displays the notification message for the appropriate option either calls in queue exceeded or time in queue exceeded However the time in queue threshold is always the first threshold checked Once the time in queue limit has been exceeded only that notification warning message will be displayed even if additional calls arrive that exceed the number of calls threshold Table 27 Add Hunt Group Queue Notification Settings Field Description Example Number of Calls If enabled sends a notification to all members of the 5 1 512 hunt group or attendant logged in or logged out when the queued calls exceed the specified threshold The default is 5 calls The threshold range is 1 to 512 calls The displayed message for an exceeded Number of Calls in queue threshold is HG Queue exceeded call lt hunt group extension gt Hunt Group and Attendant Call Coverage Options Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 227 Table 27 Add Hunt Group Queue Notification Settings continued Field Description Example Time in Queue If en
343. there are no available members of the hunt group the call might be forwarded to a group mailbox or to the receptionist You can configure a hunt group in which all members are fax machines Incoming faxes are routed to an available fax machine Depending on the type of hunt group configured if no fax machine is available pending faxes may be queued until a machine becomes available or they may be sent to the call coverage point The method used to hunt for an available hunt group member is determined by a configured call coverage pattern for that group Pattern types include linear circular and calling groups These patterns are described in the section Hunt Group Types Hunt Group Types The type of hunt group determines how incoming calls are allocated to group members You can configure a linear hunt group a circular hunt group and a calling group Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 219 To illustrate the differences between hunt group types assume you have configured four members A B C and D for each type Note that a member must be logged in to both the VCX system and the group to receive a call Linear Hunt Group An incoming call always rings at the first member phone of the group then if the call is not answered at the phone of the next member in the group list For example if A B C and D are all logged in an incoming call will always ring first at member A s extension If A does not answer the c
344. this end point identifies an IP Telephony and IP Messaging server or an IP Telephony server accept the default port number 5060 m If this end point identifies an IP Messaging server use port number 5065 To verify what IP Port the IP Messaging software uses log in to the server hosting the IP Messaging service and enter the vex config services show command to list VCX configuration details Locate the entry TCP UDP Port on which the IPMS will receive SIP messages and note the port used Click Save The End Points page appears listing the new end point To modify an end point configuration Click End Points The End Points page appears See Figure 104 In the Name column click the name of the end point you want to modify The Edit End Point page appears Modify the fields as required See the field descriptions in Table 30 4 Click Save The End Points page appears You can delete an end point that is no longer required However an end point cannot be deleted if it is associated with a route The VCX Administrator provisioning application will generate an error if you try to delete an end point that is associated with a route To delete one or more end points Click End Points The End Points page appears See Figure 104 You can delete one end point or multiple end points Adding an OutDial Pattern to an End Point Managing End Points 295 a To delete one end point click Delete in the Actions column for the
345. ting 83 default profile 83 deleting 90 designating 90 deleting 92 editing 91 locating 91 viewing member phones 92 phone registrations viewing 110 phone settings modifying 107 phones adding extensions 97 99 call history 115 configuration 95 configuration tasks 144 deleting extensions 101 editing extension settings 100 LCD font size 58 LCD language support 58 Local User Interface 145 Local User Interface menu 145 managing 95 managing extensions 95 password 99 profiles 83 restrictions 112 113 setting a selective ring tone 117 viewing assigned profile 92 viewing MAC address through 152 157 viewing registrations 110 viewing the serial number 152 157 Power over Ethernet cable and Local User Interface 145 powered Ethernet cable and LUI 146 primary servers 18 Provisioning service 17 R regional office accessing through Central Manager 29 deleting regional office global directory 42 listing 43 provisioing through Central Manager 29 remote forward universal configuring 168 requestors adding 316 deleting 317 editing 317 managing 316 ring tones selective 117 specifying for a phone 109 specifying for a phone profile 89 roaming 106 and emergency services 130 limitations 107 route configuration between regional offices 276 for global IP Messaging on a branch office 285 for IP Messaging on a regional office 284 for IP Messaging clients on a regional office 288 for local IP Messaging on a branch office 287 from r
346. tion see Managing Route Plans and Configuring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY The calendar bands can also be used for scheduling group or phone call coverage see Hunt Group and Attendant Call Coverage Options and Configuring Call Coverage for a Telephone To add calendar bands From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add a date based routing parameter see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears 326 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES 2 Click DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY interface page appears See Figure 103 3 Click Calendar Bands The Calendar Bands page appears See Figure 131 Figure 131 Calendar Bands Page Calendar Bands Found 1 Calendar Band s Add Calendar Band Delete Selected mter ED M Start Date End Date Oo Shutdown May 31 2006 17 00 00 Jun 07 2006 07 00 00 Delete Prev Page ia of1 Next 4 Click Add Calendar Band The Add Calendar Band page appears See Figure 132 Figure 132 Add Calendar Band Page Add Calendar Band Calendar Band Information Name Start Date January 1 2006 Time 0 yoo vio End Date January 1 2006 Time Q 0 vio v Save Cancel f Reset Fields marked with an asterisk are required Note Time Day Date configuration is applied according to GMT 5 Ente
347. tion column for the route plan you want to delete a To delete multiple route plans enter a check mark in the check box preceding each route plan you want to delete then click Delete Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the delete action Click OK The Route Plans page refreshes Managing OutDial Patterns This section provides information on how to add edit and delete OutDial patterns An OutDial pattern is an optional configuration element for an end point and determines how the outbound destination number is modified An end point can have many OutDial patterns For example you may want to configure an OutDial pattern for an end point that directs a PSTN call through a PSTN interface so that it does not go through the IP network first and then to the PSTN You can also configure an OutDial pattern for an end point assigned to a route In this case the OutDial pattern could be used to strip off site specific access codes For example if the site code for a branch office is 8 and the defined pattern is 863 you would set the translation string as 63 Stripping off the site code 8 can improve call routing efficiency 314 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Adding OutDial To add an OutDial pattern Patterns 1 From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which you want to add an OutDial pattern see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS i
348. tral Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears Locate the row for the group whose rule you want to delete and click Call Coverage in the Actions column The Coverage Rule s page appears listing all currently assigned coverage rules for the group Do one of the following To remove a single coverage rule click Delete in the Actions column 236 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Adding Local User Extensions to a Hunt Group or Attendant To remove multiple coverage rules enable the check box preceding the name of each rule and click Delete Selected A confirmation box appears verifying you really want to remove these coverage rules from the hunt group Click OK After creating a hunt group or attendant you need to assign users to the group You can assign local and remote users to the group a Local users have extensions on the same site on which the hunt group or attendant is configured Adding local users is described in this section a Remote users have extensions on a regional or branch office which is not the site hosting the hunt group or attendant Adding remote users is described in Adding Remote User Extensions to a Hun
349. ttendant coverage by creating a call coverage rule that designates an extension auto attendant or voice mailbox as the coverage point during non business hours Changing the Default Call Coverage Point for a Group When you create a hunt group or attendant VCX software automatically assigns the group s voice mailbox as the default coverage point You can change the default call coverage point to a telephone number or extension to which unanswered calls to the group or attendant should be redirected Note that you cannot delete the default coverage point Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 229 To change the default call coverage point 1 From the Central Manager select a VCX server see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window 2 Click Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups page appears Figure 78 3 Click on the Call Coverage link in the Actions column for the appropriate hunt group The Coverage Rules page appears Figure 79 This page displays the coverage rules in effect for the group Initially the only coverage rule listed is the default call coverage point As shown in Figure 79 the default call coverage point is the group voice mailbox Voice Mail Figure 79 Hunt Group Coverage Rules Page Coverage Rule s Hu
350. uired Click Save The Routes page appears To delete one or more routes Click Routes The Routes page appears See Figure 109 You can delete one route or multiple routes a To delete one route click Delete in the Actions column for the route you want to delete a To delete multiple routes enter a check mark in the check box preceding each route you want to delete then click Delete Selected A confirmation window appears prompting you to verify the delete action Click OK The Routes page refreshes To assign an end point to a route Click Routes The Routes page appears See Figure 109 In the Actions column for the route click End Points 300 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES The Route Assigned End Points page appears See Figure 111 Figure 111 Route Assigned End Points Page Route Assigned End Points Route Regionla Found 3 End Point s Assign End Points Unassign Selected Update Fiter Description Type Active Network Address Sort Order Actions eee g CallP Primary Primary CallP Call canal OutDial Patterns Oo Ria Reg1a7 Processor Yes v 10 230 63 6 5060 0 Unassiqn CallP Secondary CallP Call 3 OutDial Patterns O Secondary R1b Reg1b7 Processor_ Yes amp 10 230 63 8 5060 1 Unassian IPM Voice and MOH 1 Gateway Yes 10 230 63 5 5060 clita Fale Unassiq
351. uite a Enterprise Management Suite Getting Started Guide Version 2 3 a Enterprise Management Suite User Guide Version 2 3 a Enterprise Management Suite 2 3 for VCX 7 1 User Guide Digital Gateways a V7122 and V6100 Digital User Guide Version 4 8 a V6100 Digital Fast Track Installation Guide Version 4 8 a V7122 Digital Fast Track Installation Guide Version 4 8 Analog Gateways a V7111 Analog Fast Track Installation Guide Version 4 8 a V7111 Analog User Guide Version 4 8 a V6000 Analog Fast Track Installation Guide Version 4 8 a V6000 Analog User Guide Version 4 8 Comments gt Send e mail comments about this guide or about any Voice product documentation to VOICE Techcomm_ comments 3com com Include the following information with your comments Document title a Document part number found on the front page a Page number a Your name and organization optional Example VCX Administration Guide Part Number 900 0383 01 Rev AA Page 25 Please address all questions regarding the 3Com software to your authorized 3Com representative VCX SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW The 3Com VCX IP Telephony Solution delivers reliable highly scalable comprehensive standards based IP telephony for large enterprises This chapter provides an overview of the VCX system and the steps required to enable devices to communicate in a VCX environment This chapter includes the following topics a Network based Telephon
352. ular extension When the user at that extension calls the user in this case 641005 hears the selected ring tone To assign a ring tone to an incoming call for the phone selected in step 3 go to step 4 a Hunt Group and Bridged Calls Allows you to assign a ring tone to a user s phone for a hunt group extension or bridged line In Figure 38 the user 641005 is a member of the hunt group at extension 641010 Also extension 641004 is bridged to this user s extension 641005 a call to 641004 rings on both extensions Configuring Selective Ringing 119 If the selected user extension is not a hunt group member or mapped to a bridged extension the Hunt Group and Bridged Calls column will have no entries a When a caller dials the hunt group number the hunt group member in this case 641005 hears the selected ring tone indicating a hunt group call By default the hunt group ring tone is configured in the profile assigned to the phone see Creating a Phone Profile To change the default hunt group ring tone for the phone selected in step 3 go to step 5 a When a caller dials the bridged extension 641004 the user at 641005 hears the selected ring tone indicating a bridged call By default the bridged line ring tone is configured in the profile assigned to the phone see Creating a Phone Profile To change the default bridged line ring tone for the phone selected in step 3 go to step 6 4 To configure selective ringing for
353. umbers Therefore the values you enter for the Start Number and the End Number must satisfy the following formula 1 lt End Number Start Number lt 2000 End Number Specifies last number that the VCX system can use to park a call The default end number is 899 Time Out seconds Specifies the number of seconds a call will be parked by default 300 seconds 5 minutes When the Time Out value is reached the call rings back to the user who parked the call 4 Click Update to set the configuration parameters gt CONFIGURING GROUPS This chapter describes how to configure VCX telephone user groups and includes the following topics a Configuring Call Pickup Groups a Configuring Page Groups Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants a Using the Group Search Tool All of the phone features described in this chapter are configured through VCX Administrator provisioning application menu options available on the USERS interface See Accessing the User Configuration Interface Be sure to set your Web browser preferences so that the cache is updated whenever you modify or view a new web page 210 CHAPTER 8 CONFIGURING GROUPS Configuring Call Pickup Groups Creating a Call Pickup Group 1 A VCX telephone user can use a call pickup feature to answer a call that is ringing on another VCX telephone There are two types of call pickup a Directed Call Pickup Allows a user to answer a call rin
354. und or outbound calls for a CoS element a Inthe Name column locate the element containing the calling pattern you want to allow b For inbound calls ensure that the value Whitelist appears in the Inbound column c For outbound calls ensure that the value Whitelist appears in the Outbound column To disable inbound or outbound calls for a CoS element a Inthe Name column locate the element containing the calling pattern you want to block b For inbound calls ensure that the value Blacklist appears in the Inbound column c For outbound calls ensure that the value Blacklist appears in the Outbound column To enable or disable trunk to trunk calls for a CoS a To enable trunk to trunk calls ensure that the value Whitelist appears in the Trunk To Trunk Transfer field a To disable trunk to trunk calls ensure that the value Blacklist appears in the Trunk To Trunk Transfer field To enable or disable call forwarding to the PSTN for a CoS a To enable call forwarding to the PSTN ensure that the value Whitelist appears in the Forward To Trunk field a To disable call forwarding to the PSTN ensure that the value Blacklist appears in the Forward To Trunk field 70 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES Deleting a Class of Service Configuring Class You can delete a Class of Service as long as the CoS is not currently in use The VCX Administrator interface will not allow you to delete a CoS assigned to a telephon
355. unt Group Assigned Phones page appears listing current members of the group See Figure 87 External members are flagged with an asterisk Do one of the following Tounassign a single group member enable the check box preceding the user extension and click Unassign in the Actions column Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 243 Tounassign multiple group members enable the check box preceding each user extension and click Unassign Selected A confirmation box appears prompting you to confirm this action Click OK The Hunt Group Assigned Phones page reappears and the removed members are no longer listed Next you must access the site hosting the remote user extension and remove the extension from the group From the Central Manager select the VCX server on which the phone extension is configured see Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager The USERS interface is enabled and the Users page appears This page lists all the users configured on this server The menu options for the USERS interface appear on the left side of the window Click Phones The Phones page appears Locate the phone extension you want to remove from the group In the Actions column click Hunt Groups The Phone Assigned Hunt Groups page appears listing the groups of which the extension is a member External groups are flagged with an asterisk See Figure 87 Enable the check box preceding the external group and
356. up containing the member whose login status you want to modify and click Status in the Actions column The Hunt Group Status page appears See Figure 88 Locate the member whose login status you want to modify and select the new status Logged Out or Logged In in the Status drop down list See Configuring the Message Waiting Indicator for Hunt Group Members for information on the Message Waiting Indicator MWI field Click Submit The group member s status is updated As described in Configuring a Hunt Group or Attendant you can specify a call coverage point for a hunt group or attendant One possible call coverage point is the voicemail account associated with the group extension If a caller leaves voicemail for the group you can specify which member phones receive notification of the new voicemail message Notification is sent by illuminating the Message Waiting Indicator MWI light on a phone You can configure a hunt group or attendant so that some one or all members receive notification Once the message is reviewed the MWI is extinguished on all phones In addition to MWI illumination a member configured to receive group voicemail notification also sees group mailbox status in the display panel on his or her phone The member presses the phone s Message button to display a list of accessible voice mailboxes The list includes the member s personal mailbox and any group mailboxes from which the member is configured to receiv
357. up information see Using the Group Search Tool In both cases search results list user information and group membership information To search for a user 1 Click the SEARCH main menu option on top of any page The Search Users page appears See Figure 14 Configuring User Profiles 61 Figure 14 Search Users Page Search Users Search Information Phone Address First Name Last Name Weblogin User Name Group Name Group Address 2 Use the following fields not case sensitive to enter search criteria m Phone Address Search using a phone extension assigned to a user a First Name Search using a user s first name a Last Name Search using a user s last name a Weblogin User Name Search using the username assigned to a user Group Name Search using the name of the group Group Address Search using the extension assigned to a group You can enter partial search criteria For example if you enter lo in the Last Name field the results will include any last name that includes those letters such as Lopez Logan or Carmello You can enter search criteria in one or more fields If you do not enter any search criteria the search tool returns all members in all groups To clear all fields click Reset 3 Click Search The Search Results page appears listing all the users who satisfy the search criteria For example Fi
358. uring Number Translation Patterns DIRECTORY 333 globally applied to any VCX system feature that uses that pattern for example a route plan Click a number in the Indirect Requestor column The Edit Requestor page appears displaying the current properties of the selected requestor You can modify these properties described in Editing Requestors Note that any modifications are globally applied to any VCX system feature that uses that requestor Click the profile name in the Phone Profile column The Edit Phone Profile page appears displaying the current properties of the selected profile You can modify these properties described in Editing a Phone Profile Note that any modifications are globally applied to any VCX system feature that uses that profile Click a holiday week day band day time band or calendar band in the appropriate column to edit the properties of that holiday or band see Editing Holidays Editing Week Day Bands Editing Day Time Bands or Editing Calendar Bands Note that any modifications are globally applied to any VCX system feature that uses that holiday or band Deleting Number To delete a number translation pattern Translations 1 Click Number Translation The Number Translations page appears See Figure 135 2 You can delete one or multiple number translations To delete one number translation click Delete in the Action column To delete multiple number translations enter a check mark i
359. used 3 Key Pad Selects menu items or enter numeric characters in a configuration option Use the key to save changes after you edit an item 4 Access buttons AB1 AB3 Selects LUI menu items labeled AB1 AB2 AB3 5 Volume Down Button Selects LUI menu item labeled AB4 6 MSG Button Starts and exits from the LUI utility or exits from a menu item and moves to the next higher menu If you press the MSG button 152 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS before you save a change to a setting you exit the menu item without saving the change 7 Scroll Buttons Moves up or down through the LUI menu and select hex digits when editing a MAC address LUI Configuration Options for Business and Basic Telephones Table 20 describes each LUI utility menu item that appears in the LUI for the Business and Basic Telephones Table 20 Business and Basic Telephone LUI Menu Items Menu Option Description 1 View Settings Press 1 on the number pad and scroll to view these options MAC Address MAC address of this telephone NCP MAC Address MAC address of the primary call processor SW Build Ident Software version running on this telephone Serial Rev Telephone serial number and hardware version Phone Port Speed Speed and duplex setting of the LAN connection PC Port Speed The speed and duplex setting of the PC port to the device if any connected to the port My IP A
360. verage option for this rule a Send to Voice Mail Unanswered calls to the hunt group or attendant are redirected to the group voice mailbox Send to Number Unanswered calls to the hunt group or attendant are redirected to the specified telephone number or extension for example a receptionist an Auto Attendant or another hunt group If a call coverage is internal another VCX extension enter the extension number Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants 235 If call coverage is external outside the VCX system enter the number as an E 164 number 8475555555 Enable the scheduling setting you want this rule to apply a Holiday Coverage Settings Configure the holiday date a Event Coverage Settings Configure a date range a Weekly Coverage Settings Configure a time and day or days that will be applied weekly Click Save The Coverage Rule s page reappears and the new rule is listed New rules are assigned to the hunt group or attendant and take effect immediately You cannot edit an existing rule for example to adjust the time You must delete the rule and create a new rule with the correct settings Deleting a Call Coverage Rule When you remove a coverage rule for a hunt group or attendant an unanswered call to the group is either redirected by another rule or if no rule applies to the default coverage point To remove one or more coverage rules from a hunt group or attendant From the Cen
361. vice includes all features that are mapped to buttons in a selected button mapping template 80 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES This chapter describes how to add delete and modify telephone profiles and extensions It describes how to assign an extension to a user and how to configure an attendant console This chapter includes the following topics a Accessing the User Configuration Interface a Managing Phone Profiles a Managing Phone Extensions a Assigning a Phone Extension to a User Deleting a Phone Extension a Viewing Phone Registration Information m Adding Anonymous Call Restrictions Configuring Phone Restrictions a Viewing Call History Configuring Selective Ringing a Configuring Media Access Control Configuring an Attendant Console Configuring Emergency Services Be sure to set your web browser preferences so that the cache is updated whenever you modify or view a new web page 82 CHAPTER 4 ADDING VCX TELEPHONES AND ATTENDANT CONSOLES Accessing the User You can use the VCX Administrator provisioning application to manage Configuration telephone profiles and extensions configure an attendant console and Interface configure emergency services Configuration pages for these tasks are available through menu options available on the USERS interface To access the USERS interface 1 Access the office lo
362. ward busy 76 call forward ring no answer 76 call forward universal 76 caller id 77 caller identity 77 directed call pickup 77 editing 162 phone restrictions 112 calling groups 219 See also hunt groups calls answering for a group 210 answering for another user 210 Camp On 78 configuring parameters 192 CDRs retreiving automatically 338 retrieving manually 338 Central Manager 27 28 accessing 29 overview 28 circular hunt group 219 class of service adding 66 adding elements 68 configuring 65 editing 68 elements 70 managing 65 trunk to trunk 68 class of service elements adding 68 deleting 69 cloning phone profiles 93 users 63 Common Agent service 17 configuration options hardware 19 software 17 configuration tasks 21 configuring 3Com telephones 144 accessing Directory interface 270 accessing the Users interface 54 attendant console 122 bridge mapping 184 bridge permissions 181 calendar bands 325 call coverage 170 call forward busy 165 call forward ring no answer 165 call forward universal 166 call park 206 caller identity 166 class of service 65 class of service elements 70 data collection frequency 43 data collection frequency at a branch office 44 data collection frequency for a regional office 44 day time bands 323 dial plans 254 dial rules 258 directed call pickup 167 elements 70 emergency services 129 end points 291 holidays 318 hunt group number and mailbox 221 hunt groups 2
363. whose feature you want to change and select a new feature see Mappable Features On Models 2102 and 3102 you can specify the number of lines available to a phone by mapping buttons to the System Appearance feature maximum of 3 lines for the Model 2102 maximum of 9 lines for the Model 3102 You can map any button as a System Appearance line however multiple lines must be mapped to consecutive buttons You cannot map System Appearance lines on the Model 3103 phone Note that the number of lines available for mapping can be restricted by the value specified in the phone profile assigned to a phone see Creating a Phone Profile VCX software will generate an error if the number of mapped System Appearance lines exceeds the number of lines specified in the phone profile Similarly if you want to map buttons as Bridged Lines see Mapping Bridged Extensions you must use consecutive buttons Enable or disable the Lock check box for the feature Some features are locked by default for example the System Appearance lines on Models 2102 and 3102 A System Appearance line mapped to a button cannot be unlocked so a user can remap it You map the button to another function to unlock it but this reduces the number of lines available to make or receive calls on the phone 9 For the Number Index field a f instep 7 you added a personal speed dial enter a number in the Number Index field The number to enter is the current 200 CHA
364. wing Call Restrictions 115 Deleting Call Restrictions 115 Viewing Call History 115 Configuring Selective Ringing 117 Configuring Media Access Control 120 Adding a MAC Address 121 Editing a MAC Address 122 Deleting a MAC Address 122 Configuring an Attendant Console 122 Supported Attendant Console Feature Buttons 123 Mapping Phone Extension to an Attendant Console 124 Editing Feature Mapping Buttons on an Attendant Console 127 Editing Extensions on an Attendant Console 127 Editing Attendant Console Basic Information 128 Deleting an Attendant Console 128 Attendant Console Busy Lamp Flash Descriptions 129 Configuring Emergency Services 129 Emergency Calling Considerations for Roaming Users 130 Adding ERLs_ 131 Adding or Editing the Emergency Defaults 135 Deleting ERLs 136 Editing the IP Address Range of an ERL 136 Deleting IP Addresses from an ERL 137 Editing Emergency Numbers 137 Deleting Emergency Numbers from an ERL 138 Editing Emergency Gateway IP Addresses from an ERL 138 Deleting Emergency Gateway IP Addresses from an ERL 139 Editing Emergency Lines for an ERL 140 Deleting Emergency Lines from an ERL 141 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS 3Com Telephone Configuration 144 3Com Telephone Local User Interface Menus 145 Accessing the Business and Basic Telephone LUI Menus 145 Accessing the Manager s Telephone LUI Menus 146 Business and Basic Telephone Interfaces 147 Manager s Telephone Interface 155 C
365. wing the phone extension or extensions assigned to the user The unassigned extensions are no longer listed The Phones page will show the phone extension as Disabled and will use the phone extension in the Display Name field see Figure 27 With VCX software version 7 1 a user can log in to any phone in the system regardless of the call processor to which the phone is connected In previous versions of VCX software a user could only log in to a phone connected to call processor on which the phone extension was configured The processor on which the phone extension is configured is referred to as the home call processor All other processors in the VCX system are referred to as foreign call processors To log in to a phone connected to a foreign call processor a user enters his or her phone extension and password through the Telephone User Interface TUI The preconfigured foreign primary and secondary call processor IP addresses on the phone are not changed The foreign call processor routes user requests back to the home call processor Note that each roaming user is allowed one registered device at each remote location Modifying a User s Phone Settings 107 If the foreign call processor cannot contact the home call processor the user is denied access to the system because password verification is not possible If the user s home call processor becomes unavailable after the user has logged in the foreign call processor deact
366. with this Type of Service 7 When you are finished adding features you can either navigate to another menu option or log out It is important to understand the consequences of step 6 m The features you select appear on and can be configured through the Assigned Phone Features page see Configuring Phone Features m The features you select can also be configured by the user through the VCX User interface or the Telephone User Interface TUI m The features you select can be mapped to buttons on the 3Com Business telephones Models 3102 and 2102 and for the Manager s telephone Model 3103 76 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING VCX USERS AND SERVICES If you do not select a feature in step 6 that is mapped to a button in one of the selected button mapping templates there will be a mismatch between the template the Type of Service You must ensure that the Type of Service includes all features that are mapped to buttons in a selected button mapping template Table 11 lists the calling features you can make available for phones assigned to a ToS Table 11 Calling Features for Phones Calling Feature Description Call Forward Universal Use this feature to redirect all incoming calls Use this feature when the user is away from the phone for an assigned by default extended period of time The access code feature code is 465 See Configuring Call Forward Universal Speed Dial When making a call use a speed dial to provi
367. xample in a single site system a Redirect Call Processor Identifies the end point as a redirect call processor Use this type of call processing end point when a call does not terminate at the end point and therefore requires further routing information For example in a multi site system a regional office can act as a redirect call processor for its branch offices Calls from a branch to destinations outside of the branch are sent to the regional office which redirects each call to its proper destination Active Determines if the end point is active or inactive A call processor with a route that includes an inactive end point cannot forward calls to that end point Yes active No inactive Name Enter a unique name that identifies the end point Description Optionally enter a string that describes the location or purpose of the end point Site Id Enter the site identifier for this end point The site ID is typically the pattern prefix dialed by a caller to reach a regional or branch office IP Address Enter the IP address of the end point for example the VCX server hosting the call processor or the gateway 294 CHAPTER 10 CONFIGURING ROUTING AND TRANSLATION SERVICES Editing End Points Deleting End Points Table 30 End Point Field Descriptions continued Name Description IP Port Specifies the IP Port number used by the end point The default port number is 5060 m If
368. y EE NCP IP The NCP IP address configured in the telephone s memory though the LUI utility EE VLAN Config VLAN values configured in telephone s memory Flash BootStrap Version of bootstrap software running on the phone Flash Download Version of downloader software running on the phone Flash Operation The version of operational software running on the phone 158 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS Table 21 Manager s Telephone LUI Menu Items continued Menu Option Description Modify Display Displays a single option Set Contrast that allows you change the LCD contrast on the Display Panel Configure IP Address Configure Subnet Mask Configure Gateway IP Address Lets you specify the IP information for this telephone If you have a DHCP server this information is automatically provided by the server When entering an IP address a Use the key pad to enter digits 0 9 a Use the Left button to delete the character to the left of the cursor position Use the Right button to highlight the cursor position m If any of the fields within the IP address contain only one or two digits add leading zeros Example Enter 10 234 1 125 as 010 234 001 125 The interface automatically adds a period Press the button under the Save tab or press the key to commit your address change Configure NCP IP Address Lets you specify the IP address of the p
369. y a VCX Software Components a VCX Hardware Configurations a VCX Configuration Tasks a About VCX Administrator Passwords 16 CHAPTER 1 VCX SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW Network based Telephony The VCX IP Telephony Solution referred to in this guide as the VCX system merges telephony with networking by delivering business telephone service over a data network The VCX architecture provides a distributed call processing system using the SIP signalling protocol to establish voice video and text sessions between SIP phones and other SIP compatible devices The system can be deployed across enterprises in any topology from single site campuses to highly distributed organizations with thousands of branches VCX servers run the VCX operating system and host software components such as the Call Processor VCX applications such as IP Messaging and configuration databases SIP enabled endpoints include VCX telephones and gateways which provide user access to the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN VCX system components can be installed in different configurations according to the features required and the number of subscribers that must be supported The system configuration determines the tasks you must perform to enable communication between components VCX Software Components describes the VCX software components VCX Hardware Configurations describes the two basic VCX configurations single site and multi site system
370. your emergency number and that the dial plan is included in the phone profile assigned to your users extensions See Configuring Emergency Services for more information 262 CHAPTER 9 CONFIGURING DIAL PLANS PATTERNS AND DIAL RULES Figure 98 Patterns Page Patterns Found 31 Pattern s Delete Selected Fiter EE a F sip Delete o sip 0 o Delete Oo sip t 1 Delete a soz r Delete i o sip 3 ar Delete o sip iG Delete Oo sas iG Datete O voicemail 50 Delete o sip 6 6 Delete Oo Region1 63 Delete P Region2 64 Delete Oo sip 7 w Delete Prev Page 1 of3 Next gt gt 3 Click Add Pattern The Add Pattern page appears See Figure 99 Figure 99 Add Pattern Page Add Pattern Pattern Information Name Pattern Save Cancel Jf Reset Fields marked with an asterisk are required 4 In the Name field enter a unique name for the pattern 5 In the Pattern field enter the pattern value The value can contain a single wild card and if present should be the last character in the pattern value The limit is 64 characters 6 Click Save The Patterns page appears and the new pattern is listed Editing Patterns Configuring Number Translation USERS 263 To edit a pattern Click Patterns The Patterns page appears See Figure 99 2 In the Name column click the name of the pattern you want to edit 3 Modify
371. ys links that allow you to launch either VCX Administrator provisioning application or the IP Messaging Administrator provisioning application for the selected site a regional office or an associated branch office Accessing a VCX Site through the Central Manager This section describes how to access the VCX Administrator provisioning application or the IP Messaging Administrator provisioning application through the Central Manager to manage either a regional or branch office To access the Central Manager From a web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher enter the IP address of the server running the Authentication and Directory service see Central Manager Overview in your browser s address bar The 3Com VCX V7000 main page appears Figure 2 which lists the Central Management Console link the VCX User Interface link and if installed the IP Messaging Web provisioning link Note that you can display pages in one of several languages by clicking the appropriate link in the top right corner of the page 30 CHAPTER 2 ACCESSING THE CENTRAL MANAGER AND GLOBAL DIRECTORY Figure 1 3Com VCX V7000 Main Page English US fa 44 A 32 CN Frangais CA Frangais FR Espanol MX Espanol SP 3Com VCX V7000 Networked Telephony Solution These interfaces will help you configure system and user settings IP Messaging Web Provisioning Central Management Console User Interface For
372. ystems 272 Route Plan Configuration for Multi site Systems 275 Route Configuration to a Gateway 281 Route Configuration for Voicemail and Music on Hold 283 Configuring Patterns DIRECTORY 290 Managing End Points 291 Adding End Points 291 Editing End Points 294 Deleting End Points 294 Adding an OutDial Pattern to an End Point 295 Deleting OutDial Patterns from Existing End Points 297 Managing Routes 297 Adding Routes 297 Editing Routes 299 Deleting Routes 299 Assigning End Points to Routes 299 Editing Priorities of End Points Assigned to a Route 301 Removing an End Point Assigned to a Route 301 Assigning an OutDial Pattern toa Route 302 Unassigning an OutDial Pattern for a Route 303 Managing Route Plans 304 Adding a Route Plan 305 Using the Route Plan Wizard 308 Editing a Route Plan 312 Deleting a Route Plan 313 Managing OutDial Patterns 313 Adding OutDial Patterns 314 Editing OutDial Patterns 315 Deleting OutDial Patterns 315 Managing Requestors 316 Adding Requestors 316 Editing Requestors 317 Deleting Requestors 317 Managing Holidays 318 Adding Holidays 318 Editing Holidays 319 Deleting Holidays 320 Managing Week Day Bands 320 Adding Week Day Bands 320 Editing Week Day Bands 322 Deleting Week Day Bands 322 Managing Day Time Bands 323 Adding Day Time Bands 323 Editing Day Time Bands 324 Deleting Day Time Bands 325 Managing Calendar Bands 325 Adding Calendar Bands 325 Editing Calendar Bands 327 Deleting Calendar Bands 327 Con

3Com VCX V7000 Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents